NetBackup 52xx and 5330 Appliance Admin Guide-2.7.3

Veritas NetBackup
Appliance Administrator's
Guide
Release 2.7.3
NetBackup 52xx and 5330
Document Revision 1
Veritas NetBackup Appliance Administrator's Guide

Release 2.7.3 - Document Revision 1
Legal Notice
Copyright 2016 Veritas Technologies LLC. All rights reserved.
Veritas, the Veritas Logo, and NetBackup are trademarks or registered trademarks of Veritas
Technologies LLC or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. Other names may be
trademarks of their respective owners.
This product may contain third party software for which Veritas is required to provide attribution
to the third party (Third Party Programs). Some of the Third Party Programs are available
under open source or free software licenses. The License Agreement accompanying the
Software does not alter any rights or obligations you may have under those open source or
free software licenses. Refer to the third party legal notices document accompanying this
Veritas product or available at:
https://www.veritas.com/about/legal/license-agreements
The product described in this document is distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying,
distribution, and decompilation/reverse engineering. No part of this document may be
reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Veritas Technologies
LLC and its licensors, if any.
THE DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH
DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID. VERITAS TECHNOLOGIES LLC
SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE, OR USE OF THIS
DOCUMENTATION. THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENTATION IS
SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
The Licensed Software and Documentation are deemed to be commercial computer software
as defined in FAR 12.212 and subject to restricted rights as defined in FAR Section 52.227-19
"Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights" and DFARS 227.7202, et seq.
"Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as
applicable, and any successor regulations, whether delivered by Veritas as on premises or
hosted services. Any use, modification, reproduction release, performance, display or disclosure
of the Licensed Software and Documentation by the U.S. Government shall be solely in
accordance with the terms of this Agreement.
Veritas Technologies LLC
500 E Middlefield Road
Mountain View, CA 94043
http://www.veritas.com
Technical Support
Technical Support maintains support centers globally. All support services will be delivered
in accordance with your support agreement and the then-current enterprise technical support
policies. For information about our support offerings and how to contact Technical Support,
visit our website:
https://www.veritas.com/support
You can manage your Veritas account information at the following URL:
https://my.veritas.com
If you have questions regarding an existing support agreement, please email the support
agreement administration team for your region as follows:
Worldwide (except Japan)
[email protected]
Japan
[email protected]
Documentation
The latest documentation is available on the Veritas website:
https://sort.veritas.com/documents
Documentation feedback
Your feedback is important to us. Suggest improvements or report errors or omissions to the
documentation. Include the document title, document version, chapter title, and section title
of the text on which you are reporting. Send feedback to:
[email protected]
You can also see documentation information or ask a question on the Veritas community site:
http://www.veritas.com/community/
Veritas Services and Operations Readiness Tools (SORT)

Veritas Services and Operations Readiness Tools (SORT) is a website that provides information
and tools to automate and simplify certain time-consuming administrative tasks. Depending
on the product, SORT helps you prepare for installations and upgrades, identify risks in your
datacenters, and improve operational efficiency. To see what services and tools SORT provides
for your product, see the data sheet:
https://sort.veritas.com/data/support/SORT_Data_Sheet.pdf
Contents
Chapter 1
Overview
................................................................................ 9
About NetBackup appliances ............................................................ 9

About the Master Server role .......................................................... 14
About the Media Server role ........................................................... 15
About accessing the NetBackup Appliance Web Console ..................... 15
Web browsers supported by Appliance ....................................... 16
Disabling the Untrusted Connection page in Mozilla Firefox ............. 17
About the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu ...................................... 18
Command limitations on appliances that are not configured ............ 19
About Appliance console components .............................................. 19
About using the links on the title bar ........................................... 19
Accessing and using help ........................................................ 20
About using Web browser bookmarks ......................................... 22
Avoiding CSRF (Cross Site Request Forgery) ............................. 22
About the NetBackup Appliance Web Console login page ..................... 23
NetBackup Appliance home page .................................................... 28
Common tasks in Appliance ........................................................... 30
About the NetBackup Appliance documentation .................................. 31
Chapter 2
Monitoring the NetBackup appliance ........................... 34

About monitoring the NetBackup Appliance .......................................
About hardware monitoring and alerts ...............................................
Monitor > Hardware options ......................................................
About Email notification from a NetBackup appliance .....................
About Symantec Data Center Security on the NetBackup
appliance ..............................................................................
Monitor > SDCS Events ...........................................................
Viewing SDCS audit log details .................................................
Filtering SDCS audit logs .........................................................
Setting the SDCS audit log retention specification .........................
About Symantec Data Center Security Downloads ........................
Connecting to the SDCS server .................................................
Revert SDCS to unmanaged mode on a NetBackup
appliance ........................................................................
34
35
35
44
45
47
49
51
51
53
56
56
Contents
Chapter 3
Managing a NetBackup appliance from the

NetBackup Appliance Web Console ...................... 58
About the Manage views ................................................................ 58
About storage configuration ............................................................ 61
Manage > Storage .................................................................. 65
Checking partition details ......................................................... 72
Resizing a partition ................................................................. 74
Resize dialog ........................................................................ 76
Troubleshooting resize-related issues ......................................... 77
Moving a partition ................................................................... 78
Move <partition> dialog ........................................................... 78
Moving the MSDP partition from a base disk to an expansion disk
for optimum performance ................................................... 79
Scanning storage devices from the NetBackup Appliance Web
Console ......................................................................... 82
Adding the storage space from a newly available disk .................... 83
Removing an existing storage disk ............................................. 84
Monitoring the progress of storage manipulation tasks ................... 86
Scanning storage devices using the NetBackup Appliance Shell
Menu ............................................................................. 86
About Copilot functionality and share management ....................... 89
About viewing storage space information using the Show command
................................................................................... 100
About storage email alerts ...................................................... 112
About appliance supported tape devices ......................................... 113
Adding external robots to the NetBackup appliance ..................... 113
About configuring Host parameters for your appliance ........................ 114
Manage > Host > Data Buffer options ....................................... 114
Configuring data buffer parameters .......................................... 116
Manage > Host > Lifecycle options ........................................... 116
Configuring lifecycle parameters .............................................. 120
About configuring deduplication solutions .................................. 120
About BMR integration ........................................................... 123
Manage > Host > IPMI options ................................................ 124
Manage > Appliance Restore ........................................................ 125
About creating an appliance checkpoint .................................... 126
About rollback to a checkpoint ................................................. 135
About NetBackup appliance factory reset ................................... 146
Manage > License ..................................................................... 158
Managing license keys on the NetBackup appliance .................... 158
Adding a permanent license key if an evaluation license key
expires ......................................................................... 160
Contents
About the Migration Utility .............................................................

Selection Criteria ..................................................................
Migration Job Status ..............................................................
Policy Conversion .................................................................
Best practices to run a migration job .........................................
Software release updates for NetBackup Appliances ..........................
Manage > Software Updates ...................................................
Methods for downloading appliance software release
updates ........................................................................
Installing a NetBackup appliance version 2.7.x software update
using the NetBackup Appliance Web Console ......................
Installing a NetBackup appliance version 2.7.x software update
using the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu .........................
Appliance servers to upgrade ..................................................
Software Updates Installation Status .........................................
About installing an EEB ..........................................................
About installing NetBackup Administration Console and client
software ........................................................................
Manage > Additional Servers ........................................................
Managing additional servers to the appliance .............................
Manage > Certificates .................................................................
Chapter 4
161
164
168
171
174
175
176
178
184
188
190
191
192
194
199
199
200
Managing NetBackup appliance using the

NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu ........................ 202
Expanding the bandwidth on the NetBackup appliance .......................
About configuring the maximum transmission unit size .......................
About OpenStorage plugin installation .............................................
Installing OpenStorage plugin ..................................................
Uninstalling OpenStorage plugin ..............................................
About mounting a remote NFS ......................................................
Mounting an NFS remote drive ................................................
Unmounting an NFS drive ......................................................
About running NetBackup commands from the appliance ....................
About NetBackup administrator capabilities ................................
Creating NetBackup administrator user accounts ........................
Deleting NetBackup administrator user accounts ........................
Viewing NetBackup administrator user accounts .........................
About Auto Image Replication between appliances ............................
About Auto Image Replication between NetBackup
appliances ....................................................................
About Auto Image Replication between NetBackup appliances
and deduplication appliances ............................................
202
203
204
206
207
208
209
211
212
213
218
222
222
223
223
228
Contents
Chapter 5
Understanding the NetBackup appliance

settings .......................................................................... 229
About modifying the appliance settings ............................................
Settings > Notifications ................................................................
Settings > Notifications > Alert Configuration .............................
Settings > Notifications > Login Banner .....................................
Settings > Notification > Registration ........................................
Settings > Network ......................................................................
VLAN configuration for NetBackup Appliances ............................
Settings > Network > Network Settings ......................................
Settings > Network > Fibre Transport ........................................
Settings > Network > Host ......................................................
About IPv4-IPv6-based network support ....................................
Settings > Date and Time ............................................................
Settings > Authentication ..............................................................
About configuring user authentication .......................................
About authorizing NetBackup appliance users ............................
Settings > Authentication .......................................................
Settings > Authentication > LDAP ............................................
Settings > Authentication > Active Directory ...............................
Settings > Authentication > Kerberos-NIS ..................................
Settings > Authentication > User Management ............................
Settings > Password Management .................................................
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting ................................................................ 306

Troubleshooting and tuning appliance from the Appliance Diagnostics
Center ................................................................................
Viewing log files using the Support command ...................................
Where to find NetBackup appliance log files using the Browse
command ............................................................................
About password recovery .............................................................
About disaster recovery ...............................................................
Gathering device logs with the DataCollect command ........................
Setting a NetBackup 5330 storage shelf component to the Service
Allowed mode ......................................................................
Chapter 7
229
231
231
242
246
249
249
250
265
273
275
276
277
278
281
284
284
293
296
298
304
306
310
312
313
313
314
315
Deduplication pool catalog backup and

recovery ........................................................................ 320
Deduplication pool catalog backup policy ......................................... 320
Automatic configuration of the deduplication pool catalog backup
policy ................................................................................. 321
Contents
Manually configuring the deduplication pool catalog backup

policy ................................................................................. 324
Manually updating the deduplication pool catalog backup policy ........... 325
Recovering the deduplication pool catalog ....................................... 326
Index
.................................................................................................................. 328
Chapter
Overview
This chapter includes the following topics:
About NetBackup appliances
About the Master Server role
About the Media Server role
About accessing the NetBackup Appliance Web Console
About the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu
About Appliance console components
About the NetBackup Appliance Web Console login page
NetBackup Appliance home page
Common tasks in Appliance
About the NetBackup Appliance documentation

NetBackup appliances provide a simplified solution for NetBackup configuration
and the daily management of your backup environment. The goal is to provide a
solution that eliminates the need to provide dedicated individuals to manage their
backup environment.
The appliances are rack-mount servers that run on the Linux operating system.
NetBackup Enterprise Server software is already installed and configured to work
with the operating system, the disk storage units, and the robotic tape device.
You can determine what role you want to configure the appliance to perform. You
can choose to configure a 52xx appliance as follows:
Overview
As a master server appliance
As a media server for use with an existing master server appliance
As a media server for use in an existing NetBackup environment
With each of these 52xx configurations, you get the added benefit of internal disk
storage.
A 5330 appliance is configured as a media server by default. You can choose to
configure a 5330 appliance as follows:
As a media server for use with an existing master server appliance
As a media server for use in an existing NetBackup environment
Note: The 5330 appliance does not have internal disk space available for backups
or storage. The space available from the Primary Storage Shelf and up to two
Expansion Storage Shelves can be used for backups.
This appliance version allows for easy expansion of existing NetBackup
environments that have NetBackup 7.7.3 or greater installed. The appliance also
includes its own browser-based interface. This interface is used for local
administration of the network, internal disk storage, tape libraries and much more.
NetBackup appliances support the following features:
Two interfaces for appliance configuration and management:
The NetBackup Appliance Web Console is a web-based graphical user

interface. This interface is compatible with Internet Explorer versions 10.0
and later, and Mozilla Firefox versions 31.0 and later.
The NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu is a command line driven interface.

For a complete description of all appliance commands, refer to the following
document:
NetBackup Appliance Command Reference Guide
Copilot enables Oracle database administrators to work with NetBackup

appliance administrators to perform a streamlined backup and restore process
of Oracle databases.
See About Copilot functionality and share management on page 89.
The NetBackup 5330 Appliance supports a second Expansion Storage Shelf.

You can add a second shelf to a new or an existing system.
Refer to the NetBackup 5330 Appliance Hardware Installation Guide for
instructions on how to install a second shelf.
10
Overview
The Primary Storage Shelf and the Expansion Storage Shelf now support 6TB
disks, an enhancement over the previous 3TB disks.
Note: Individual storage shelves contain either the 3TB disks or the 6TB disks,
but not both.
For more information on the hardware enhancements, refer to the NetBackup
5330 Appliance Product Description Guide.
Starting with NetBackup appliance version 2.7.1, you can use the fully qualified
domain name (FQDN) as the appliance host name.
Media Server Deduplication Pool (MSDP) is supported on all 52xx and 5330
appliances. MSDP offers up to the maximum available capacity on a 52xx and
5330 appliance.
Starting with NetBackup appliance version 2.7.3, the NetBackup Cloud Storage
of data backups and restores are enabled by default on the NetBackup
appliances.
For complete details, refer to the NetBackup Cloud Administrator's Guide
Backup of VMware virtual machines. NetBackup appliance supports direct

backup of VMware virtual machines. The appliance can back up virtual machines
without a separate Windows system as backup host.
Symantec Data Center Security (SDCS) integration. The SDCS agent is installed
and configured when you initially configure your appliance. By default, SDCS
operates in unmanaged mode and helps secure the appliance using host-based
intrusion prevention and detection technology. In managed mode, this agent
ensures that the appliance audit logs are sent to an external SDCS server to
be validated and verified.
BMR integration. When the appliance is configured as a master server, you can
enable Bare Metal Restore (BMR) from the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
IPv4-IPv6 network support. The NetBackup appliances are supported on a dual

stack IPv4-IPv6 network. The NetBackup appliance can communicate with, back
up, and restore an IPv6 client. You can assign an IPv6 address to an appliance,
configure DNS, and routing to include IPv6 based systems. The NetBackup
Appliance Web Console can be used to enter information about both IPv4 and
IPv6 addresses.
ACSLS Support. This feature facilitates configuration of NetBackup ACS robotics

on the NetBackup appliance. The appliance administrator can change the ACSLS
entries in the vm.conf file on the local appliance.
11
Overview
NetBackup SAN Client and Fibre Transport. SAN Client is a NetBackup optional
feature that provides high-speed backups and restores of NetBackup clients.
Fibre Transport is the name of the NetBackup high-speed data transport method
that is part of the SAN Client feature. The backup and restore traffic occurs over
a SAN, and NetBackup server and client administration traffic occurs over the
LAN.
Starting with software version 2.7.3, you can duplicate data between NetBackup
52xx or 5330 appliances using Fibre Transport. The supported data transfer
methods are optimized duplication and Auto Image Replication. To use this
feature, both the source host and target host must use the appliance software
version 2.7.3 or later.
NetBackup preinstalled. Simplifies the deployment and integration into an existing

NetBackup environment.
Note: The Enhanced Auditing feature that was released in NetBackup version
7.7 is not currently supported for use on NetBackup appliances. This feature
should not be configured or enabled on a NetBackup appliance.
Tape out option. The appliance includes a gigabit, dual-port Fibre Channel host
bus adapter (HBA).
Multiple FC ports can be used for tape out, as long as they are solely dedicated
to the tape out function. For more information, refer to the Veritas NetBackup
Appliance Network Ports Reference Guide.
Hardware component monitoring. The appliance can monitor key hardware

components such as the CPU, disks, memory, power supply modules, and fans.
In addition, the appliance provides an optional Call Home feature that allows
proactive monitoring and messaging of these NetBackup components.
The NetBackup appliances support the core NetBackup software agents. The
NetBackup agents optimize the performance of critical databases and
applications.
See the NetBackup Administrator's Guide Volume I for more information about
the policy types that are supported for each software agent. And for the latest
NetBackup appliance compatibility information, refer to the Hardware
Compatibility List on the Support website.
www.netbackup.com/compatibility
Flexible hardware configuration. The appliance can be ordered in a variety of

configurations to provide the necessary Ethernet ports. Along with the built-in
Ethernet ports on the motherboard, expansion cards can be specified to provide
additional 1 GB or 10 GB Ethernet ports. Dual-port and quad-port expansion
cards are supported.
12
Overview
For more information about hardware configuration, refer to the NetBackup Hardware
Installation Guide and NetBackup Appliance and Storage Shelf Product Description
for the appropriate platform.
The following describes how you can incorporate this appliance into your current
NetBackup environment:
Replace unsupported media Replace an existing media server that runs on a platform that
servers
is not supported in NetBackup 7.7.3.
Add deduplication capability
Use AdvancedDisk for

non-deduplicated backups
Add the appliance to an existing NetBackup environment

or replace an existing media server that does not support
deduplication.
Configure MSDP partition on the Appliance for
deduplication capability.
AdvancedDisk can provide faster restore operation but is
not space-optimized like MSDP. This is a good solution
for backups that include strict tape out schedules.
Backups can be expired after duplication to MSDP and
space on AdvancedDisk freed up for next day backups.
13
Overview
Add more storage capability
Add storage capability to existing NetBackup 7.7.3 and

greater environments.
Built-in appliance disk storage for 52xx appliances

The internal disks can be used for additional backup
storage on a 52xx appliance.
Note: The 5330 appliance does not have internal disk

space available for backups or storage. The space
available from the Primary Storage Shelf and up to two
Expansion Storage Shelves can be used for storage.
Tape backup
Additional external storage

The Storage Shelf is an external unit that provides
additional disk storage space. You can add up to four of
these units to a NetBackup 5220, 5230, or a 5240
appliance.
For a NetBackup 5220 appliance, a factory matched
Storage Shelf must be connected to the appliance. The
NetBackup 5230, 5240, or 5330 appliances do not require
a matched Storage Shelf.
When you purchase a 5220 appliance and a Storage
Shelf together, the units are matched at the factory for
optimum performance. For example, if you purchase a
5220 appliance with two Storage Shelf units, the
factory-matched unit must be physically connected to the
appliance. The second (unmatched) unit must be
connected to the first unit, not to the 5220 appliance.
If you need or want to add a Storage Shelf to an existing
or an operational NetBackup appliance, your appliance
may first require a hardware and/or a memory upgrade.
For more information, please contact your NetBackup
appliance representative about your expansion needs.
The appliance includes a Fibre Channel host bus adapter

card for a TLD tape storage device for archive support.

A NetBackup 52xx series appliance can be configured as a master server with its
own internal disk storage. You configure and use this appliance much like you would
use a regular NetBackup master server. You can schedule backups or start a backup
manually. Users with the appropriate privileges can perform restores.
14
Overview
Note: The NetBackup 5330 appliance is a media server by default and is not
supported for the master server role configuration.
This appliance role provides a simplified administrative interface for the local network,
disk, and storage unit management. However, the majority of NetBackup
administration such as backup management must be performed through the
traditional NetBackup Administration Console.
For complete NetBackup administration information, see the NetBackup
Administrator's Guide for UNIX and Linux, Volume I and Volume II.

In this role, a NetBackup 52xx series appliance operates as a media server with its
own internal disk storage.
A NetBackup 5330 appliance is a media server by default. The internal storage in
a 5330 appliance cannot be used for storing any data or taking any backups. The
internal storage is used for storing the operating system, checkpoints, and logs.
Media server appliances use a simplified administrative interface for the local
network and for disk storage management. However, the majority of NetBackup
administration such as backup management is performed on the master server.
When you perform the initial configuration on the appliance, you specify the
associated master server:
For use with a traditional NetBackup master server
Specify master server
About accessing the NetBackup Appliance Web

Console
On a system that has a network connection to the Appliance, start a Web browser.
In the Web browser address bar, enter the following: https://host.domain
host.domain is the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the Appliance and can
also be an IP address.
Note: The NetBackup Appliance Web Console is available only over HTTPS on
the default port 443; port 80 over HTTP has been disabled.
15
Overview
You must supply login credentials on the Appliance login page. For an administrator
initial login, the user name is admin and the password is P@ssw0rd or any custom
password that you chose during the initial configuration.
Note: The NetBackup Appliance Web Console and the IPMI console cannot be
accessed from an IPv6 address.
Web browsers supported by Appliance

You can use a Web browser to access the NetBackup Appliance Web Console or
the IPMI console. The following requirements and recommendations should be
considered for the Web browser:
The NetBackup Appliance Web Console and the IPMI console use pop-up
menus. If you use pop-up blockers with your Web browser, some of these menus
may not display properly. You must disable pop-up blocking or add the Appliance
Web address to the list of acceptable sites in your browser.
The Web browser should have active scripting (ActiveX and JavaScript) enabled.
On some server-class systems, an enhanced security configuration can cause

some pages to not display properly in Internet Explorer. If you encounter this
issue, add the Appliance Web Console to the Trusted-sites list and lower the
security setting. To resolve this issue, open Internet Explorer and select Tools
> Internet Options > Security to configure the Trusted-sites list and lower the
security level.
If you use Internet Explorer 10.0 or above to access the Appliance Web console,
security certificate warnings appear when you access a pop-up menu. Select
Continue to this web site (not recommended) to log on to the appliance.
Once you select this option, the security certificate warnings do not appear on
the pop-up menus.
The NetBackup Appliance Web Console is best viewed with 1280 * 1024 or a
higher screen resolution.
Table 1-1 lists the Web browsers that Appliance supports.
16
Overview
Table 1-1
Web browsers supported by Appliance
Web browser
Supported Versions
Microsoft Internet
Explorer
10.0 and higher
Notes
IE 10.0 and later versions may

display a security certificate
warning page when you access
supported. If you are using IE 8.x
the NetBackup Appliance Web
or 9.x to access NetBackup, you
Console. Select Continue to this
must upgrade to IE 10.0 or higher.
website (not recommended) to
access the console.
Note: IE 8.x and 9.x are not
The Appliance Web Console

cannot be viewed on Internet
Explorer 10 or later in a
compatible mode. From your
browser, use the Tools >
Compatibility View Settings
menu and uncheck Display all
websites in Compatibility view
to see the Appliance Web
Console.
Mozilla Firefox
31.0 and higher
Mozilla Firefox may display an

Untrusted Connection page
Note: If you try to access the
when you access the NetBackup
NetBackup Appliance using earlier
Appliance Web Console.
versions of Firefox and reset the
password using Settings >
See Disabling the Untrusted
Password, the page may hang.
Connection page in Mozilla
Firefox on page 17.
Disabling the Untrusted Connection page in Mozilla Firefox

When you access the NetBackup Appliance Web Console in Mozilla Firefox, you
may see the following Untrusted Connection page.
17
Overview
Your choice is either to click Get me out of here, which takes you to the Mozilla
Firefox start page, or click Add Exception (when you expand the I Understand
the Risks section) and permanently disable the page.
Note: If these options do not appear, consult the browser help on how to view
secure websites.
To disable the Untrusted Connection page in Mozilla Firefox
On the Untrusted Connection page, expand I Understand the Risks section

and click Add Exception.
In the Add Security Exception dialog box, click Get Certificate.
To make this exception permanent, make sure that the Permanently store
this exception option is checked. This option is checked by default.
Click Confirm Security Exception.
Restart your browser for the changes to take effect.

Note the following about the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu interface:
The NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu user interface cannot input or modify
multi-byte characters, and they are not localized to any language for this release.
Non-English characters are not shown on the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu
user interface after you finish appliance configuration. This issue occurs when
you use the NetBackup Appliance Web Console during the initial configuration
18
Overview
of a NetBackup appliance. When you input non-English characters to register

your appliance on the Registration page, the non-English characters cannot be
shown on the shell menu interface.
Due to the introduction of the Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) Operating System
in release 2.7.1, Secure Shell(SSH) sessions now have a limited idle time.
Although the change to the RHEL operating system adds security by honoring
the current session time limit, you may experience the following issues:
The user is logged out automatically if the SSH session remains idle up to
the current session time limit.
Commands fail to complete if they require more time than the current session
time limit. One example where you may experience this issue is when you
add a large number of LDAP or AD users and user groups.
To help avoid these issues, keep the session alive for a longer duration by
increasing the session time limit in the SSH client. For detailed configuration
instructions, refer to your SSH client documentation.
Command limitations on appliances that are not configured

Before an appliance can be managed, it must first be configured. The commands
that are used for initial configuration are the only valid commands that can be
executed on a new appliance, or a factory reset appliance. Commands other than
those used for the initial configuration can exhibit unexpected or undesired behavior.
To prevent this situation, it is a best practice to avoid using any management
commands until after the appliance initial configuration has been completed.
For information on valid commands for appliances that are not configured, refer to
the following documents:
NetBackup Appliance Initial Configuration Guide
NetBackup Appliance Commands Reference Guide

This section provides information on the panes and navigation features available
in the Appliance console. You can view the console by using a Web browser.
About using the links on the title bar

On the title bar of the NetBackup Appliance Web Console, the Connected To value
shows the name of the appliance, the hardware model like 5200, 5220, 5230, or
5240 and the role in which it has been configured. In case the appliance is configured
as a media server, the master server that it is connected to is also displayed.
19
Overview
Example: Connected To: Master 5220: nb-appliance

Here the hostname of the appliance is nb-appliance and it is a 5220 appliance that
has been configured as a master server.
Example: Connected To: Media 5230: nb-appliance | Master: app-master
Here the hostname of the appliance is nb-appliance and it is a 5230 appliance that
has been configured as a media server. It is connected to a master server named
app-master.
On the right-side of the title bar, you may see text like Welcome [admin]. Here
admin is the user name that is logged on to the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
Use the links available in the title bar at the top of the console for the following
tasks:
To access online help, click ?. An enhanced context-sensitive help system

named Symantec Help Center is available with the Appliance. Symantec Help
Center is a browser-based Help delivery system with advanced search,
autosuggest, and filtering capabilities. Symantec Help Center lets you search
from a much larger Appliance content set. Additionally you can search from the
NetBackup documentation from the same Help window.
More information about online Help is available.
See Accessing and using help on page 20.
To disconnect from the NetBackup Appliance Web Console and to end your
session, click Logout.
To see Appliance product version and copyright information, click About.
Accessing and using help

An enhanced context-sensitive help system named Symantec Help Center is shipped
with the NetBackup Appliance. Symantec Help Center is a browser-based Help
delivery system with advanced search, autosuggest, and filtering capabilities.
Symantec Help Center offers the following advantages over traditional Help systems:
Symantec Help Center lets you search from a much larger Appliance content
set. Symantec Help Center includes content from the NetBackup Appliance
Administrator's Guide, the Troubleshooting Guide, and the Commands Guide.
This means that you can search content from the NetBackup Appliance
Administrator's Guide, the Troubleshooting Guide, and the Commands Guide
content from one SymHelp Search window.
In addition to the Appliance content, Symantec Help Center lets you search
content from the NetBackup Administration Console Help. By default, you can
view and search the Appliance content.
20
Overview
Figure 1-1 shows a sample view of Symantec Help Center and how you can search
Appliance and NetBackup content from Symantec Help Center.
Figure 1-1
Sample view of Symantec Help Center
Figure 1-2
Browse functionality in Symantec Help Center
Select the product

filters Appliance
and NetBackup
Enter text in the
Search box
Search results from

Appliance and
NetBackup content
are displayed.
Click Browse
The Table of Contents for

Appliance and NetBackup
are displayed.
21
Overview
22
To access and use Symantec Help Center
Click ? on the upper-right corner of the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.

This opens a new browser window that displays context-sensitive help for the
specific page.
You can type the text or phrase that you want to search for, in the text box.
You can also type in a query like 'About Appliance', configuring NetBackup
Appliance etc.
To view the updated documentation content that is posted online, you must be
connected to the Internet and check Include online search.
You can view and search the Appliance content by default. To be able to search
NetBackup content, select NetBackup Administration Console Help from the
Product Filters section. You can then type in your NetBackup related search
query in the search toolbar.
You can also click Browse on the left-hand side to see the table of contents
for Appliance and NetBackup.
About using Web browser bookmarks

Use your Web browser to add a bookmark for any view in the Appliance console
and return to it as needed.
You can use the bookmark to return to the same view when you log onto the console
again.
Avoiding CSRF (Cross Site Request Forgery)

Veritas NetBackup Appliance is introducing various features to improve the security
of your appliance. One such feature implemented from version 2.6.0.2 is to prevent
CSRF (Cross Site Request Forgery) in NetBackup Appliance Web Console by using
Synchronizer Token Patterns. Each request made to display a webpage in the
NetBackup Appliance Web Console is protected by a unique CSRF Security token.
Which means that each time you logon to the NetBackup Appliance Web Console,
a new session is created and correspondingly a new security token gets associated
with that session. If there is any discrepancy with the security token, the following
CSRF error page is displayed:
For security reasons, access to the appliance page destination
is denied.
Access is not allowed from an external link or from a bookmarked URL.
To access the appliance page, you must first log out of the appliance and
Overview
then log in again.

Click ? for more information.
If you are currently logged on to the NetBackup Appliance Web Console and
try to start a new session from a new tab, only the new session is considered
as current and active. Any task you perform in the older session may display
the CSRF error page.
If you try to access any page with an incorrect security token, a bookmarked
old token, or a modified token that does not match the server-side token for the
same session, the CSRF error page is displayed.
See About the NetBackup Appliance Web Console login page on page 23.
About the NetBackup Appliance Web Console

login page
The login page provides the fields to enter your login credentials and also includes
the following links and information:
Section
Description
Product Information
This section provides the following links where you can

access NetBackup appliance information and documentation:
What is new in Version 2.7.3?
Release Notes
Appliance Documentation Set
View Compatibility Lists
23
Overview
Section
Description
Download Packages
This section indicates whether there are NetBackup client

packages stored on the appliance that can be installed on
clients. Client packages also include the NetBackup
Administration Console. You can select to install all listed
client packages or select a specific package to install.
Note the following important points about downloading client
packages:
Starting with appliance version 2.6.0.2, NetBackup clients

are no longer included with NetBackup appliance release
updates. If you want to store clients on the appliance, a
separate client package is available to download. The
client packages are posted on the same Support site
where the appliance update releases are also posted.
Client versions that are stored on the appliance do not
have to match the NetBackup version that is currently
installed on the appliance.
If a client package does not exist on the appliance, the
following message appears when you select to download
it:
No packages found.
To download the client packages and store them on the

appliance, see the NetBackup Appliance Administrator's
Guide. Refer to the topic "Downloading client packages
to a NetBackup appliance:
To install the NetBackup Administration Console client,
you must first download the Windows client package.
This client is required to access the NetBackup
Administration Console.
You can install the vCentre Plug-in to use vSphere Client
to monitor virtual machine backups and recover a virtual
machine from a backup.
24
Overview
Section
Description
Browser Recommendation
This section verifies and displays a confirmation if the

NetBackup Appliance Web Console supports your browser.
The NetBackup Appliance Web Console supports Internet
Explorer versions 10.0 and later, and Mozilla Firefox versions
31.0 and later.
Note: The NetBackup Appliance Web Console cannot be

viewed on Microsoft Internet Explorer 10 or later in a
compatible mode. From your browser, use the Tools >
Compatibility View Settings menu to clear Display all
websites in Compatibility view selection and view the
NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
To log on to the NetBackup Appliance Web Console
Enter the following URL in the web browser:

https://ip|hostname/appliance
In the URL use the IP or hostname of your appliance. The hostname is the
label that is assigned to your appliance to identify the device in your network.
Note: If you use Internet Explorer 10.0 or higher to access the NetBackup
Appliance Web Console, security certificate warnings appear when you access
a pop-up menu. Select Continue to this website (not recommended) to log
into the appliance. Once you select this option, the security certificate warnings
do not appear on the pop-up menus.
The browser displays the NetBackup Appliance Web Console login page.
Note: If the initial configuration for an appliance is in progress, do not try to
run a new instance of the NetBackup Appliance Web Console. You cannot log
on to the appliance thus causing an unsuccessful login.
Enter your user name in the Username field. The default user name is admin.
Enter your password in the Password field. The default user password is
P@ssw0rd, where 0 is the number zero.
Note: After the new appliance is configured and you have been registered as
a user, the user name and password are sent to your registered email ID.
25
Overview
Select your preferred language from the Language drop-down list. Based on
the language you select, the labels on the NetBackup Appliance Web Console
are displayed in that language.
English, Japanese, and Simplified Chinese web user interfaces are available
for this release. Veritas recommends that the language that you select in the
NetBackup Appliance Web Console is the same as your system locale. If the
language that you want to select in the NetBackup Appliance Web Console is
not the same as your system locale, you should first change the locale in the
following manner:
To change the system
locale
Details
1. Browse the locales on

your system
Log on to the shell menu and run Settings>

SystemLocale List language_code.
Example: Run Settings> SystemLocale List ja
to browse the available locales in Japanese language.
The following locales can be displayed:
2. Set the preferred locale

along with its format
ja_JP.UTF-8
ja_JP.eucJP
ja_JP.eucjp
ja_JP.shiftjisx0213
ja_JP.sjis
ja_JP.utf8
Run Settings > SystemLocale Set

language_code command.
Example: Run Settings> SystemLocale Set
ja_JP.UTF-8 to set the ja_JP.UTF-8 locale to the
Appliance.
Note: Selecting a language in the NetBackup Appliance Web Console that is

different from the language of system locale may result in a mixing up of the
two languages in the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
Click Login.
The appliance displays either of the following:
Initial Configuration Setup - When you log into the appliance for the first
time you are asked to perform the initial configuration and set up your
26
Overview
appliance. For more information, refer to the NetBackup Initial Configuration

Guide.
Note: If the NetBackup license key on the appliance has expired after an
ISO install, continue with the initial configuration. A temporary license key
is generated which is valid for 30 days. Veritas recommends that you add
a permanent license key before the temporary license key has expired.
NetBackup Appliance home page - After you have successfully configured

your appliance, the Home page is displayed. More information about the
Home page is available.
See NetBackup Appliance home page on page 28.
Note: On some server-class systems, an enhanced security configuration can

cause some pages to not display properly in Internet Explorer. If you encounter this
issue, add to the NetBackup Appliance Web Console Trusted-sites list and lower
the security setting. To resolve this issue, open Internet Explorer and select Tools
> Internet Options > Security to configure the Trusted-sites list and lower the
security level.
Table 1-2 lists the reasons due to which login failure can occur.
Troubleshooting login failures
Table 1-2
Error message
Reasons
Troubleshooting
User authentication
failed. Please enter valid

user name and password.
If problem persists
contact your System

Administrator.
If the provided user
name and password are

incorrect.
If the authentication
server is not responsive.
Verify that you have entered the correct user

name and password.
Contact your System Administrator in case the
error appears again.
Login was
unsuccessful,
click ? for details.
If you try to log onto a
new instance of the

NetBackup Appliance
Web Console, while the
initial configuration is in
progress on that
appliance.
If an unexpected error
has occurred.
Ensure that you do not log onto a single

appliance using multiple instances of the
View the UI logs to view the exceptions stack
and trace all programmatic statements. You can
find the UI logs at the following location:
/opt/SYMCnbappws/webserver/logs
27
Overview
Table 1-2
Troubleshooting login failures (continued)
Error message
Reasons
Troubleshooting
The connection
has timed out
If the web server is not

responsive the login page
is not displayed.
Contact your system administrator for more

assistance.
Unable to connect
If the web server has been Contact your system administrator for more
shut down.
assistance.

When you log into the appliance it displays the Welcome to Symantec NetBackup
Appliance Web Console home page. This page is displayed after you have
configured the appliance role as a media server or a master server. It displays the
status of all the vital components that determine the successful functioning of your
appliance, using a pictorial representation.
You can click on the elements to view additional information and monitor the status
further. The following table elaborates the elements on the home page:
Table 1-3
Home page description
Element
Displays
Helps to
Links to the
page
Storage
Displays the used storage space across

the appliance. The information is
dynamically updated to display the current
storage utilization.
Determine the available storage

space. It enables you to take the
required steps if the storage space
has been used to the maximum.
Manage > Storage
It displays the Used and Available space

within your storage system and is
calculated as follows:
Available = Sum of available space

on all configured partitions.
Used = Sum of used space on all
configured partitions.
When you log into the appliance the home

page displays the status of the Used and
Available storage space.
For more
information See
Manage > Storage
on page 65.
28
Overview
Table 1-3
Element
Home page description (continued)
Displays
Helps to
Links to the
page
Deduplication Displays the current deduplication ratio

Determine the quality of the data
Summary
pertaining to all the backups taken so far backed-up using deduplication. Lower
across all the media servers.
the ratio, lower is the amount of data
being stored using Deduplication.
This element is not

linked to any
specific page. For
information on how
to set the
Deduplication ratio = total number of
deduplication
bytes backed up (without
parameters See
Deduplication) / number of bytes
About configuring
changed and backed up (with
deduplication
Deduplication)
solutions
on page 120.
Hardware
Displays the performance of all the

monitored hardware devices.
Notifications Displays the latest notifications for your

appliance. These notifications include:
Determine if the hardware is running Monitor >

and a failure has been detected.
Hardware
An error message is displayed, in
case a hardware component
malfunctions.
For more
information See
Monitor >
Hardware options
on page 35.
Identify the following:
Manage > Software

Updates
Latest software updates available for

your appliance. It displays the new
software updates available on the

support site.
Connectivity status for the Call Home
server
Latest software upgrades

available from the Support site.
For more
Whether Call Home is functional. information See
Software release
updates for
NetBackup
Appliances
on page 175.
The NetBackup Appliance Web Console home page displays an expandable footer
with links to documentation set, Technical Support, and Symantec Connect. This
footer is displayed for all the pages on the NetBackup Appliance Web Console. To
view the contents of the footer all you need to do click on the downward arrows
displayed on the footer.
29
Overview

The following table contains quick links on how to perform the common tasks in
Appliance.
Table 1-4
Quick links for common Appliance tasks
Appliance
functions
Tasks
Monitoring
Monitor hardware, services, See Monitor > Hardware options

and Symantec Data Center on page 35.
Security (SDCS)
See About hardware monitoring and alerts
on page 35.
Managing the
Appliance
Configure data buffer and

See About configuring deduplication
deduplication settings of the solutions on page 120.
Appliance
See Configuring data buffer parameters
Add or remove license keys on page 116.
Run migration utility
Manage software updates
Go to this topic
See About the Migration Utility

on page 161.
See Manage > Software Updates
on page 176.
Storage
management
Resize or move partitions
See About storage configuration

on page 61.
View disk status and add or

remove disks
See Manage > Storage on page 65.
View the partition distribution
on a disk
Restoring an
Appliance
Create a checkpoint
Rollback to a checkpoint
See Manage > Appliance Restore

on page 125.
Perform Factory Reset

Configuring
Appliance
settings
Alert and Call Home

Network
Date and Time
User authentication and
management
User management
Password management
See About modifying the appliance

settings on page 229.
30
Overview
Table 1-4
Appliance
functions
Quick links for common Appliance tasks (continued)

Tasks
Go to this topic
Troubleshooting Troubleshoot Appliance

issues
See Troubleshooting and tuning appliance

from the Appliance Diagnostics Center
on page 306.

The following documents help to ensure that you can successfully install, configure,
and use your appliance. All these documents are posted on the NetBackup Appliance
Documentation page.
Table 1-5
NetBackup Appliance documentation
Guide
Description
NetBackup Appliance Hardware This guide provides the following information:

Installation Guide
An introduction to the physical layout of the appliance
hardware.
Install preparation steps, such as unpacking
procedures, environmental conditions, and safety
precautions.
Hardware configuration steps
This section guides you through the required steps
to install your appliance in a rack and connect your
appliance cables.
NetBackup Appliance Initial
Configuration Guide
This document guides you through the configuration

process from the NetBackup Appliance Web Console or
from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
NetBackup Appliance Upgrade

Guide
This document guides you through the required steps to

upgrade a NetBackup appliance.
NetBackup Appliance
Administrator's Guide
The NetBackup Appliance Administrator's Guide

contains the following types of information:
Deployment information
Administering your appliance
Monitoring information
31
Overview
Table 1-5
NetBackup Appliance documentation (continued)
Guide
Description
NetBackup Appliance
Command Reference Guide
The NetBackup Appliance Command Reference Guide

provides a complete list of the commands that are
available for you to use through the NetBackup Appliance
Shell Menu.
NetBackup Appliance Release

Notes
This document contains information about this version

of NetBackup Appliance. It contains brief descriptions of
new features within the release, operational notes that
apply to the release update, and any known issues.
NetBackup Appliance
Troubleshooting Guide
This document contains the latest troubleshooting

information for the NetBackup appliances.
This document contains information on how to optimize

NetBackup Appliance Capacity
Planning and Performance Tuning your backup environment and your NetBackup appliance.
It helps you to analyze your backup requirements and
Guide
design a system that best fits your needs.
NetBackup Appliance Security
Guide
This document describes the security features in

NetBackup Appliance and how to use those features to
ensure that your appliance environment is secure.
NetBackup Appliance Fibre

Channel Guide
This document describes the supported Fibre Channel

(FC) capabilities and configurations for NetBackup
appliances.
NetBackup Appliance
Decommissioning and
Reconfiguration Guide
This document describes how to decommission and

reconfigure a NetBackup appliance.
NetBackup Appliance SNMP Trap This document provides a complete list of the NetBackup
Appliance SNMP traps. It describes what each trap
Reference Guide
means and the recommended actions for when an error
occurs.
NetBackup Copilot for Oracle
Configuration Guide
This document outlines how to configure Copilot using

NetBackup and the NetBackup Appliance.
NetBackup Appliance Third-party The NetBackup Appliance Third-party Legal Notices

document lists the third-party software that is included
Legal Notices
in this product, and it contains attributions for the
third-party software.
This document is available from the following website:
https://www.veritas.com/about/legal/license-agreements
32
Overview
For additional information about the appliance hardware, refer to the following
documents:
NetBackup 5220 Appliance and Storage Shelf Product Description
NetBackup 52xx and 5330 Appliance and Storage Shelf Safety and Maintenance
Guide
33
Chapter
Monitoring the NetBackup

appliance
About monitoring the NetBackup Appliance
About hardware monitoring and alerts
About Symantec Data Center Security on the NetBackup appliance
About monitoring the NetBackup Appliance

After you have successfully configured your appliance, you can use any of the two
user interfaces NetBackup Appliance Web Console or the appliance shell menu
to monitor the NetBackup Appliance. You can use the Monitor menu in the
NetBackup Appliance Web Console to view and monitor the following components
of your appliance.
Table 2-1 describes the components that you can monitor using the Monitor menu:
Table 2-1
Monitor tab
Monitor
Lets you...
Topic
Hardware
Monitor the hardware, the storage devices,

and all the components that are associated
with them.
See About hardware

monitoring and alerts
on page 35.
Monitoring the NetBackup appliance

Table 2-1
Monitor
Monitor tab (continued)

Lets you...
SDCS Events Monitor the Symantec Data Center Security

(SDCS) events that occur on the appliance.
The SDCS agent is installed and configured
when you initially configure your appliance.
This agent operates in unmanaged mode by
default, but can be connected to an external
SDCS server to validate and verify your
appliance's audit logs.
Topic
See About Symantec Data
Center Security on the
NetBackup appliance
on page 45.

The appliance has the ability to monitor itself for hardware problems. If it detects a
problem that needs attention, it uses the following notification mechanisms:
Hardware monitoring and alerting from the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
See Monitor > Hardware options on page 35.
Sending an email to the local administrator.

See About Email notification from a NetBackup appliance on page 44.
Sending an alert to the SNMP manager.

See About SNMP on page 236.
Sending a notification to Veritas using Call Home.

See About Call Home on page 237.
We recommend that you enable Call Home so that when a problem occurs, a
support case is automatically generated, and the hardware diagnostic data is sent.
These actions enable faster problem resolution.
You can also check the hardware health details of the appliance by running the
Monitor > Hardware ShowHealth command using the NetBackup Appliance Shell
Menu.
Monitor > Hardware options

Monitoring the hardware components of your appliance is important for correct
functioning of the appliance.
The Monitor > Hardware page on the NetBackup Appliance Web Console lets you
monitor the hardware, the storage devices, and all of the components that are
associated with them. If Call Home is enabled, this information is also automatically
sent to Veritas Support in the case of a serviceable event. The hardware monitoring
35

information allows Veritas to provide proactive service and helps lead to a faster
resolution of any hardware issues.
Using hardware monitoring, you can monitor the appliance hardware and storage
components that are listed in the following tables:
Table 2-2
Hardware components monitored in 52xx appliances
Appliance
Disk, RAID, Fan, Power Supply, CPU, Temperature, Fibre Channel

HBA, PCI, Network Card, Adapter
Storage shelf
Disk, Fan, Power Supply, Temperature
Figure 2-1
Hardware components monitored in 52xx series appliances
Table 2-3
Hardware components monitored in the 5330 appliance
Appliance
Disk, RAID, Fan, Power Supply, CPU, Temperature, Fibre Channel

HBA, PCI, Network Card, Storage Connections
Primary storage shelf Disk, Fan, Battery Backup Unit (BBU), Controller, Volume,
Volume Group, Power Supply, Temperature
Expansion storage
shelf
Disk, Fan, Power Supply, Temperature
36

Figure 2-2
Hardware components monitored in the 5330 appliance
The left pane of the Monitor > Hardware page lists Appliance and Storage. The
right pane displays the Summary of components for the appliance and for the
attached storage. The storage devices can include a 52xx storage shelf, a 5330
primary storage shelf, or a 5330 expansion storage shelf. Click on any of the
components for further information, including health status and any errors or
warnings.
The information that is displayed is generated from the last Call Home heartbeat.
You can click the refresh icon to get the latest hardware information:
Interpreting errors or warnings

When any of the hardware components in the appliance report errors or warnings,
the component icon is highlighted and marked with a number. If the hardware icon
is highlighted in red, it denotes an error state and if it is highlighted in yellow, it
37

denotes a warning. The number denotes the number of errors or warnings that the
hardware component encounters.
To get more information about the hardware health status, click the hardware
component icon. Clicking a hardware component opens a pop-up window that
displays information about the health status of the hardware component.
Monitoring storage connections

On a 5330 appliance, you can view the connections between hardware components
to check the connection status. Click on Storage Connections under Summary
of components for appliance. The following pop-up window appears:
Click on the cables between the hardware components to see an overview of the
connections between the appliance, the primary shelf, and the expansion shelf.
You can find more information on cable connections in the NetBackup Appliance
Hardware Installation Guide.
Flashing a beacon
On a 52xx appliance, the Disk component for the appliance and the storage shelf
includes an option to flash a beacon. The beacon helps to locate a disk within the
52xx appliance or the storage shelf.
38

Note: For a 5330 appliance, the beacon option is available only for the disks on
the compute node. It is not available for the disks on primary shelf or the expansion
shelf.
To flash a beacon from the Hardware > Monitor page
Click on the Disk icon under Summary of components for appliance or

Summary of components for storage shelf.
In the pop-up window that appears, select the disk ID that you want to flash
and click Beacon.
To flash multiple beacons at once, hold down the Shift and the Ctrl keys on
the keyboard and click on each of the disks that you want to locate. When all
of your chosen disks are highlighted, click Beacon.
A pop-up window appears with the following message:

Enter the duration (from 1 to 300) for which the disk drive
light should flash: (in minutes)
Provide the duration for which you want the disk to flash the beacon light. After
you have entered the duration (in minutes), click OK.
The selected beacon flashes for the specified time. When the action is complete,
the Beacon pop-up window updates with the result.
Hardware components that are monitored

The following tables list the hardware components and their attributes that are
monitored in the appliance and in the attached storage.
Table 2-4
NetBackup 52xx and 5330 Appliance hardware that is monitored
Hardware monitored
Data collected
CPU
52xx: Status, Voltage, Low watermark, High

watermark
5330: Status, Voltage, Low watermark, High
watermark, BIOS firmware version
39

Table 2-4

(continued)
Hardware monitored
Data collected
Disk
52xx: Beacon, Slot number, Status, HotSpare

Type,Foreign state, Firmware version, Serial
number, Capacity, Type, Enclosure ID
5330: Slot number, Status, Foreign state, Firmware
version, HotSpare Type,Serial number, Capacity,
Type, Enclosure ID
Note: The 5330 appliance includes two hot spares for

the OS RAID volumes. When you receive your 5330
appliance, the disks that are located in slot 2 and slot
5 are configured as hot spares. However, if a disk in
either RAID volume experiences a hardware error, the
appliance uses one of the hot-spare disks to rebuild the
RAID volume. When the faulty disk is replaced, the
replacement disk becomes the new hot spare. TheDisk
icon on the Monitor > Hardware page of the NetBackup
Appliance Web Console and the Monitor >
Hardware ShowHealth Appliance Disk
command in the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu show
which of the disks are currently configured as the hot
spares. You can also use the RAID icon on the Monitor
> Hardware page or the Monitor > Hardware
ShowHealth Appliance RAID command to check
if all hot spares are available.
Fan
Name, Status, Speed, Low watermark
Power Supply
Status, Wattage, High watermark
RAID
WWID, Name, Status, Capacity, Type, Disks, Write

policy, Enclosure ID, Hotspare availability
Note: The WWID in the RAID table is a unique device ID

of the disk. Clicking a WWID in the RAID table directs you
to the Disk tab on the Manage > Storage page of the
NetBackup Appliance Web Console. The console highlights
the disk that corresponds to the WWID that is clicked.
Clicking the highlighted Disk ID (or the WWID) on the
Manage > Storage page opens a RAID status details
window. The RAID details window provides status
information about the RAID and the highlighted storage
disk.
40

Table 2-4

(continued)
Hardware monitored
Data collected
Temperature
Type, Temperature, Low watermark, High watermark
Note: The temperature readings for the P1 Therm Margin

sensor and the P2 Therm Margin sensor are shown as
negative values. The negative values indicate how hot (in
degrees C) it can get before the CPU reaches the maximum
heat tolerance. The low watermark and highwater mark for
these sensors is -15 degrees C and -128 degrees C
respectively.
Adapter
PCI
Fibre Channel HBA
52xx: Adapter model, Adapter status, BBU status,

Rebuild Rate %,BBU Learn Cycle active, Charge,
Charging status, Voltage, Temperature,
Manufacturing date
5330: N/A
52xx: Slot, Details
5330: Slot, Details, Firmware
Status, Mode, PCI slot, Port World Wide Name

(WWN), Speed, Remote Port
Note: Fibre Channel HBA ports that are marked with

Initiator* mode indicate that they are configured for target
mode when the SAN Client Fibre Transport media server
is active. However, these ports are currently running in
initiator mode, which implies that the SAN Client is disabled
or it is inactive.
Network Card
Port name, PCI slot, Card model, Serial number,

Port speed, MAC address, Link state
Note: On a 5330 appliance, there are two Ethernet ports

in each 10-Gb Ethernet network interface card that is
installed on the appliance. The number of ports depends
on the appliance's PCIe slot configuration.
See NetBackup 5330 compute node Ethernet port
configurations on page 254.
Storage Connections
52xx: N/A
5330: Appliance port, Expansion Storage Shelf port,

Status
41

Table 2-4

(continued)
Hardware monitored
Data collected
Storage Status*
52xx: N/A
5330: Status
Note: The Storage Status component monitors the health

of the storage array as a whole. If a Storage Status error
or warning message appears, the error cannot be
acknowledged to suppress notifications. If you have Call
Home enabled, Veritas is notified of the error, and a
Support ticket is opened on your behalf. Veritas Support
contacts you shortly afterward.
If you do not have Call Home enabled and you receive a
Storage Status error, contact Veritas Support for
assistance.
Partition Information*
Partition, Total size, Used percentage, Status
Note: In the MSDP partition, the value that is displayed

for the Used space may be different from the backup space
that is available or used on the MSDP partition. The backup
space statistics for the MSDP partition can be obtained by
checking the MSDP disk pool sizes from the NetBackup
Administration Console.
MSDP*
Queue size, Oldest tlog creation date
*This option is only available in the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu, with the Main
> Monitor > Hardware commands. See the NetBackup Appliance Command
Reference Guide for more information.
Table 2-5
52xx Veritas Storage Shelf hardware that is monitored
Hardware monitored
Data collected
Disk
Beacon, Slot number, Status, Foreign state,

HotSpare Type,Firmware version, Serial number,
Capacity, Type, Storage shelf ID
Fan
Name, Status, Speed, Low watermark
Power Supply
Status
42

Table 2-5
52xx Veritas Storage Shelf hardware that is monitored (continued)
Hardware monitored
Data collected
Temperature
Type, Temperature, High watermark
Temperature monitoring includes the following temperature

sensors that are located on the storage shelf:
Table 2-6
I/O Module1 (1)
I/O Module1 (2)
I/O Module2 (1)
I/O Module2 (2)
Backplane1
Backplane2
PSU1 (1)
PSU1 (2)
PSU2 (1)
PSU2 (2)
5330 Primary Storage Shelf hardware that is monitored
Hardware monitored
Data collected
Disk
Location, Status, Capacity, Associated Volume

Group, Firmware version, Serial number
Fan
Location, Status
Power Supply
ID, Location, Status
Temperature
Location, Status
BBU
Location, Status
Controller
Location, Status
Volume
LUN, Status, Associated Volume Group, WWID,

Capacity
Volume Group
Volume Group name, Status, Associated Volume

Group, RAID level, Capacity, Disks
43

Table 2-6
5330 Primary Storage Shelf hardware that is monitored

(continued)
Hardware monitored
Data collected
Storage Connections
Primary Storage Shelf port, Expansion Storage Shelf

port, Status
Note: This option is only displayed under the Primary

Storage Shelf from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
On the NetBackup Appliance Web Console, the
connections information is included in the Storage
Connections icon under the appliance.
Table 2-7
5330 Expansion Storage Shelf hardware that is monitored
Hardware monitored
Data collected
Disk
Location, Status, Capacity, Associated Volume

Group, Firmware version, Serial number
Fan
Location, Status
Power Supply
Location, Status
Temperature
Location, Status
About Email notification from a NetBackup appliance

A NetBackup Appliance has the ability to send an email to a local administrator
when a hardware failure is detected. You can use the Settings > Notification >
Alert Configuration page of the NetBackup Appliance Web Console to configure
the email address that you want to use for hardware failure notifications. You can
also use the command from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu. The contents
of the email identifies the type of hardware failure that occurred and the status of
the failure.
For complete information about how to configure email addresses using the
NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu, refer to the NetBackup Appliance Command
Reference Guide.
The following is an example of an email notification that is sent in case of any
hardware failures.
44

About Symantec Data Center Security on the

NetBackup appliance
Note: In previous appliance releases, Symantec Data Center Security (SDCS) was
known as Symantec Critical System Protection (SCSP). As part of the upgrade to
NetBackup Appliance 2.7.1 and newer, the appliance SDCS agent is set to
unmanaged mode. If an appliance was running in managed mode before upgrade,
make sure to reset that appliance back to managed mode after the upgrade
completes.
You must also update the appliance IPS and IDS policies on your SDCS
management server. You cannot use the older policies to manage an appliance
that is running software version 2.7.1 or newer. The new policies can be downloaded
from the Monitor > SDCS Events page of the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
Also note that any custom rules or support exceptions you might have for the IPS
and IDS policies are not available after an upgrade to NetBackup Appliance 2.7.1.
Symantec Data Center Security: Server Advanced (SDCS) is a security solution
offered by Symantec to protect servers in data centers. The SDCS software is
included on the appliance and is automatically configured during appliance software
installation. SDCS offers policy-based protection and helps secure the appliance
using host-based intrusion prevention and detection technology. It uses the
least-privileged containment approach and also helps security administrators
45

centrally manage multiple appliances in a data center. The SDCS agent runs at
startup and enforces the customized NetBackup appliance intrusion prevention
system (IPS) and intrusion detection system (IDS) policies. The overall SDCS
solution on the appliance provides the following features:
Hardened Linux OS components

Prevents or contains malware from harming the integrity of the underlying host
system as a result of OS vulnerabilities.
Data protection
Tightly limits appliance data access to only those programs and activities that
need access, regardless of system privileges.
Hardened appliance stack

Appliance application binaries and configuration settings are locked down such
that changes are tightly controlled by the application or trusted programs and
scripts.
Expanded detection and audit capabilities

Provides enhanced visibility into important user or system actions to ensure a
valid and complete audit trail that addresses compliance regulations (such as
PCI) as a compensating control.
Centralized managed mode operations

Lets you use a central SDCS manager for an integrated view of security across
multiple appliances as well as any other enterprise systems managed by SDCS.
The SDCS implementation on the appliance can operate in an unmanaged mode

or a managed mode. By default, SDCS operates in an unmanaged mode and helps
secure the appliance using host-based intrusion prevention and detection technology.
The NetBackup appliance is in unmanaged mode, when it is not connected to the
SDCS server. In unmanaged mode, you can monitor SDCS events from the
NetBackup Appliance Web Console. Use the Monitor > SDCS Events page, to
monitor the events logged. The events are monitored using the NetBackup appliance
IDS and IPS policies. These policies are automatically applied at the time of initial
configuration. Click Filter Logs to filter and view specific events.
In managed mode, the SDCS agent on the appliance continues to protect the
appliance while also connecting to an external SDCS server for centralized
management and log analysis. In managed mode, the appliance is connected to
the SDCS server and the events are monitored using the SDCS management
console. Using this mode multiple appliances can be monitored using a single SDCS
server. SDCS agents are configured with each NetBackup appliance that are used
to send events to the SDCS server.
Figure 2-3 illustrates SDCS in managed mode.
46

Figure 2-3
SDCS agent
SDCS implementation in managed mode
SDCS agent
SDCS agent
1
1
To set up managed mode, you can install the SDCS server and management
console and then connect the appliance to an SDCS server.
Use Monitor > SDCS Events page to:
Download SDCS server and console
Install the server and console
Download NetBackup Appliance IPS and IDS policies
Apply these polices using the SDCS management console
Connect the NetBackup appliances with the server
Monitor events for all the NetBackup appliances connected to this server.
Use Monitor > SDCS Events > Connect to SDCS server to:
Add SDCS server details
Download authentication certificate
Connect to the SDCS server
For complete information about the SDCS implementation on the appliance, refer
to the NetBackup Appliance Security Guide.
Monitor > SDCS Events

You can use the Monitor > SDCS Events menu to monitor the Symantec Data
Center Security (SDCS) agent and event logs.
47

The SDCS agent is installed and configured when you initially configure your
appliance. This agent ensures that your appliance's audit logs are sent to the SDCS
server to be validated and verified.
The Monitor > SDCS Events page displays the following:
Filter Logs - Filter the SDCS audit logs that get displayed on the SDCS Events
page.
Current Log Retention - Displays the current log retention level. When the
appliance is configured in a managed mode, the status is set to Not Applicable
as the audit logs are monitored using the SDCS server.
Set Log Retention - Set the SDCS log retention by period days or number of
log files.
Connect to SDCS server - Connect to an SDCS server to configure the

appliance in managed mode.
Symantec Data Center Security Downloads - Download the SDCS server

and console, and the IPS and IDS policies.
Note: You can manually implement third-party certificates on web service support
using the Java keystore repository of security certificates.
Table 2-8 describes the event attributes for each sortable column of the SDCS
event viewer.
Table 2-8
SDCS event attributes
Columns
Description
Event ID
The ID generated for each event log. The event ID can be used to
search the event logs.
Date and Time
The date and time for each event log.
Event Type
The event type for each event log. For example, if the event type
is Server Error, it denotes that a server error has occurred and is
recorded in the event logs.
48

Table 2-8
SDCS event attributes (continued)
Columns
Description
Severity
The severity of each event in the log. For example, an event like
the Server Error would be of Critical severity.
The following severity types are displayed:
Information - Information about normal system operation.
Notice - Information about normal system operation.
Warning - Unexpected activity or problems that have already

been handled by SDCS. These events might indicate that a
service or application on a target computer is functioning
improperly with the applied policy. After investigating the policy
violations, you can configure the policy and allow the service or
application to access the specific resources if necessary.
Major - Activity with more effect than Warning and less effect
than Critical.
Critical - Indicates activity or problems that might require
administrator intervention to correct.
Message
The message that describes the logged event.
Details
Details of each logged event. Click the Log Details pop-up window
icon to view the details of the logged event. For a list of all the
possible details that can be deisplayed, refer to the SDCS
documentation.
Viewing SDCS audit log details

You can view the detailed information for each Symantec Data Center Security
(SDCS) logged event using the SDCS Events page. Click the Log Details pop-up
window icon to view the details of the logged event. Table 2-9 describes the various
details that displayed in the Log Details pop-up window.
49

Table 2-9
SDCS log details description
Detail
Description
Event Severity
The severity of the logged event.

The following severity types are displayed:
Information - Information about normal system operation.
Notice - Information about normal system operation.
Warning - Unexpected activity or problems that have already

been handled by SDCS. These events might indicate that a
service or application on a target computer is functioning
improperly with the applied policy. After investigating the policy
violations, you can configure the policy and allow the service or
application to access the specific resources if necessary.
Major - Activity with more effect than Warning and less effect
than Critical.
Critical - Indicates activity or problems that might require
administrator intervention to correct.
Process ID
The ID assigned to the process.
Rule Name
The name of the policy rule that generated the event.
Process
The name of the policy applied to the agent that triggered the event.
Event Date
The date and time (YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS) that the event

occurred.
Event Type
The event type for the logged event. For a detailed list of all the
event types and their descriptions, refer to the SDCS documentation.
Sequence Number
The sequence number of the logged event.
Event Priority
The priority (0-100) assigned to the event.
Facility
The login mechanism for the event.
Description
The detailed or consolidated description of the event.
User Name
The name of the user that was logged in when the event took place.
File Name
The path and name of the affected file.
New Size
The size of the affected file after the logged event.
Old Size
The size of the affected file before the logged event.
Operation
The type of operation that was performed on the affected file.
50

Filtering SDCS audit logs

The following procedure describes how to filter the SDCS audit logs displayed on
the Monitor > SDCS Events page of the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
To filter SDCS audit logs
Log in to the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
Click Monitor > SDCS Events.

The Monitor > SDCS Events page contains an event viewer that displays the
audit logs for the last 6 hours.
Click the Filter Logs button.

The Filters dialog box is displayed.
Use the following fields to enter the filter criteria:

Field
Description
Search String
Enter a search string to filter

Outbound connections
audit logs using the parameters
mentioned in the string.
Event Id
Enter the event ID to filter audit 1375524

logs by ID number.
Events
Select an event type from the IDS Audit

drop-down list to filter the audit
logs by event type.
Severities
Select a severity type for the

logs to be filtered and
displayed.
Critical
From Date From

Time
Select the From and To date

and time. The appliance
displays the audit logs for the
selected time period.
03/10/2011, 14.19.01 to
04/10/2011, 14.19.01
To DateTo Time
Example
Click the Apply button to apply the filter.

The appliance displays the relevant logs in the audit log viewer.
Setting the SDCS audit log retention specification

When your appliance is not connected to a Symantec Data Center Security (SDCS)
server, the SDCS logs are still stored locally on the appliance. The following
51

procedure describes how to set the audit log retention using the NetBackup
Note: When the appliance is configured in a managed mode, the status is set to
Not Applicable and the Set Log Retention button is disabled. That is because
the audit logs are monitored using the connected SDCS server.
To set the audit log retention
The Monitor > SDCS Events page contains an event viewer that displays the
audit logs for the last 6 hours.
Note: If the appliance is running in managed mode the SDCS events viewer
does not display the audit logs.
Click on the Set Log Retention button, to set the retention period or log file
number.
The appliance displays the Retention Settings dialog box.
52

You can set the retention using the following fields:

Field
Description
Period
Select this radio button to set the log retention in number of

days.
The retention period setting considers the date on which a log
file is modified over the date on which the file is created. For
example, if the retention period is set to two days. The files
that have been modified in the last two days will not be pruned,
even though their creation data is older than two days.
Days
Enter the number of days. The appliance stores the SDCS

audit logs for the specified number of days. This field is
enabled, when you select the Period radio button.
Number of Logs
Select this radio button to enter the number of log files to be

retained.
FileNumber
Set the audit number of files. Size of each file is 10 MB.
Click OK to set the retention specifications.

The appliance applies the retention specifications and stores the logs
accordingly.
About Symantec Data Center Security Downloads

By default, SDCS operates in an unmanaged mode and helps secure the appliance
using host-based intrusion prevention and detection technology. In managed mode,
the SDCS agent on the appliance continues to protect the appliance while also
connecting to an external SDCS server for centralized management and log analysis.
The unmanaged mode lets you segregate the tasks of a backup administrator and
a security administrator, where in a security administrator is provided with the ability
to monitor and manage the security options for all of the NetBackup appliances
included in a large enterprise.
The following are required to run the appliance in unmanaged mode:
A management server running the Symantec Data Center Security: Server

Advanced 6.5 or later.
A computer running the Symantec Data Center Security: Server Advanced

management console. (The SDCS management console is required to apply
the IPS and IDS policies.)
53

The SDCS server and console software as well as the appliance IPS and IDS
policies can be downloaded from the Monitor > SDCS Events page of the
Warning: You must apply the downloaded IPS and IDS policies as soon as you
connect the appliance to the SDCS server. Without applying the policies, there
wont be any intrusion prevention and intrusion detection policies on the system to
be enforced by the SDCS agent.
Downloading the SDCS server and console software from

the NetBackup appliance
The following procedure describes how to download the SDCS server and console
software packages from the SDCS Events page.
To download the SDCS server and console:
Under Symantec Data Center Security Downloads, click SDCS Server and
Console to download the installation packages for the SDCS server and
console.
The sdcs_server.zip file is downloaded to your local computer.
Extract the contents from the sdcs_server.zip file.

The SDCSInstall folder contains the following:
server.exe - used to install the Symantec Data Center Security: Server
Advanced management server.

An installation wizard is used to help you install the management server.
For more information about installing the SDCS management server, refer
to the Symantec Data Center Security Installation Guide available at the
following location: http://www.symantec.com/docs/DOC7979.
console.exe - used to install the Symantec Data Center Security: Server
Advanced management console.

An installation wizard is used to help you install the management console.
For more information about installing the SDCS management console, refer
to the Symantec Data Center Security Installation Guide available at the
following location: http://www.symantec.com/docs/DOC7979.
54

Downloading the IPS and IDS policies from the NetBackup

appliance
The following procedure describes how to download the NetBackup appliance IPS
and IDS policies for using Symantec Data Center Security (SDCS) in unmanaged
mode.
To download NetBackup appliance IPS and IDS policies:
Under Symantec Data Center Security Downloads, click NetBackup

Appliance IPS and IDS Policies to download the IDS and IPS policies.
The SDCSSPolicies.zip file is downloaded to your local folders.
Extract the contents from the SDCSSPolicies.zip file.

The SDCSSPolicies folder contains the following:
NetBackup Appliance Detection Policy.zip - contains the IDS policy.
This policy is an after-the-fact IDS for monitoring important significant

events and optionally taking remediation actions on events of interest.
NetBackup Appliance Prevention Policy.zip - contains the IPS policy.
This policy is an in-line IPS that can proactively block unwanted resource
access behaviors before they can be acted upon by the operating system.
Note: These policies help to validate the events that take place on appliance
and can be monitored by either using the Monitor > SDCS Events page in an
unmanaged mode or the SDCS management console.
After you have set up the SDCS server and connected the appliance to it, use
the SDCS management console to apply the IPS and IDS policies.
See Connecting to the SDCS server on page 56.
For instructions on how to apply policies using the SDCS management console,
refer to the Symantec Data Center Security: Server Advanced Administrator's
Guide at the following location: http://www.symantec.com/docs/DOC7979
Warning: You must apply the downloaded IPS and IDS policies as soon as
you connect the appliance to the SDCS server. Without applying the policies,
there wont be any intrusion prevention and intrusion detection policies on the
system to be enforced by the SDCS agent.
55

Connecting to the SDCS server

The following procedure describes how to connect to the Symantec Data Center
Security (SDCS) server from the SDCS Events page of the NetBackup Appliance
Web Console.
Note: You cannot connect to an SDCS server without providing its authentication
certificate. You can either download the certificate from the site or point to a
downloaded certificate earlier, from your local folders.
To connect an SDCS server
Click SDCS Events.
Under Connect to SDCS server, click Connect.

The Connect to SDCS Server dialog box appears.
Enter a valid host name or IP address of the SDCS server in the Host Name
/ IP field.
Enter the port number of the SDCS server in the Port field.
Select either Download authentication certificate from the SDCS server

or Provide the location for the existing certificate.
The appliance displays the certificate details.
Click on Accept Certificate to accept the certificate.

The appliance displays the Certificate issued message.
Click Connect to connect to the SDCS server.

The appliance has connected to the SDCS server successfully when the
following message appears:
Connected successfully to SDCS server.
Revert SDCS to unmanaged mode on a NetBackup appliance

If you have set up an appliance to operate in managed mode, you can use the
following procedure to revert it back to unmanaged mode and disconnect it from
the SDCS server:
56

To revert the NetBackup appliance from managed mode back to unmanaged

mode
Under Connect to SDCS server, click Connect.

The Connect to SDCS Server dialog box appears.
Enter 127.0.0.1 or localhost in the Host Name / IP field.
Enter the port number of the appliance in the Port field.
Click Connect.
The appliance reverts to the unmanaged mode.
57
Chapter
Managing a NetBackup
appliance from the
NetBackup Appliance Web
Console
About the Manage views
About storage configuration
About appliance supported tape devices
About configuring Host parameters for your appliance
Manage > Appliance Restore
Manage > License
About the Migration Utility
Software release updates for NetBackup Appliances
Manage > Additional Servers
Manage > Certificates

The NetBackup Appliance enables you to use the NetBackup Administration Console
to manage your clients, create policies, run backups, and perform other
Managing a NetBackup appliance from the NetBackup Appliance Web Console

administration functions. For information on how to perform these functions from

the NetBackup Administration Console, you must refer to your NetBackup core
documentation set. If you want to download the latest versions of this documentation
set, you can do so from the Support Web site. For help using the NetBackup
Administration Console, refer to the NetBackup Administrator's Guide, Volume I
on the Support Web site.
You can use the Manage tab in the NetBackup appliance user interface to view
and configure the following settings.
Table 3-1 describes the tabs included in the Manage > Host menu:
Table 3-1
Manage > Host
Manage
Lets you...
Topic
Data Buffer
Configure the data buffer parameters using

Data Buffer tab in the NetBackup Appliance
Web Console.
See Manage > Host > Data

Buffer options on page 114.
Lifecycle
View and change the lifecycle parameters

See Manage > Host >
using this tab when the appliance is configured Lifecycle options on page 116.
as a master server.
Deduplication View and change the deduplication parameters See About configuring
using this tab.
deduplication solutions
on page 120.
Advanced
Enable Bare Metal Restore (BMR) from this

tab when the appliance is configured as a
master server.
IPMI
Reset the IPMI. The reset operation involves See Manage > Host > IPMI
restarting the IPMI.
options on page 124.
Table 3-2 describes the Manage > Storage menu:
See About BMR integration

on page 123.
59

Table 3-2
Manage > Storage
Manage
Lets you...
Topic
Capacity
Distribution
section
View a graphical representation of the storage See Manage > Storage

partitions within your appliance. The donut
on page 65.
chart shows the storage partitions that are
configured.
Capacity
Chart
section
View an overview of storage capacity usage

ranges for specific periods of time.
Partitions
section
View details about all the partitions that are

configured on the Appliance.
Disks
section
View a tabular representation of the storage

disks that comprise your appliance and the
storage shelves that are attached to it.
Table 3-3 describes the tabs included in the Manage > Migration Utility menu:
Table 3-3
Manage > Migration Utility
Manage
Lets you...
Topic
Policy
Conversion
Select the start time, the migration window

See Policy Conversion
(duration), the source disk pool where the
on page 171.
current backup images reside, and the
destination (target) disk pool where you want
the images migrated.
Selection
Criteria
Change the policy that you want to use for the See Selection Criteria
backups that are now targeted for the
on page 164.
destination disk pool.
Migration
Job Status
View the status and the result of all the

scheduled migration jobs.
See Migration Job Status

on page 168.
Table 3-4 describes the individual following sub-menus under the Manage menu:
60

Table 3-4
Manage > Appliance Restore, License, Software Updates,

Additional Servers
Manage
Lets you...
Topic
Appliance
Restore
Reset the appliance to a specific state. That

See Manage > Appliance
state can be an original factory state or a state Restore on page 125.
that is determined through the use of
checkpoints.
NetBackup
License
Review, add, and delete license keys through See Manage > License
the administrative Web UI.
on page 158.
Software
Updates
View, install, or delete a software update on

See Software release
your appliance. This screen contains two tables updates for NetBackup
that show the software updates that are
Appliances on page 175.
available for you to download for your appliance
and the software updates that you can choose
to install or delete. This screen also displays
the NetBackup Appliance software version that
is currently installed on your appliance.
Additional
Servers
Add or delete additional servers. This tab lets See Manage > Additional
you add an entry to the NetBackup bp.conf file. Servers on page 199.
The bp.conf file allows communication to occur
between the appliance and the Windows
NetBackup Administration Console, so you can
manage your appliance through that console.
Note: This tab is only displayed for an

appliance configured as a master server.

The NetBackup Appliance Web Console enables you to manage the storage
configuration. You can use the Manage > Storage pane to manage the storage
space.
The NetBackup 5220, 5230, and 5240 appliances are available for use with up to
four storage shelves. The storage shelves provide you with additional disk storage
space. After you have physically connected the storage shelves, use the NetBackup
Appliance Web Console to manage the storage space.
The NetBackup 5330 appliance must be connected to one Primary Storage Shelf.
The storage space can be expanded by using up to two Expansion Storage Shelves.
After you have physically connected the Expansion Storage Shelf, use the
NetBackup Appliance Web Console to manage the storage space.
61

Note: The 5330 appliance (base unit) does not have internal disk space available
for backups or storage. It only stores the OS, logs, checkpoints etc. The space
available from the Primary Storage Shelf and the Expansion Storage Shelf can be
used for backups.
If you have a NetBackup 5330 Appliance with an Expansion Storage Shelf, the
following restrictions apply:
Moving an Expansion Storage Shelf from one 5330 appliance to another 5330
appliance is not supported.
Moving disk drives within an Expansion Storage Shelf is not supported.
Figure 3-1 provides a bird's-eye view of how storage space is configured within
your 52xx appliance.
Figure 3-2 provides a bird's-eye view of how storage space is configured within
your 5330 appliance.
Figure 3-1
NetBackup 52xx Appliance storage space

NetBackup 52xx Appliance Storage
Disks
For a 5200 appliance, the storage is available on the
Appliance base unit only and cannot be expanded
using storage shelves.
For 5220, 5230, and 5240 appliances, the storage
can be expanded by using storage shelves.
Storage Partitions
NetBackup Catalog
(Master appliance only)
NetBackup 52xx Appliance

System Disk
(OS, logs etc.)
You can
connect up to
four storage
shelves for 5220, 5230
and 5240 appliances.
MSDP
AdvancedDisk
MSDP Catalog
Base Disk
Expansion
Disk 1
Expansion
Disk 2
Expansion
Disk 3
Expansion
Disk 4
Storage
Space
Share
Configuration
Unallocated
62

Figure 3-2
NetBackup 5330 Appliance storage space

NetBackup 5330 Appliance Storage
NetBackup 5330 Appliance
Storage Partitions
2 System Disks
(OS, logs etc.)
Primary
Storage
Shelf
A 5330 appliance must
have one Primary
Storage Shelf. You can
connect up to two
Expansion
Storage Shelves
(optional).
6 Data
Disks
Advanced Disk
1 Meta
Disk
Expansion
Storage
Shelf
(optional)
6 Data
Disks
Expansion
Storage
Shelf
(optional)
6 Data
Disks
1 Meta
Disk
Storage
Space
MSDP Catalog
(resides on MetaDisk)
Unallocated
MSDP
Configuration
Share
1 Meta
Disk
Figure 3-3 lists the tasks that you can perform on the appliance storage space.
63

Figure 3-3
64
Storage operations
Storage Operations
Tasks performed on Storage Disks

To perform the tasks listed below:
- Go to Manage > Storage > Disks in the Appliance
console.
- Use the Manage > Storage shell menu
Tasks performed on Storage Partitions

To perform the tasks listed below:
- Go to Manage > Storage > Partitions in the
Appliance console.
- Use the Manage > Storage shell menu
Add
Adds a disk in the New Available state. Adds disk space to
the unallocated storage.
Command - Add <Disk ID>
Create
Creates a share partition only.
Command - Create Share
Remove
Delete
Removes disk space from the unallocated space.
Deletes a share partition only.
Command - Remove <Disk ID>
Command - Delete Share <ShareName>

Edit
Scan
Refreshes the storage disks and devices information.
Edits the description and client details of a share.

Command - Edit Share <Details> <ShareName>
Command - Scan
Move
Show Disk
Shows the disks total and unallocated storage
capacity and status.
Moves the partition from one disk to another.

Command - Move <Partition> <SourceDisk>
<TargetDisk> [Size] [Unit]
Command - Show Disk

Resize
Tasks Common to Disks and partitions
Monitor
Displays progress of storage management tasks
Create, resize, or delete a partition. You can

delete a partition if Appliance is in a factory
state (not configured as a master or media server).
Command - Resize <Partition> <Size> <Unit>
like Add, Remove, and so on.

Show Partition
Command - Monitor
Shows the partitions total, available, and used

Show Distribution
storage capacity. You can also view configuration
Shows the distribution of partitions on a disk.
and usage information for all partitions or specific
Command - Show Distribution
partitions.
Command - Show Partition
<All/Configuration/Usage> [PartitionType]

All the tasks that can be performed on the NetBackup Appliance Web Console can
also be performed by using the Manage > Storage shell menu.
For more information about Main > Manage > Storage commands, refer to
NetBackup Appliance Command Reference Guide.
Manage > Storage

The Manage > Storage menu enables you to manage the storage configuration.
Use the Capacity Distribution section to quickly view the storage configuration.
From the Partitions and Disks sections, you can manage this storage space.
Figure 3-4 shows a sample view of Manage > Storage page for a 5330 appliance.
Figure 3-4
Capacity
Distribution
Capacity Chart
Legend
Doughnut
Chart
Partitions
Section
Disks
Section
Manage > Storage page for a 5330 appliance
65

The Capacity Distribution section provides a graphical representation of the

storage partitions within your appliance. The doughnut chart shows the storage
partitions that are configured. It also shows how each partition is sized. The legend
that adjacent to the doughnut chart displays the color and size of each partition.
Only the configured partitions display as links in the legend and can be clicked.
The Capacity Chart section provides an overview of storage capacity usage ranges
for specific periods of time. You can select one week to one year from the drop-down
list. When you select Trend from the drop-down list, Netbackup Appliance analyzes
the past storage capacity usage, and calculates when the available storage is fully
used.
Appliance collects the capacity usage data at 1:00 AM (server time) everyday and
updates the capacity chart several minutes later. It indicates that the display of the
capacity chart is not real time but has one-day delay. For example, to check the
capacity usage by 2015-10-10, you need to wait until 1:05 AM on 2015-10-11.
Depending on your appliance platform, the appliance storage is divided using the
following storage partitions:
AdvancedDisk AdvancedDisk enables you to back up and restore data at a faster rate. It
does not involve any deduplication.
NetBackup
Catalog
This partition contains metadata for NetBackup which includes information

regarding backups, storage devices, and configuration. The NetBackup
Catalog partition is only supported on an appliance master server.
The NetBackup Catalog is always located on a Base disk on a 52xx appliance.
Configuration A storage partition that stores configuration information.

MSDP
The allocated space for Media Server Deduplication (or MSDP) on your
appliance.
On a 5220, 5230, or a 5240 appliance, the MSDP partition should reside on
an expansion disk for optimum performance.
See Moving the MSDP partition from a base disk to an expansion disk for
optimum performance on page 79.
MSDP
Catalog
This partition contains metadata for MSDP which includes information

regarding MSDP backups.
On the 52xx appliances, the MSDP Catalog partition can either exist on the
Base or the Expansion disk. On a 5330 appliance, the MSDP Catalog partition
is located on a dedicated disk that called the Metadisk. The Metadisk contains
the MSDP Catalog partition only.
Share
This partition contains all of the shares that have been allocated for database
backups.
66

Unallocated The storage space that has not been allocated to the other partitions (includes
all partitions that are displayed except Unallocated). When you expand the
storage space for partitions like MSDP, AdvancedDisk, it is used from the
Unallocated space.
When you add a disk, the size of the Unallocated space increases. The size
of the MSDP, AdvancedDisk, and any other partition remains the same.
See the NetBackup documentation for more information on partitions.

Table 3-5 lists the supported sizes and platforms for each partition.
Table 3-5
Partition
Name
Appliance storage partitions

Minimum
supported size
AdvancedDisk 1 GB
NetBackup
Catalog
250 GB (Master
server)
Configuration 25 GB
Maximum supported Supported Platforms

size
Maximum available
capacity
52xx
4 TB (Master server)
52xx
5330
(master server only)

500 GB
52xx
5330
MSDP
5 GB
Maximum available
capacity
52xx
MSDP Catalog 5 GB
25 TB
52xx, 5330
Share
(Copilot)
Maximum available
capacity
5230, 5240, 5330
5 GB
5330
The limit for each

individual share is 250
TB
The Partitions section displays details about all the partitions that are configured
on the Appliance. The following columns are displayed in the Partitions table:
67

Column Name
Description
Partition
Displays the name of the partition.Example: AdvancedDisk

Clicking the partition name opens another page that shows details
about the specific partition and also lets you resize and move the
partition.
Checking partition details lists details about the partition.
Status
Displays the status of the partition.

Example: Optimal
Table 3-6 describes each partition status.
Used
Displays the used space within a partition.

Example: 13.70 GB
Available
Displays the free space within a partition.

Example: 1.62 TB
Total
Displays the total space within the partition.

Example: 1.63 TB
Used Percentage
Displays the percentage of used space in the partition.

Example: 2%
Note: The sizes that are displayed for the MSDP partition on the Manage > Storage
page or by using the Manage > Storage > Show command on the NetBackup
Appliance Shell Menu may not be the full space that is available or used by the
MSDP partition. This is because space is reserved by the file system and also by
MSDP. The file system reserves space for it's own use. In addition, MSDP reserves
4 percent of the storage space for the deduplication database and transaction logs.
For more information, see the NetBackup Deduplication Guide
Check the MSDP disk pool sizes displayed on the NetBackup Administration Console
to know the MSDP statistics.
Table 3-6 describes the various partition status that is displayed next to the partition
type.
68

Table 3-6
Partition Type Status
Status
Description
Optimal
The storage partition is accessible and the entire capacity is

available for backups.
Degraded
The entire storage capacity of the partition is not available in this

state. Only a limited storage capacity of the partition is available.
Not Accessible
The entire storage capacity of the partition is not available so no

tasks can be performed.
Not Configured
Storage is not configured or imported for the storage partition.
Click any partition from the Partition section to go to the partition detail page. For
more information about partition details page, see Checking partition details
Table 3-7 describes the various partition states.
Table 3-7
Partition Name Status
Status
Description
Mounted
The partition is currently mounted.
Not Mounted
The partition is not currently mounted. If the partition is not

mounted, the status can either be Degraded or Not Accessible.
See Table 3-6 for more information.
I/O Error
There is an I/O error with the partition. If the partition has an I/O
error, the status can either be Degraded or Not Accessible. See
Table 3-6 for more information.
The Disks section provides a tabular representation of the storage disks that
comprise your appliance and the storage shelves that are attached to it.
You must scan for new disks when you connect new storage. You must also scan
to refresh the storage information when you disconnect and reconnect storage to
the Appliance.
Click Scan to scan for new disks and then click OK to confirm the prompt.
69

Note: If you are scanning the 5330 appliance for the first time, disk initialization
may take some time. The disk initialization happens in the background and may
take up to 56 hours depending on the system load. The estimated time is up to 28
hours for a Primary Storage Shelf and up to 28 hours for an Expansion Storage
Shelf. You can continue to use the appliance during this time. However, if one or
more of the new disks are used by partitions during the disk initialization process,
the performance of backup and restore operations on the specific disks degrades
by up to 30%.
If you want to expand storage and attach a Storage Shelf or an expansion system
to an appliance, see the NetBackup Appliance Hardware Installation Guide for the
appropriate platform. Once these Storage Shelves or expansion systems are properly
connected to the Appliance, you must scan for the newly available disks from the
Disks section. The new disks have the New Available status. Once the newly
available disks are displayed, these disks must be added so the additional space
can be used.
See Adding the storage space from a newly available disk on page 83.
The following columns are displayed in the table:
Column names
Description
Disk
Displays the ID that is associated with the disk.

Example: 50001FAFA000000F5B0519CB4
Type
Displays the type of disk.

Example: Base
Table 3-8 describes each disk type.
Status
Displays the status of the disk.

Example: In Use
Table 3-9 describes each status.
Allocations
Lists the partitions that exist on each disk. Also lists the size
of each partition.
Example: AdvancedDisk: 18 TB
Unallocated
Displays the available space within the disks that has not been
allocated.
Example: 1.9172 GB
70

Column names
Description
Total
Displays the total storage space within the disk.

Example: 4.5429 TB
Table 3-8 lists the disk types that can appear depending on your Appliance platform.
Table 3-8
Disk Types
Type
Description
Supported Platforms
System
This category tells you the storage that is occupied 52xx

by the appliance operating system, logs etc.
5330
Base
This category tells you the storage that is available 52xx

with the appliance base unit.
Expansion
A storage shelf that is connected to a 5220, 5230, 5220, 5230, 5240

or a 5240 appliance.
Data
All partitions, except MSDP Catalog, exist on the 5330

Data disk. Examples of partitions that exist on the
data disks are MSDP, AdvancedDisk, Configuration
etc. There can be six data disks for a Primary
Storage Shelf and six for an Expansion Storage
Shelf.
Meta
The MSDP Catalog partition exists only on the Meta 5330

disk. There can be one Meta disk for a Primary
Storage Shelf and one for an Expansion Storage
Shelf.
Unknown
This category appears when appliance cannot

determine the disk type like when the disk is not
accessible.
Not Applicable
Table 3-9 describes the various status that is displayed in the Status field.
71

Disk Status
Table 3-9
Status
Description
Foreign
Denotes that the disk has storage configuration information, and may contain
data.
The Remove link is displayed next to all Foreign disks. You can remove any
pre-existing data from a Foreign disk. After you remove a Foreign disk, the
status of the disk is New Available.
Disk status is displayed as Foreign, when:
In Use
A disk that was In Use was physically disconnected, later reconnected.

In this case, restarting the appliance would bring the disk status back to
its previous state.
A disk that was In Use was physically disconnected. The Appliance was
reimaged and reconfigured and the disk is connected back.
Or
A disk that was connected to another system still has configuration
information of the old system
Denotes that the disk is currently in use.

The Remove link is displayed if the disk does not have any partition.
n/a
Denotes that no commands or operations can be performed on disks with

this status.
An example of a disk that has n/a status is System.
An example of a disk that has n/a status is Operating System.
New
Available
Denotes that the disk is available to be added to the storage space. The Add
link is displayed to add the storage disk to the storage space.
Not
Accessible
Storage disk that was In Use is not accessible any more.
Note: You can use the Datacollect command from the Main > Support shell
menu to gather storage disk logs. You can share these disk logs with the Support
team to resolve disk-related issues. More information about the Main > Support
> Datacollect menu is available.
Checking partition details

Figure 3-5 shows a sample view of partition details page for a 5330 appliance.
72

Figure 3-5
Partition details page for a 5330 appliance
Capacity
Distribution
Capacity
Chart
Partition
Distribution
on Disk
The Capacity Distribution section provides a graphical representation of a specific

storage partition within your appliance. The doughnut chart shows the storage
partition that is configured. It also shows how the specific partition is sized. The
legend that adjacent to the doughnut chart displays the color and size of the partition.
Only the configured partitions display as links in the legend and can be clicked.
The Capacity Chart section provides an overview of storage capacity usage ranges
for specific periods of time. You can select one week to one year from the drop-down
list. When you select Trend from the drop-down list, Netbackup Appliance analyzes
the past storage capacity usage, and calculates when the available storage is fully
used.
The Partition Distributions on Disk section shows where a specific partition
resides. It also shows the disk type and size.
It also shows the partition number that resides on the disk. This can help with
troubleshooting issues when a partition status is degraded or the disk fails.
Table 3-10 lists the operations that can be performed, on a partition, using the
NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu and the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
73

Table 3-10
Operations to manage the appliance storage partitions
Operation
Description
Partition
Resize
Creates, resizes, or deletes a selected

partition. Review the following
considerations:
AdvancedDisk
Configuration
MSDP
You can create a partition using Resize

only if the Appliance is configured as a
master or a media server.
You can resize a partition to a higher

or lower value depending on the type
of partition. The size is expanded by
using the unallocated space.
You can delete a partition using Resize
only if the Appliance is in a factory state
(when it is not configured as a master
server or a media server).
Share (NetBackup
Appliance Shell Menu
only)
MSDP Catalog
NetBackup Catalog
See Resizing a partition on page 74.

See Resize dialog on page 76.
Move
Moves the selected partition from a source

disk to the destination disk.
See Moving a partition on page 78.
AdvancedDisk
Configuration
MSDP
Share (NetBackup
only)
MSDP Catalog
Note: The NetBackup

Catalog partition cannot
be moved.
Note: On a 5330
appliance, the MSDP
Catalog partition exists on
its own metadisk and can
only be moved between
metadisks (if applicable).
Resizing a partition
A partition can be resized to a higher or lower value. You can also create or delete
a partition by resizing a partition.
74

You can create data partitions like AdvancedDisk or MSDP using Resize only if the
Appliance is configured as a master server or a media server.
When you create an MSDP partition, a backup policy to protect the MSDP Catalog
is automatically created.
You can delete a partition using Resize only if the Appliance is in a factory state
(when it is not configured as a master server or a media server).
Note: You cannot delete Configuration or NetBackup Catalog partitions even if the
Appliance is in a factory state.
Note: A share partition cannot be created or deleted using the Resize command.
Review the following points before you resize a storage partition:
The AdvancedDisk, Configuration, MSDP, MSDP Catalog, and the NetBackup

Catalog partitions can be resized to a higher or a lower value. To resize, enter
values in increments of 1 GB.
Each partition has a minimum and maximum supported size. Ensure that you
resize a partition within these values.
Note: Resizing a partition may take a significant amount of time depending on the
configuration of the system and how much data is present. In some instances, the
operation may appear to hang while running. Allow the operation time to fully
complete.
The following procedure describes how to resize partitions.
To resize a storage partition
Log on to the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
Click Manage > Storage .
In the Partitions section, click the partition that you want to resize. The partition
details page opens.
In the Partition Distributions on Disk section, click Resize.
75

Enter appropriate values for the parameters on the Resize <partition> dialog.
Click Resize to resize the partition.
See Resize dialog on page 76.
The progress details are displayed when you resize a partition.

Click OK once the operation is complete. The partition details page is
automatically refreshed.
Resize dialog
Review the following points before you resize a storage partition:
The AdvancedDisk, Configuration, NetBackup Catalog, MSDP, and the MSDP

Catalog partitions can be resized to a higher or a lower value. To resize, enter
values in increments of 1 GB.
Each partition has a minimum and maximum supported size. Ensure that you
resize a partition within these values.
The following parameters are displayed on the Resize dialog:

Parameter
Description
Used Size
The Used Size is displayed when you resize AdvancedDisk, Configuration,

MSDP, MSDP Catalog, and the NetBackup Catalog partitions. For these
partitions, you cannot enter a value that is lower than the Used Size of the
partition.
Unallocated
Size
Displays the available space on the appliance.
Current Size
Displays the total size of the partition.
Storage Unit
Name
The storage unit name appears only if you create AdvancedDisk or MSDP
partition (Current Size is 0). You can assign a different storage unit name,
other than the default.
The storage unit name can contain any letters, numbers, or special
characters. The name can include up to 256 characters.
Note: The name should not start with the minus (-) character and spaces
should not be used anywhere in the name.
76

Parameter
Description
Disk Pool
Name
The Disk Pool Name appears only if you create AdvancedDisk or MSDP
partition (Current Size is 0). You can assign a different disk pool name, other
than the default.
The disk pool name can contain any letters, numbers, or special characters.
The name can include up to 256 characters.
Note: The name should not start with the minus (-) character and spaces
should not be used anywhere in the name.
New Size
Enter a value in the text box and select the appropriate unit. You can also
drag the slider to the new size. (in GB, TB, or PB). You can also click on
the bar up to the new size.
Only an absolute value is supported if the unit is GB. Absolute and decimal
values are supported if the units are TB or PB.
The maximum value on the slider displays the partition size that you can
scale up to. For AdvancedDisk and MSDP partitions, the maximum value
is the sum of Current Size and Unallocated Size.
For other partitions like Configuration and NetBackup Catalog, the maximum
value on the slider is the lower value when you compare the following values:
Sum of Current Size and Unallocated Size
Maximum supported size of the partition
For example, consider a NetBackup Catalog partition with a Current size of

300 GB and an Unallocated Size of 6 GB. The maximum supported size for
a NetBackup Catalog partition is 4 TB. Since the maximum supported size
for NetBackup Catalog (4 TB) is greater than 306 GB (Current Size (300
GB) + Unallocated Size (6 GB)), the Maximum Size is displayed as 306 GB.
Troubleshooting resize-related issues

The following sample error message may appear when you resize a partition:
[Error] Failed to resize the 'MSDP' partition '2' because the partition is either
fragmented or busy. Retrying the operation after sometime may resolve the issue.
Contact Technical Support if the issue persists.
This message appears if the specific partition is being used or is fragmented. For
example, the resize operation may fail when backup and restore operations are
reading or writing data to the partition. In this scenario, you can retry resizing the
partition after some time.
The message may also appear if the partition is fragmented. Contact Technical
Support for further assistance.
77

Moving a partition
This procedure describes the process to move a partition from one storage disk to
another.
Note: The NetBackup Catalog partition cannot be moved. The NetBackup Catalog
partition must always be present on the base unit of a 52xx appliance.
On a 5330 appliance, the MSDP Catalog partition must always be present on the
Metadisk and can only be moved between Metadisks (wherever applicable).
To move a partition
Click Manage > Storage.
In the Partitions section, click the partition that you want to move. The partition
details page opens.
In the Partition Distributions on Disk section, click Move.

See Move <partition> dialog on page 78.
Click Move to move the partition.

Note: The partition size and the workload on the system determines the time
taken to move a partition.
The Move dialog displays the progress details and status of the move operation.
Click OK once the operation is complete. The partition details page is
Move <partition> dialog

The Move <Partition Name> window displays the following parameters:
Parameter Description
Source
Disk
Example
Displays the name of disk that

76YTGD2BA7CBACB4F416D631CE
currently holds the selected partition. (Base)
Partition Displays the selected partitions size 300 GB

Size
on the source disk.
78

Parameter Description
Target
Disk
Example
Click the drop-down list and select the 9DB0FD2BA7CBACB4F416D631CE

target disk to which you want to move (Expansion)
the partition.
Note: The Target disk must be

different from the Source disk.
Unallocated Displays the unallocated size on the
Size
target device.
100 GB
Size
35 GB
Type the storage size in GB, TB, or

PB that you want to move from the
current disk to the new disk.
Note: It is an optional field. If the size

is not specified, the appliance moves
the entire partition.
Note: The size to be moved cannot

be greater than the Unallocated Size
on the target disk.
Moving the MSDP partition from a base disk to an expansion disk

for optimum performance
If all or a part of your Media Server Deduplication Pool (MSDP) partition resides on
the appliance base unit (base disk), it is recommended that you move the MSDP
partition to an expansion disk. This recommendation applies to 5220, 5230, and
5240 appliances and is needed for optimum performance.
The following procedures explain how to move the MSDP partition from a base disk
to an expansion disk. The base disk resides on the appliance base unit. The
expansion disk resides on a storage shelf that is attached to the appliance. A 5220,
5230, or a 5240 appliance can have up to four expansion disks.
Consider the following scenarios:
Scenario 1 - The MSDP and AdvancedDisk partitions are configured on the

base disk. The expansion units are physically attached to the appliance but
have not been added yet.
Scenario 2 - The MSDP partition exists on the base disk. The expansion units
are configured and partitions exist on them.
Select the scenario that applies to you and follow the appropriate procedure outlined
below.
79

Scenario 1 - To move the MSDP partition from a base disk to an expansion

disk
Click Manage > Storage and go to Disks section. Check the partitions that
are on the Base disk. Suppose that you have MSDP, AdvancedDisk, Catalog,
and Configuration partitions on the base disk as shown below.
Ensure that the base disk is fully allocated by resizing the non-MSDP partitions
(like AdvancedDisk). To ensure that the base disk is full, resize the
AdvancedDisk partition to a value that is just below the maximum value
displayed in the slider.
In the Partitions section, click AdvancedDisk partition to open the partition
details page. On the partition details page, click Resize in the Partition
Distributions on Disk section. Enter a size in the New Size field that is slightly
below the maximum value.
Click Resize to resize.
Click OK after the resize operation is complete. The page is refreshed
automatically and reflects the updated size.
In the Disks section, click the Add link next to the expansion unit. Click Yes
to confirm the addition and OK when it finishes. Repeat this process for the
second expansion unit.
Note that the Unallocated space increases.
Check the space occupied by MSDP partition.

In the Partitions section, click the MSDP link to open the MSDP partition details
page. Check the Partition Distributions on Disk section.
Note that the expansion disk must have at least 260 GB of unallocated space
when you move the MSDP partition to the expansion disk at a later point.
On the MSDP partition details page, click Resize in the Partition Distributions
on Disk section. Enter a value that is slightly below the Unallocated Size.
Ensure that the Unallocated size that remains must be more than the MSDP
size on the base disk.
Click Resize to resize.
Click OK after the resize operation is complete. The page is refreshed
automatically and reflects the updated size.
80

Check how the MSDP partition is distributed across disks.

On the MSDP partition details page, check the Partition Distributions on
Disk section. In this example, a part of the MSDP partition resides on the base
disk.
Click Move in the Partition Distributions on Disk section.
Move the MSDP partition from the base disk to the expansion disk.
In the Move <MSDP> window, select the expansion disk that has enough
Unallocated size as the Target disk.
10 Click Move to move the partition.

Note: The partition size and the workload on the system determine the time it
takes to move a partition.
11 The Move dialog displays the progress details and status of the move operation.
Click OK once the operation is complete. The MSDP partition details page is
12 On the MSDP partition details page, check the Partition Distributions on

Disk section. The MSDP partition resides on the expansion disks.
The following procedure explains how to move the MSDP partition from a base disk
to an expansion disk when the expansion disk has partitions configured on it.
Scenario 2 - To move the MSDP partition from a base disk to an expansion
disk
Click Manage > Storage and go to Partitions section.
Check if the MSDP partition is located on the base disk.

In the Partitions section, click MSDP partition to open the MSDP partition
details page.
On the MSDP partition details page, check the Partition Distributions on

Disk section.
If the Type is Base for any of the disks, all or a part ouf the MSDP partition
resides on the base disk. In this example, the MSDP partition is located on the
base disk as well as the Expansion disk.
If the type is Expansion for all the disks, the MSDP partition doesnt exist on
the base disk. In this case, you do not need to move the MSDP partition. You
can ignore the rest of the procedure.
81

Click Move in the Partition Distributions on Disk section.
On the Move <MSDP> window, click the drop-down list and select the target
disk to which you want to move the partition. The target disk must be an
expansion disk.
Click Move to move the partition.

Note: The partition size and the workload on the system determine the time it
takes to move a partition.
The Move dialog displays the progress details and status of the move operation.
Click OK once the operation is complete. The MSDP partition details page is
Scanning storage devices from the NetBackup Appliance Web

Console
The following procedure describes how to scan the connected storage devices from
Manage > Storage > Disks. Whenever a storage device is connected, use Scan
to detect the storage device or refresh its status. If the Scan does not display the
updated storage device information, then restart the appliance to refresh the storage
device information.
Note: If you want to expand storage and attach a Storage Shelf or an expansion
system to an appliance, see the NetBackup Appliance Hardware Installation Guide
for the appropriate platform. Once these Storage Shelves or expansion systems
are properly connected to the Appliance, you must scan the devices from the Disks
section. Once the newly available disks are displayed, these disks must be added
so the additional space can be used. The new disks have the New Available status.
To scan storage devices from the NetBackup Appliance Web Console
Click Manage > Storage > Disks.
Click Scan.
82

You are prompted for confirmation. Click Yes to confirm. The scan starts.
Note: If you are scanning the 5330 appliance for the first time, disk initialization
may take some time. The disk initialization happens in the background and
may take up to 56 hours depending on the system load. The estimated time
is up to 28 hours for a Primary Storage Shelf and up to 28 hours for an
Expansion Storage Shelf. You can continue to use the appliance during this
time. However, if one or more of the new disks are used by partitions during
the disk initialization process, the performance of backup and restore operations
on the specific disks degrades by up to 30%
When the scan is complete, click OK. The Disks section refreshes
automatically. If a new storage shelf is detected on a 52xx appliance, a new
disk ID appears in the Disks section.
For 52xx appliances, the new entry should have the following attributes:
Type = Expansion
Status = New Available
For 5330 appliances, 6 Data disks and 1 Meta disk are displayed for a Primary
Storage Shelf or an Expansion Storage Shelf. For a 5330 appliance that has
a Primary Storage Shelf and an Expansion Storage Shelf, 12 Data disks and
2 Metadisks appear in the Disks section. The status for these disks is New
Available.
You can now add this disk to the Unallocated space.
See Adding the storage space from a newly available disk on page 83.
Adding the storage space from a newly available disk

The following procedure describes how to add space from a newly available disk
into the unallocated space.
If you want to attach a Storage Shelf or an expansion system to an appliance, see
the NetBackup Appliance Hardware Installation Guide for the appropriate platform.
Once these Storage Shelves are properly connected to the Appliance, you must
scan for the newly available disks from the Disks section. The new disks have the
New Available status. Once the newly available disks are displayed, these disks
must be added so the additional space can be used.
To add the storage space from a newly available disk
Click Manage > Storage and go to the Disks section
83

The Disks section displays all the disks. Only disks that have the Status as
New Available can be added. The Add link is displayed next to such disks.
Note: If the disk status is Foreign, click Remove so that data is removed and
the disk status becomes New Available. Contact Support if you want to recover
this data.
Click Add to add the disk.

A dialog box displays the following message:
This operation will add the disk to the Unallocated storage. Do you want
to continue?
Click Yes.
The system displays the following message:

Adding disk <disk ID>
Succeeded.
Click OK to exit. The Manage > Storage > Disks page is automatically refreshed.
When you add the disk, the appliance updates its Status to In Use. This change
is also reflected in the Partitions section. The Unallocated space is increased and
the additional storage space is displayed in the Partitions graph and table.
Removing an existing storage disk

The following procedure describes how to remove an existing storage disk.
Note: Ensure that you move all the partitions from the disk to other disks, before
removing a disk with status In Use. You can view the partitions on each disk from
the Allocations column in Manage > Storage > Disks.
Note: You can use the beacon feature to identify the expansion disk, while
disconnecting it. You can also use the beacon feature to identify the base disk.
To remove an existing disk
Go to Manage > Storage > Disks.
84

The Status column in the Disks table displays the Remove link. It appears
for disks with status In Use that do not contain any partitions. It also appears
for disks with status Foreign.
Note: If a disk with status In Use has partitions and you want to remove it, you
must first move the partition to other disks. You can view the partitions on each
disk from the Allocations column in Manage > Storage > Disks.
Click the Remove link, to remove the disk.

A dialog box displays the following message:
This operation will remove the disk <disk ID>. Do you want to continue?
Click Yes to continue.
If you remove a disk with status Foreign that has data, the following message
is displayed:
This operation will remove the disk <disk ID>. Any backup data present
in the <disk ID> disk will be deleted. Do you want to continue?
Note: A disk with status Foreign may have data. If you try to remove such a
disk, any data present on it is also removed.
The system displays the following message:

Removing disk <disk ID>
Succeeded.
Click OK to exit. The Manage > Storage > Disks page is automatically refreshed.
When you remove the disk, the appliance updates the Status of this disk to
New Available. This change is also reflected in the Partitions section. The
Unallocated space is decreased and displayed accordingly in the Partitions
graph and table.
Note: When you physically attach or disconnect a storage shelf from the 5220
appliance, you must update the boot order, reboot the storage shelf, and finally
reboot your appliance. Also, if you disconnect one of the two connected storage
shelves, you need to reboot the appliance.
85

Warning: After physically disconnecting a storage shelf, if the 5220 appliance

reboots it can hang and display the Boot splash screen. Press the ESC key to
proceed. The RAID contoller firmware provides step-by-step instructions to help
you boot the appliance.
Monitoring the progress of storage manipulation tasks

The following procedure describes how to use the Monitor command, using the
NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
To monitor storage tasks
Log on to the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
Go to the Manage > Storage menu by using the following command:

Main > Manage > Storage
Enter the Monitor command to view the current progress of the storage
management tasks being performed.
The appliance displays the task progress as shown in the following example:
Storage > Monitor
>>>>> Press 'CTRL + C' to quit. <<<<<

Resizing the AdvancedDisk storage partition...
The estimated time to resize the partition is 2 to 5 minutes.
Stopping NetBackup processes... (2 mins approx)
Scanning storage devices using the NetBackup Appliance Shell

Menu
The following procedure describes how to scan the connected storage devices to
your appliance, through the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu. You can also scan
storage devices from Manage > Storage > Disks.
86

Note: Whenever a storage device is connected or disconnected, use this command

to detect the storage device or refresh its status. If the Scan command does not
display the updated storage device information, then restart the appliance to refresh
the storage device information.
87

88
To scan the storage devices connected to your appliance
Go to the Manage > Storage menu by using the following command:

The appliance displays all the sub-tasks in the storage menu.
Enter the Scan command to scan the storage devices.

For 52xx appliances, the connected devices are scanned and the following
output is displayed:
Storage> Scan
- [Info] Refreshing the storage devices...
- [Info] Succeeded.
NOTE: If you run the 'Manage->Storage->Show Disk' command and the device i
run the 'Manage->Storage->Scan' command to import and refresh the device i
appear, restart the appliance to refresh the device information.
For 5330 appliances, the connected devices are scanned and the following
output may be displayed:
Storage> Scan
- [Info] Performing sanity check on disks and partitions...
(5 mins approx)
- [Info] The scan operation can take up to 15 minutes to complete.
- [Info] Refreshing the storage devices...
- [Info] Created 14 new disks (RAID groups) on External Storage.
- [Info] Succeeded.
- [Info] The new disks are being initialized. The disk initialization
happens in the background and may take up to 56 hours depending on the
system load. You can continue to use the appliance during this time.
However, if one or more of the new disks are used by partitions during
the disk initialization process, the performance of backup and restore
operations on the specific disks degrades by up to 30%.
NOTE: If you run the 'Manage->Storage->Show Disk' command and the device
information does not appear in the output, run the 'Manage->Storage->Scan'
to import and refresh the device information. If the device information
still does not appear, restart the appliance to refresh the device
information.

About Copilot functionality and share management

Copilot integrates with native Oracle tools and processes to give database backup
administrators more control, visibility, and the ability to recover their database
backups. Backup administrators can then manage policies, move the data to different
storage types, and create off-site backup copies of the database backups.
Additionally, Copilot features NetBackup Accelerator technology to boost Oracle
backup and restore performance. NetBackup Accelerator integrates with Oracles
incremental merge capabilities to eliminate the need for full backups and allow new
full database images to be synthesized on backup storage post-process.
Copilot lets you create shares on the appliance for Oracle backup and recovery
and create further protection policies in NetBackup for advanced data protection
features like long-term retention, replication, and NetBackup Oracle Accelerator
technology. Copilot is exclusive to the appliance but requires additional configuration
steps within NetBackup software.
To configure Copilot functionality, the following steps need to be completed:
Create a share on the appliance using the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
Mount the appliance share on the Oracle server.
Configure a Storage Lifecycle Policy (SLP) and Oracle Intelligent Policy (OIP)
using NetBackup.
Refer to the NetBackup Copilot for Oracle Configuration Guide for the entire
configuration process.
Share partitions can be created, modified, viewed, and deleted through the use of
the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu. Use the following topics as a guide to
managing your share partitions.
See Creating a share from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu on page 90.
See Viewing share information from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu
on page 92.
See Editing a share from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu on page 94.
See Resizing a share from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu on page 97.
See Moving a share from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu on page 98.
See Deleting a share from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu on page 99.
Refer to the NetBackup Appliance Commands Reference Guide for more specific
details about each command.
Refer to the NetBackup for Oracle Administrator's Guide for more information on
Copilot in NetBackup software.
89

Creating a share from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu

The following procedure explains how to create a share from the NetBackup
Appliance Shell Menu.
To create a new share from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu:
Open an SSH session to log on to the appliance as an administrator.
Enter Main_Menu > Manage > Storage > Create Share. The command
guides you through the process of configuring a new share.
Enter the share name, for example share_1.
Enter a short description for the share, for example Test for share_1.
Enter the allocated capacity for the share, for example 5GB.
Enter a comma-separated list of Oracle server clients that can access the
share, for example 10.100.0.2, 10.100.0.3.
Enter the NFS export options for each of the Oracle clients. You are prompted
to enter options for each client you added in the previous step.
See NFS export options on page 100.
90

8
- [Info] Summary:
Name
Description
Allocated Capacity
Clients
91
Once you have entered the NFS export options, the following information is
displayed:
: share_1
: Testing share_1
: 5GB
:
10.100.0.2(rw,no_root_squash)
>> Continue? ['yes', 'no']
Enter yes to continue.

The following information is displayed:
- [Info] Creating Share share_1

- [Info] 'Share' storage partition does not exist. Creating it now...
- [Info] The estimated time to create the 'Share' partition can range from 0 hours, 2 minutes
to 0 hours, 5 minutes depending on the system load. The greater the system load
the longer it takes to complete the resize operation.
- [Info] Creating the 'Share' partition 'share_1'...
- [Info] Mounting the 'Share' partition 'share_1'...
- [Info] Exporting Share 'share_1' at mount point '/shares/share_1'
- [Info] Share share_1 created successfully
- [Info] NOTES:
Share exported at '10.132.1.237:/shares/share_1'.
Please create a mount point with this export path for all Database
Servers that need access to this Share.
See the NetBackup Appliance Administrator's guide for more detailed
mount instructions.

Refer to the NetBackup Copilot for Oracle Configuration Guide for more
information on configuring Oracle database backups.
Refer to the NetBackup for Oracle Administrator's Guide for more information on
Copilot in NetBackup software.

Viewing share information from the NetBackup Appliance

Shell Menu
The following procedure explains how to view share partition information using the
92

To view share partition information using the NetBackup Appliance Shell

Menu
Enter Main_Menu > Manage > Storage > Show Partition All Share.
The following is an example output displaying share information:
Storage> Show Partition ALL share

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Partition
| Total
| Available | Used
| %Used | Status
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Share
|
10 GB |
9.89 GB | 116.45 MB |
2 | Optimal
Share
------------------------------------------------------------------Partition | Total
| Available | Used
| %Used | Status
------------------------------------------------------------------share1
|
5 GB |
4.94 GB |
58.23 MB |
2 | Mounted
share2
|
5 GB |
4.94 GB |
58.23 MB |
2 | Mounted
Share - share1
------------------------------------------Description:
test share
------------------------------------------Clients
| Options
------------------------------------------10.80.100.12 | no_root_squash, rw, secure
------------------------------------------Share - share2
------------------------------------------Description:
test share 2
------------------------------------------Clients
| Options
------------------------------------------10.80.112.14 | no_root_squash, rw, secure
------------------------------------------Instructions to use a share:
On UNIX systems, a share can be mounted using nb-appliance:/shares/<Name>.
93

details about the command.
See About viewing storage space information using the Show command
on page 100.
Editing a share from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu

Shares can be edited using the Manage > Storage > Edit Share command. You
can edit the following details of the share:
Share description
Add, update, or delete clients.
The following procedure explains how to edit a share description from the NetBackup
To edit a share description
Enter Main_Menu > Manage > Storage > Edit Share Description
<ShareName>.
Enter a new share description, then press Enter.

The following is an example output:
Manage > Storage > Edit Share Description share_1

- [Info] Old Description :
test share
>> Enter a new short description: (None) new test share
- [Info] Summary:
Name : share_1
Description : new test share
>> Continue? ['yes', 'no'] yes
- [Info] Updating Share share_1
- [Info] Updating Share partition 'share_1'
- [Info] Share share_1 updated successfully
The following procedure explains how to add a client to a share from the NetBackup
94

95
To add a client to a share
Enter Main_Menu > Manage > Storage > Edit Share Clients Add
<ShareName>.
Enter the clients you want to add, then press Enter.
Enter the NFS export options for each client. Press Enter to move to the next
client. When you are finished, the summary is displayed.
Manage > Storage > Edit Share Clients Add share_1

- [Info] List of Oracle server clients that can access this share :
10.80.40.110(rw,no_root_squash,secure)
>> Enter comma-separated list of Oracle server clients you would like to add: 10.80.40.111,10.8
- [Info] Enter the NFS export options for each of the Oracle clients
The following options are supported:
ro, rw, root_squash, no_root_squash, all_squash,
anonuid=<uid-value>, anongid=<gid-value>, secure, insecure.
For detailed information about the NFS export command options, refer to the
NetBackup Appliance Administrator's guide.
>> Enter the export options for '10.80.40.111': (rw,no_root_squash,secure)
>> Enter the export options for '10.80.40.112': (rw,no_root_squash,secure)
- [Info] Summary:
Name : share_1
Clients :
- [Info] Re-exporting Share 'share_1' at mount point '/shares/share_1'
The following procedure explains how to update the clients of a share from the
To update the clients of a share
Enter Main_Menu > Manage > Storage > Edit Share <ShareName> Clients
Update.

Enter the clients you want to update, then press Enter.
Enter the NFS export options for each updated client. Press Enter to move to
the next client. When you are finished the summary is displayed.
96

Manage > Storage > Edit Share Clients Update share_1
>> Enter comma-separated list of Oracle server clients you would like to update: 10.80.40.112
- [Info] Enter the NFS export options for each of the Oracle clients
The following options are supported:
ro, rw, root_squash, no_root_squash, all_squash,
anonuid=<uid-value>, anongid=<gid-value>, secure, insecure.
For detailed information about the NFS export command options, refer to the
NetBackup Appliance Administrator's guide.
>> Enter the export options for '10.80.40.112': (rw,no_root_squash,secure) rw
- [Info] Summary:
Name : share_1
Clients :
10.80.40.112(rw)
The following procedure explains how to delete clients from a share from the

97
To delete clients from a share
Enter Main_Menu > Manage > Storage > Edit Share <ShareName> Clients
Delete.
Enter the clients you want to delete, then press Enter to delete the clients.
Manage > Storage > Edit Share Clients Delete share_1

10.80.40.112(rw)
>> Enter comma-separated list of Oracle server clients you would like to delete: 10.80.40.111
- [Info] Summary:
Name : share_1
Clients :
10.80.40.112(rw)
Resizing a share from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu

Shares can be resized using the Manage > Storage > Resize command.
Note: Resizing a partition may take a significant amount of time depending on the
load on the system and the amount of data present on the partition. In some cases.
the operation may take up to a day depending on the fragmentation of the partition.
The following procedure explains how to resize a share from the NetBackup

To resize a share
Enter Main_Menu > Manage > Storage > Resize Share [Size] [Unit]
<ShareName> then press Enter.
Note: The share is resized to the new size that you enter. It is not added or
subtracted from the current size.
Type yes, then press Enter to complete the resize operation.

Storage > Resize Share 1 TB share1

- [Info] Performing sanity check on disks and partitions...(5 mins approx)
- [Info] The estimated time to resize the partition can range from
0 hours, 2 minutes to 0 hours, 5 minutes depending on the system load.
The greater the system load the longer it takes to complete the
resize operation.
Do you want to continue? (yes/no) yes
- [Info] Shrinking the 'Share' storage partition...
- [Warning] No recipients are configured to receive software notifications.
Use Main > Settings > Email Software Add command to configure the
appropriate email address.
- [Info] Succeeded.
Moving a share from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu

The following procedure explains how to move a share using the NetBackup
98

99
To move a share using the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu
Enter Main_Menu > Manage > Storage > Move Share <Share_Name>
<SourceDiskID> <TargetDiskID> [Size] [Unit]
Enter yes to move the share.

Storage > Move Share share_1 unit_1 unit_2 5 GB
- Moving the partition would approximately take 0 hours, 2 minutes.
Do you want to continue? (yes/no)
Moving part '1/1' disk... Done
- Succeeded
Deleting a share from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu

The following procedure explains how to delete a share using the NetBackup
To delete a share using the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu
Enter Main_Menu > Manage > Storage > Delete Share <ShareName>.
Enter yes to delete the share.

Manage > Storage > Delete Share share_2

>> Caution: Make sure all data has been backed up before deleting the Share.
Are you sure you want to delete Share 'share_2'? ['yes', 'no'] yes
- [Info] Deleting Share share_2
- [Info] Unexporting Share partition 'share_2' at mount point '/shares/share_2'
- [Info] Unmounting the 'Share' partition 'share_2'...
- [Info] Deleting the 'Share' partition 'share_2'...
- [Info] Share share_2 deleted successfully

NFS export options

The following table describes the export options available for share creation or
modification.
Option
Description
ro
Allows only read requests on the Share.
rw
Allows both read requests and write requests on the Share.
no_root_squash Disables all root squashing.

Allows root account on client to access export share on server as the root
account.
root_squash
Maps requests from UID and GID 0 to the anonymous UID and GID.
all_squash
Maps all UIDs and GIDs to the anonymous user account.

By default, the NFS server chooses a UID and GID of 65534 for squashed
access. These values can be overridden by using the anonuid and
anongid options.
anonuid
Sets the uid of the anonymous user account.

This option forces all anonymous connections to a predefined UID on a
server.
anongid
Sets the gid of the anonymous account.

This option forces all anonymous connections to a predefined GID on a
server.
secure
Requires that requests originate from an Internet port less than

IPPORT_RESERVED (1024).
insecure
Disables the requirement that requests originate from an Internet port less
than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024).
See Creating a share from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu on page 90.
About viewing storage space information using the Show command

This section describes the Show [Type] commands and their usage in the
NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu. These commands can be accessed from
Main_Menu > Manage > Storage.
The[Type] parameter is required when using the Show command.
100

The following Show [Type] commands are described::
Show [ALL] - to view Disk, Partition, and Distribution information together.
See Viewing all storage information on page 101.
Show [Disk] - to view total capacity, unallocated storage capacity, and current
status of a disk.
See Viewing disk information on page 104.
Show [Partition] [All/Configuration/Usage] - to view total, available, and
used storage capacity of a partition.

See Viewing partition information on page 108.
Show [Distribution] - to view the distribution of partitions on a disk.
See Viewing the partition distribution on disks on page 109.

Note: The Available and Used Size values displayed for the MSDP partition on the
Manage > Storage > Partitions page or by using the Manage > Storage > Show
command on the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu may not be the full space
available or used by the MSDP partition. This is because space is reserved by the
file system and also by MSDP. The file system reserves space for it's own use. In
addition, MSDP reserves 4 percent of the storage space for the deduplication
database and transaction logs.
Check the MSDP disk pool sizes displayed on the NetBackup Administration Console
to know the MSDP statistics.
Viewing all storage information

The following procedure describes how to use the Show All command, using the
NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu:
To view all storage information
Open the Storage menu. To open the storage menu, use the following
command:
Enter the Show All command to view device information.
For a 5330 platform, the appliance displays the storage information as shown in
the following example:
101

- [Info] Performing sanity check on disks and partitions... (5 mins approx)

----------------------------------------------------------------------Disk ID
| Type
| Total
| Unallocated | Status
----------------------------------------------------------------------5E000000000000000000000000 | System | 930.39 GB |
| n/a
7A30D550001B22423721D79081 | Base
|
13.64 TB |
10.84 TB | In Use
7A30D550001B22423721D79081 (Base)
--------------------------------AdvancedDisk
:
500 GB
- 0
:
500 GB
Configuration
:
25 GB
- 0
:
25 GB
MSDP
:
1 TB
- 0
:
1 TB
MSDP Catalog
:
43 GB
- 0
:
43 GB
NetBackup Catalog :
250 GB
- 0
:
250 GB
Share
:
1 TB
- s1
:
1 TB
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Partition
| Total
| Available | Used
| %Used | Status
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------AdvancedDisk
|
500 GB | 495.81 GB |
4.19 GB |
1 | Optimal
Configuration
|
25 GB |
21.52 GB |
3.48 GB |
14 | Optimal
MSDP
|
1 TB | 1015.6 GB |
8.36 GB |
1 | Optimal
MSDP Catalog
|
43 GB |
42.59 GB | 414.99 MB |
1 | Optimal
NetBackup Catalog
|
250 GB | 247.62 GB |
2.38 GB |
1 | Optimal
Share
|
1 TB | 1015.6 GB |
8.34 GB |
1 | Optimal
Unallocated
|
10.84 TB |
|
|
- | AdvancedDisk
------------------------------------------------------------------Partition | Total
| Available | Used
| %Used | Status
------------------------------------------------------------------0
|
500 GB | 495.81 GB |
4.19 GB |
1 | Mounted
Configuration
------------------------------------------------------------------Partition | Total
| Available | Used
| %Used | Status
-------------------------------------------------------------------
102

25 GB |
21.52 GB |
3.48 GB |
14 | Mounted
MSDP
------------------------------------------------------------------Partition | Total
| Available | Used
| %Used | Status
------------------------------------------------------------------0
|
1 TB | 1015.6 GB |
8.36 GB |
1 | Mounted
MSDP Catalog
------------------------------------------------------------------Partition | Total
| Available | Used
| %Used | Status
------------------------------------------------------------------0
|
43 GB |
42.59 GB | 414.99 MB |
1 | Mounted
NetBackup Catalog
------------------------------------------------------------------Partition | Total
| Available | Used
| %Used | Status
------------------------------------------------------------------0
|
250 GB | 247.62 GB |
2.38 GB |
1 | Mounted
Share
------------------------------------------------------------------Partition | Total
| Available | Used
| %Used | Status
------------------------------------------------------------------s1
|
1 TB | 1015.6 GB |
8.34 GB |
1 | Mounted
AdvancedDisk
-----------------------------------Disk Pool (DP) | Storage Unit (STU)
-----------------------------------dp_adv_nbapp2br | stu_adv_nbapp2br
MSDP
------------------------------------Disk Pool (DP)
| Storage Unit (STU)
------------------------------------dp_disk_nbapp2br | stu_disk_nbapp2br
Share - s1
-------------------------------------------Description:
None
--------------------------------------------
103

104
Clients
| Options
-------------------------------------------appesx30-vm13 | no_root_squash, rw, secure
--------------------------------------------
You cannot issue commands for disks with the status 'n/a'.
The sizes that are displayed here for the MSDP partition are different
from the MSDP disk pool sizes. See the NetBackup Appliance
Administrator's Guide for more information.
Instructions to use a share:
On UNIX systems, a share can be mounted using nbapp2br.engba.symantec.com:/shares/<Name>.
Viewing disk information

The following procedure describes how to use the Show Disk command, using the

To view disk information
command:
105

106
Enter the Show Disk command to view disk information.

The appliance displays the disk information as shown in the following example:
Storage> Show Disk
- [Info] Performing sanity check on disks and partitions..(5 mins approx)
-------------------------------------------------------------------Disk ID
| Type
| Total |Unallocated|Status
-------------------------------------------------------------------50001FD36800000796537BB10F|Operating|930.39 TB| | n/a
System
50001FD36800000790537BB0FA|Base
| 2.24 TB| 300 GB
| In Use
50001FEE6C00000A36537BB0CB|Expansion|4.5421 TB| 840.92 GB| In Use
You cannot issue commands for devices with the status 'n/a'.
Storage> Show Disk
-------------------------------------------------------------------Disk ID
| Type
| Total |Unallocated|Status
-------------------------------------------------------------------5E000000000000000000000000|System
|930.39 TB| | n/a
50001FD36800000790537BB0FA|Base
| 2.24 TB| 300 GB
| In Use
50001FEE6C00000A36537BB0CB|Expansion|4.5421 TB| 840.92 GB| In Use
You cannot issue commands for devices with the status 'n/a'.
For a 5330 platform, the appliance displays the disk information as shown in
Storage> Show Disk

-------------------------------------------------------------------------Disk ID
|Type
| Total
|Unallocated| Status
-------------------------------------------------------------------------5E000000000000000000000000|System
| 2.73 TB |
| n/a
5E000000000001000000000000|System
| 2.73 TB |
| n/a
50001FD36800000796537BB10F|Meta
| 5.46 TB | 5.46 TB
| In Use
50001FEE6C00000A38537BB0D5|Meta
| 5.46 TB | 5.37 TB
| In Use
50001FD3680000078A537BB0DC|Data
| 19.10 TB |19.10 TB
| In Use
50001FD3680000078C537BB0E4|Data
| 19.10 TB |19.10 TB
| In Use
50001FD3680000078E537BB0EC|Data
| 19.10 TB | 0 GB
| In Use
50001FD36800000790537BB0FA|Data
| 19.10 TB | 7.30 TB
| In Use
50001FD36800000792537BB102|Data
| 19.10 TB |19.08 TB
| In Use
50001FD36800000794537BB10B|Data
| 19.10 TB | 0 GB
| In Use

50001FEE6C00000A32537BB0B4|Data
50001FEE6C00000A34537BB0C3|Data
50001FEE6C00000A36537BB0CB|Data
50001FEE6C00000A3A537BB0D8|Data
50001FEE6C00000A3C537BB0E1|Data
50001FEE6C00000A3E537BB0EA|Data
|
|
|
|
|
|
19.10
19.10
19.10
19.10
19.10
19.10
TB
TB
TB
TB
TB
TB
|19.10
|19.10
|18.20
| 0 GB
|19.10
|19.10
TB
TB
TB
TB
TB
|
|
|
|
|
|
In
In
In
In
In
In
You cannot issue commands for disks with the status 'n/a'.
Table 3-11 lists the disk types that can appear depending on your Appliance platform.
Table 3-11
Disk Type
Type
Description
Supported Platforms
System
This category tells you the storage that

is occupied by the Appliance operating
system, logs etc.
52xx
5330
Base
This category tells you the storage that 52xx

is available with the Appliance base unit.
Expansion
A storage shelf that is connected to a

5220, 5230, 5240
5220, 5230, or a 5240 appliance appears
as a single expansion disk.
Data
All partitions, except MSDP Catalog, exist 5330

on the 5330 Data disk. Examples of
partitions that exist on the data disks are
MSDP, AdvancedDisk, Configuration etc.
There can be six data disks for a Primary
Storage Shelf and six for an Expansion
Storage Shelf.
Meta
The MSDP Catalog partition exists only 5330

on the Meta disk. There can be one Meta
disk for a Primary Storage Shelf and one
for an Expansion Storage Shelf.
Unknown
This category appears when appliance Not Applicable

cannot determine the disk type like when
the disk is not accessible.
107
Use
Use
Use
Use
Use
Use

108
Viewing partition information

The Show Partition command includes a few different options for view the storage
information on the appliance. Options include:
All [PartitionType]
Configuration [PartitionType]
Usage [PartitionType]
Replace [PartitionType] with AdvancedDisk, All, MSDP, or Share.

The following procedure describes how to use the Show Partition Configuration
command to view configuration information for a share, using the NetBackup
Appliance Shell Menu:
To view partition configuration for a share
command:
Enter the Show Partition Configuration Share command to view the

partition information for a share.
For 52xx platforms, the appliance displays the partition information as shown
in the following example:
- [Info] Performing sanity check on disks and partitions... (5 mins approx)

Share - s1
-------------------------------------------Description:
None
-------------------------------------------Clients
| Options
-------------------------------------------appesx30-vm13 | no_root_squash, rw, secure
-------------------------------------------Instructions to use a share:
On UNIX systems, a share can be mounted using nbapp2br.engba.symantec.com:/shares/<Name>.

Viewing the partition distribution on disks

The following procedure describes how to use the Show Distribution command,
using the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu:
109

To view the partition distribution on a disk
command:
110

Enter the Show Distribution command to view distribution of partitions on a

disk.
The following example displays the initiated procedure when you run the Show
[Distribution] command on a 5330 appliance:
Show Distribution
5000294D6C0000214253716C3C (Data)
--------------------------------Configuration :
25 GB
- 0
:
25 GB
5000294D6C0000214553716C47 (Data)
--------------------------------MSDP
: 19.10 TB
- 3
: 19.10 TB
5000294D6C0000214853716C4E (Data)
--------------------------------AdvancedDisk
: 19.10 TB
- 1
: 19.10 TB
5000294D6C0000214B53716C54 (Meta)
--------------------------------MSDP Catalog
:
5.46 TB
- 0
:
5.46 TB
5000294D6C0000214E53716C59 (Data)
--------------------------------AdvancedDisk
:
1.80 TB
- 2
:
1.80 TB
5000294D6C0000215453716C68 (Data)
--------------------------------MSDP
: 19.10 TB
- 0
: 19.10 TB
5000294D8000001E0741ECBEBD (Data)
--------------------------------MSDP
: 19.10 TB
- 2
: 19.10 TB
5000294D8000001E0A41ECBEC3 (Data)
---------------------------------
111

MSDP
- 4
:
:
3.60 TB
3.60 TB
5000294D8000001E1341ECBEDE (Data)
--------------------------------MSDP
: 19.10 TB
- 1
: 19.10 TB
This command also shows the partition number that resides on the disk. This
can help with troubleshooting issues when a partition status is degraded or
when the disk fails.
About storage email alerts

A software administrator can add his email account by running the Settings > Alerts
> Email Software Add [Email Addresses] command to receive software alerts. If
you have configured your email address to receive software alerts for a specific
appliance, you will receive Appliance alerts like storage alerts, hardware monitoring
alerts, and so on.
The storage alerts are generated in the following scenarios:
When a Resize or Move operation is performed on the appliance. Once the

Resize or Move operation is complete, an alert is sent to the email address
specifying the operation and result. An alerts is sent if the resize or move
operations succeed or fail.
When Storage sanity check fails on the appliance. Storage sanity check runs
daily and also runs as a part of storage manipulation operations. Storage sanity
check helps to fix some of the storage issues or reports them.
A sample alert content is provided. This alert is generated when the AdvancedDisk
partition was resized to 1 TB on host nb-appliance:
Alerts from NetBackup Appliance
Host name:
Operation:
Status:
nb-appliance
Resize AdvancedDisk 1 TB
Succeeded
- NetBackup Appliance Alerts
The following sample alert is generated when the storage sanity check failed:
Alerts from NetBackup Appliance
Host name:
nb-appliance
112

113
Operation: Storage sanity check

Status:
Failed
Reason:
Failed to mount the 'AdvancedDisk' partition '0'. A full file
system check (fsck) needs to be performed on this partition.
- NetBackup Appliance Alerts

The following describes the tape device support for the NetBackup appliance:
Tape library
The NetBackup appliance supports backup to the tape libraries that

are of NetBackup type TLD (tape library DLT). DLT is an acronym for
digital linear tape.
For the TLD types that NetBackup supports, see the Hardware
Compatibility List at the following URL:
Tape drives
The NetBackup appliance supports writing to the tape devices that are
capable of SCSI T10 encryption to ensure that the tape media that is
moved off-site is secure. Tape encryption requires configuration of the
NetBackup Key Management Service (KMS) feature. To know more
about KMS support and the list of the tape drives supported with KMS,
see the Hardware Compatibility List at the following URL:
Tape usage
Tapes with the barcode prefix of CLN are treated as cleaning tapes.
Tapes with any other barcode prefix are treated as normal tapes.
NetBackup ACS
libraries
Starting with appliance version 2.5, NetBackup appliances support the

NetBackup type ACS libraries and the configuration of NetBackup ACS
robotics on the NetBackup appliance. Appliance administrators can
change the ACS entries in the vm.conf file on the local appliance.
For complete details about the ACS commands that can be used to
modify the vm.conf file, see the NetBackup Appliance Command
Reference Guide.
See Adding external robots to the NetBackup appliance on page 113.
Adding external robots to the NetBackup appliance

After the Fibre Channel HBA card has been installed, you can add external robots
to the appliance.

Use the following procedure to add robots to the appliance.

To add an external robot to the appliance
Set any physical address switches to the appropriate setting as described in

the instructions from the vendor.
Connect the robot to the HBA card as described in the instructions from the
vendor.
Install and configure the robot software so that the robot works with the
operating system, as described in the instructions from the vendor. The
operating system must be able to recognize the robot before you can configure
it to work with the appliance. (This is an optional step.)
Configure the added robot for backups as follows:

For NetBackup 52xx media
server appliances:
Use the NetBackup Administration Console.

See to "Configuring robots and drives" in the NetBackup
Administrator's Guide, Volume I.
See About appliance supported tape devices on page 113.
About configuring Host parameters for your

appliance
The Settings > Host menu enables you to view and edit the following NetBackup
settings for your appliance:
Specify Data Buffer parameters

See Configuring data buffer parameters on page 116.
Specify Lifecycle parameters

See Configuring lifecycle parameters on page 120.
Specify Deduplication parameters

See Configuring deduplication parameters on page 122.
Enable or disable BMR as a server recovery option

See About BMR integration on page 123.
Manage > Host > Data Buffer options

You can configure the parameters for the data buffer shared with NetBackup using
the Manage > Host > Data Buffer tab in the appliance NetBackup Appliance Web
114

Console. The Data Buffer Parameters tab enables you to enter the count and size
of the following data buffer storage:
Data buffer tapes
Data buffer on disks
Data buffer using Fibre Transport
Data buffer restore
Data buffer for NDMP (Network Data Management Protocol)
Data buffer for multiple copies
The following data buffer parameters can be updated using the appliance NetBackup
Appliance Web Console:
Table 3-12
Data Buffer parameters
Fields
Description for the Count field
Data buffer tapes Count
Enter the total number of shared data buffer tapes used by

NetBackup. The default value is 30.
Data buffer tapes Size
Enter the size of each shared data buffer tape in Bytes. The default
value is 262144 Bytes.
Data buffer on disks - Enter the number of shared data buffer disks used by NetBackup.
Count
The default value is 30.
Data buffer on disks - Enter the size of each shared data buffer disks in Bytes. The default
Size
value is 262144 Bytes.
Data buffer FT - Count Enter the number of shared data buffer FT storage used by
Data buffer FT - Size
Enter the size of each shared data buffer FT storage in Bytes. The
default value is 262144 Bytes.
Data buffer restore Count
Enter the number of shared data buffer restore storage used by

Data buffer NDMP size
Enter the size of each shared data buffer NDMP (Network Data
Management Protocol) storage in Bytes. The default value is
262144 Bytes.
Data buffer multiple

copies - Size
Enter the size of each shared data buffer storage restored in Bytes.
The default value is 262144 Bytes.
You can view and change the data buffer parameters using this tab.
115

Configuring data buffer parameters

You can set the data buffer parameters using the Manage > Host menu in the
NetBackup Appliance Web Console. The Host menu displays the Data Buffer tab.
You can view and change the data buffer parameters using this tab. The following
procedure describes how to view and update your data buffer parameters using
the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
You can also update these parameters using the appliance shell menu. For details,
see the NetBackup 52xx Series Command Reference Guide.
To configure data buffer parameters
Select Manage > Host > Data Buffer.

The system displays the Data Buffer tab with the default NetBackup data buffer
parameters.
Enter the data buffer parameters in the provided fields. A description of the
data buffer parameters is available.
See Manage > Host > Data Buffer options on page 114.
Click Save, to save the updated parameters.
Manage > Host > Lifecycle options

You can set the lifecycle parameters using the Manage > Host menu in the
NetBackup Appliance Web Console. The Host page displays the Lifecycle tab.
You can view and change the lifecycle parameters using this tab.
Table 3-13 describes the lifecycle parameters that are displayed.
116

Table 3-13
Lifecycle parameters
Field
Description
Cleanup session
interval
Enter the time interval after which the deleted life cycle policies
should be cleaned up. The default value is 24 .hours.
Select the unit to measure the time from the drop-down list. You
can select from the following options:
Duplication group
criteria
Hour(s)
Second(s)
Minute(s)
Day(s)
Week(s)
Month(s)
Year(s)
Enter the duplication group criteria that is used to define how batches
are created. The default value is 1.
Image extended retry Enter the interval period till NetBackup waits before an image copy
period
is added to the next duplication job. The default value is 2 hours.
Hour(s)
Second(s)
Minute(s)
Day(s)
Week(s)
Month(s)
Year(s)
117

Table 3-13
Lifecycle parameters (continued)
Field
Description
Job submission
interval
Set the frequency of job submission for all operations. The default
value is 5 minutes.
By default, all jobs are processed before more jobs are submitted.
Increase this interval to allow NetBackup to submit more jobs before
all jobs are processed.
Max size per

duplication job
Hour(s)
Second(s)
Minute(s)
Day(s)
Week(s)
Month(s)
Year(s)
Enter the maximum size up to which the batch of images is allowed

to grow. The default value is 100 GB.
Select the unit to measure the size from the drop-down list. You
Force interval for

small jobs
Byte(s)
KB
MB
GB
TB
PB
Enter the time to determine how old any image in a group can
become before the batch is submitted as a duplication job. The
default value is 30 minutes.
Hour(s)
Second(s)
Minute(s)
Day(s)
Week(s)
Month(s)
Year(s)
118

Table 3-13
Lifecycle parameters (continued)
Field
Description
Min size per

duplication job
Enter the minimum size up to which the batch of images should

reach before a duplication job is run for the entire batch. The default
value is 8 GB.
Select the unit to measure the size from the drop-down list. You
Replica metadata
cleanup timer
Byte(s)
KB
MB
GB
TB
PB
Enter the number of days after which the Import Manager stops
trying to import the image. The default value is 0 hours.
Hour(s)
Second(s)
Minute(s)
Day(s)
Week(s)
Month(s)
Year(s)
Tape resource
multiplier
Enter the multiplier for the number of concurrently active duplication

jobs that can access a single storage unit. The default value is 2.
Version cleanup
delay
Enter the number of hours to determine how much time must pass
since an inactive version was the active version. The default value
is 14 days.
Hour(s)
Second(s)
Minute(s)
Day(s)
Week(s)
Month(s)
Year(s)
119

Note: The Import Extended Retry Session Timer, Import Session Timer, and
Duplication Session Interval parameters have been removed in Appliance 2.6.
A new parameter named Job Submission Interval has been introduced.
Configuring lifecycle parameters

You can set the lifecycle parameters using the Manage > Host menu in the
NetBackup Appliance Web Console. The Host menu displays the Lifecycle tab.
You can view and change the lifecycle parameters using this tab. The following
procedure describes how to view and update your lifecycle parameters using the
To configure lifecycle parameters
Select Manage > Host > Lifecycle.

The system displays the Lifecycle tab with the default lifecycle parameters. A
description of the lifecycle parameters is available.
See Manage > Host > Lifecycle options on page 116.
Click Save to save the updated parameters.
About configuring deduplication solutions

NetBackup appliance is available with two types of storage solutions. Based on the
type of NetBackup hardware appliance you can choose from the following two types
of deduplication solutions:
Table 3-14
Deduplication solutions and appliance matrix
NetBackup Appliance Series Deduplication solution

applicable
Master Server
Media server
NetBackup Appliance 52xx series Media Server Deduplication Media Server

Option (MSDP)
Deduplication Option
(MSDP)
NetBackup Appliance 5330
Not Applicable
Media Server
Deduplication Option
(MSDP)
120

Adding the deduplication solution to a 5230 media

appliance
You can configure the deduplication solution for your NetBackup Appliance 5230
Series media appliance using the following two pages:
Intial Configuration - You can select the deduplication solution at the time of
initial configuration of your appliance.
Manage > Storage > Resize - If you have not configured a deduplication solution
at the time of initial configuration you can configure it using the Resize option
from the Manage > Storage menu.
See Resizing a partition on page 74.
Manage > Host > Deduplication

You can set the Media Server deduplication parameters using the Manage > Host
> Deduplication menu in the NetBackup Appliance Web Console. The Host page
displays the Deduplication tab. You can view and change the deduplication
parameters using this tab.
Manage > Host > Deduplication describes the deduplication parameters that are
displayed on the Deduplication Settings tab.
Table 3-15
Deduplication parameters
Fields
Description
Log verbosity level
Select the amount of information to be written to the log file.

You can select from the values 0 to 10, with 10 being the
maximum information that can be logged.
Note: Change this value only when directed to do so by a

Veritas representative.
Debug log file maximum
size
Enter the maximum size of the log file in megabytes.
NICs for backup and

restore
Enter the IP address or range of addresses of the local network

Interface Card (NIC) for maintaining backups and restores.
121

Table 3-15
Deduplication parameters (continued)
Fields
Description
Maximum bandwidth
Enter the maximum bandwidth that is allowed when backing

up or restoring data between the media server and the
deduplication pool.
You cannot configure bandwidth throttling using the NetBackup
Appliance Web Console. From the NetBackup Appliance Shell
Menu use the Main_Menu > Settings > Deduplication > Tune
view option to configure OPTDUP_BANDWIDTH . For more
information, refer to the "Settings > Deduplication" topic in the
Compression
Select to compress optimized duplication data. By default, the

files are not compressed.
Encryption
Select the check-box to encrypt the data. By default, files are

not encrypted. When you select the check-box the data is
encrypted during transfer and on the storage.
Maximum image fragment Enter the maximum backup image fragment size in megabytes.
size
Note: Change this value only when directed to do so by a
Veritas representative.
Web services retry count Enter the number of retries that can be attempted in case the
Web service fails out or times out.
Note: This parameter applies to the PureDisk Deduplication

Option only. It does not affect NetBackup deduplication.
Web service call timeout
Enter the parameter to increase or decrease the timeout value

for Web service calls made from NetBackup media servers to
PureDisk storage units.
Note: This parameter applies to the PureDisk Deduplication

Option only. It does not affect NetBackup deduplication.
Use local pd.conf settings Select the check-box to ignore the server settings and use
local pd.conf settings. By default this check-box is not selected.
File segment exceptions
Enter the suffixes for log files. The files with these suffice will
not be segmented.
Configuring deduplication parameters

You can set the deduplication parameters using the Manage > Host menu in the
NetBackup Appliance Web Console. The Host menu displays the Deduplication
122

tab. You can view and change the MSDP parameters using this tab. The following
procedure describes how to view and update your deduplication parameters using
the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
To configure deduplication parameters
Select Manage > Host > Deduplication.

The system displays the Deduplication tab with the default deduplication
parameters.
Enter the MSDP parameters. For more information about these parameters.
See Manage > Host > Deduplication on page 121.
Click Save, to save the updated parameters.
About BMR integration

Bare Metal Restore (BMR) is the Server Recovery option of NetBackup. BMR
automates and streamlines the server recovery process, making it unnecessary to
manually reinstall Operating Systems or configure hardware. With simple commands,
complete server restores can be accomplished in a fraction of the time without
extensive training or tedious administration.
BMR allows the recovery of:
Windows systems to completely different hardware (Dissimilar System Recovery

or DSR)
UNIX/Linux systems to disks of varying geometry (Dissimilar Disk Recovery or

DDR)
See the BMR Administrators Guide for more information.

Note: A NetBackup appliance cannot be used as a BMR boot server. This
convention is unlike NetBackup, where you can use any master server, media
server, or client as a BMR boot server. Your boot server can be any non-appliance
NetBackup platform with the same operating system as the hosts that are to be
recovered.
See Enabling BMR from the NetBackup Appliance Web Console on page 124.
123

Manage > Host > Advanced options

You can now enable Bare Metal Restore (BMR) from Manage > Host > Advanced
in the NetBackup Appliance Web Console when the appliance is configured as a
master server. If you want to disable BMR on the appliance, you must run the
appropriate NetBackup commands. Note that BMR is disabled by default.
The following option appears on Manage > Host > Advanced:
Enable BMR on this Appliance
You can enable BMR by using this option.
See Enabling BMR from the NetBackup Appliance Web Console on page 124.
You cannot enable or disable BMR from the appliance shell menu.
BMR configuration is not required when an appliance is configured as a media
server. The Manage > Host > Advanced tab does not appear when the appliance
is configured in a media server role.
Enabling BMR from the NetBackup Appliance Web Console

You can enable Bare Metal Restore (BMR) from Manage > Hosts > Advanced in
the NetBackup Appliance Web Console when the appliance is configured as a
master server.
If you want to disable BMR on the appliance, you must run the appropriate
NetBackup commands. Note that BMR is disabled by default.
To enable BMR from the NetBackup Appliance Web Console
Log on to the NetBackup Appliance Web Console. Note that the appliance
must be configured as a master server.
Select Manage > Host > Advanced tab.
Check Enable BMR on this appliance to enable BMR on the appliance.
Click Save.
Manage > Host > IPMI options

You can reset the IPMI from the Manage > Host > IPMI tab in the NetBackup
Appliance Web Console. The IPMI must be reset only if the IPMI interface hangs
or stops responding. The IPMI reset operation involves restarting the IPMI.
Refer to the following link for the procedure on how to reset the IPMI.
See Resetting the IPMI on page 125.
124

Note: You can also reset the IPMI from NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu by using
the Support > IPMI Reset command. See the NetBackup Appliance Commands
Guide for more details.
Resetting the IPMI

Use the following procedure to reset the IPMI. The IPMI must be reset only if the
IPMI console hangs or stops responding.
To reset the IPMI
Log on to NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
Go to Manage > Host > IPMI.
Click Reset IPMI.
The following warning appears:

Resetting the IPMI disconnects all current IPMI users. Are you sure you
want to reset the IPMI?
The IPMI is reset. Veritas recommends that you wait for 2 minutes and then
attempt to reconnect to the IPMI console.
In case you cannot access the IPMI console, the appliance must be shut down
and then restarted. Perform the following steps:
Schedule a convenient time for the appliance shutdown and alert all users.
Shut down the appliance.
Disconnect all appliance power cables.
Wait for 15 seconds and then reconnect the cables.
Turn on power to the appliance.

Appliance Restore implies that you want to restore the appliance to a specific state.
That state can be an original factory state or a state that is determined through the
use of checkpoints. Starting with v2.6, you can create a checkpoint, rollback the
appliance to a checkpoint that you choose, or initiate a factory reset.
From this page, you can click one of the following buttons to begin the process that
you want:
Create Appliance Checkpoint
125

Click this icon to create a user-directed checkpoint on your appliance.
Appliance Rollback
Click this icon to roll back the appliance to a checkpoint that you select.
Launch Appliance Factory Reset

Click this icon to reset your appliance to its original default state.
The following list describes the four different types of checkpoints:
A factory reset checkpoint. This checkpoint is created during the installation of

each new appliance.
A pre-upgrade checkpoint is created before you install a software upgrade. You

can use this type of checkpoint as a rollback checkpoint in case a software
upgrade fails.
A post-upgrade checkpoint is created after an appliance has been upgraded to

a new software version.
A user-directed checkpoint is a checkpoint that you create at any point in time

using the application user interface or the appliance shell menu. If an existing
user-directed checkpoint already exists it is replaced by any new checkpoint
that you create.
See About creating an appliance checkpoint on page 126.

See Creating an appliance checkpoint on page 130.
See About appliance rollback on page 136.
See About NetBackup appliance factory reset on page 146.
About creating an appliance checkpoint

You can use checkpoints to save a snapshot of the current state of the appliance
and then use it to Restore your appliance from that point in case of a future failure.
126

Table 3-16 contains the following fields and functions that you use to create a
checkpoint.
127

Table 3-16
Create Appliance Checkpoint page
Field
Description
Existing appliance
restore checkpoints
This field shows all of the current checkpoints that exist. If no

checkpoints exist, the following message appears in the field.
No appliance restore checkpoint currently exists. Create an
appliance checkpoint to revert to the current state of the
appliance.
The following describes each of the checkpoint types.
The following
components of the
appliance will be
included in the
checkpoint:
Pre-upgrade checkpoint
This checkpoint is created before a software upgrade is
performed.
Post-upgrade checkpoint
This checkpoint is created after you have upgraded your
appliance to a newer software version. You may use this
checkpoint if you have a need to roll back your appliance to
correct a failure.
User-directed checkpoint
You are responsible for creating this checkpoint. You can
create a checkpoint at any time. Only one user-directed
checkpoint can exist at any given time. If a user-directed
checkpoint already exists and you create a new checkpoint,
the new checkpoint overwrites the existing checkpoint.
However, before you can create the new checkpoint, a
message appears in the Existing appliance restore
checkpoints field and informs you that if you create a new
user-directed checkpoint, the new checkpoint overwrites any
existing checkpoint.
You can also monitor the status of the checkpoint creation
process from this field.
This field lists all of the components that are included in the
checkpoint. The following list describes these components:
The appliance operating system
The appliance software
The NetBackup software
The network configuration
Any previously applied software updates
Items not included in the checkpoint:

The NetBackup catalog on the master server appliance
is not included.
The backup data is not included.
128

Table 3-16
Create Appliance Checkpoint page (continued)
Field
Description
Create appliance
checkpoint
This field is optional. It enables you to provide a label or

description for the checkpoint. What you enter in this field helps
you identify the new checkpoint.
Action buttons on this

page
Validate
When you click the Validate button you initiate a validation

process that ensures the server is running and in a state to
create a new checkpoint.
A message appears after the validation is run that informs
you whether the validation was successful or not.
If the validation process is successful the following occurs:
The Create button becomes active.
The following message appears:
Checkpoint validation is complete. Click Create to
create the new checkpoint.
If the validation process is not successful the following occurs:
Checkpoint validation was unsuccessful. The
checkpoint cannot be created. Click here for more
information.
You can click a link within the message to view more
information about the error details.
Create
The Create button becomes active after the checkpoint

validation completes successfully. Click Create to begin the
checkpoint process.
When you create this checkpoint, it replaces any current
user-directed checkpoint if one exists.
Cancel
This button cancels the create appliance checkpoint process.

See Checkpoint creation status on page 133.
See Creating an appliance checkpoint from the appliance shell menu on page 134.
See Manage > Appliance Restore on page 125.
129

Creating an appliance checkpoint

You begin the process of creating a user-directed checkpoint from the Create
Appliance Checkpoint page on the NetBackup Appliance Web Console. The first
two fields on this page do not require any input from you. The first field is the
Existing appliance restore checkpoints field. That field displays the checkpoints
that currently exist. The second field shows the components within the appliance
that are included in the checkpoint.
Note: If a user-directed checkpoint already exists, the checkpoint that you are about
to create replaces the existing checkpoint. Only one user-directed checkpoint can
exist at any given time.
To create a new checkpoint from the NetBackup Appliance Web Console
Select Manage > Appliance Restore.
Click Create Appliance Checkpoint.

If any checkpoints already exist, those checkpoint appear on the page. In
addition, if a user-directed checkpoint already exists, the new checkpoint will
replace the old checkpoint.
130

Enter a description in the Create Appliance Checkpoint description field at

the bottom of the page. This description is a way by which you can identify the
new checkpoint.
Click Validate.
A window appears and shows a validation check is in progress. The validate
process ensures that all of the media servers are up and running. A status
message appears on the page letting you know whether the checkpoint
validation is complete and successful. If the validation is successful and you
want to proceed, click Create.
If the checkpoint validation was unsuccessful, a status message appears on

the page letting you know that the checkpoint cannot be created. A link in the
message is provided that you can select to view more information about the
media server that is not operational. You should correct that issue and click
Validate again. Once the validation is successful, click Create.
131

The Create Appliance Checkpoint pop-up appears. If no checkpoint currently

exists and you want to proceed, click Yes. If a user-directed checkpoint already
exists and you want to overwrite that checkpoint, click Yes. Otherwise, click
No.
Note: Once you begin the checkpoint creation process, you cannot perform
any other functions on the NetBackup Appliance Web Console until the
operation completes.
The Create Appliance Checkpoint page refreshes and displays a status of

the checkpoint progress for each media server or server. To see more
information on the status of the checkpoint creation progress, click the Details
link.
After the checkpoint creation completes the Create appliance checkpoint

page displays a status summary that provides the following information:
Host name is the IP address of the appliance or appliances that receive

the checkpoint.
Current NetBackup and appliance software versions installed
Progress of the checkpoint creation.
Status of the checkpoint.
Details of the checkpoint
Click Finish to complete the procedure and return to the Appliance Restore
page.
132


Checkpoint creation status

When you begin the user-directed checkpoint process the checkpoint is created
for the appliance. Each of the systems is listed in the Checkpoint creation status
table. This table provides the following information about each system.
Table 3-17
Checkpoint creation status
Field
Description
Host name
The IP address of the appliance that is about to

receive the new checkpoint.
Current versions
The versions of the NetBackup software and appliance

software that are currently installed on the appliance.
Progress
Displays the percentage of completion for each

appliance.
Status
Displays whether the checkpoint operation completed

successfully or not. A possible status for this field is:
SUCCESS, FAILED, Timed-out.
Details
This field contains a link labeled Details. Click this

link to view more detailed information about the status
of the create checkpoint operation.

133

134
Creating an appliance checkpoint from the appliance shell

menu
Use the following procedure to create a user-directed checkpoint from the appliance
shell menu.
Note: If a user-directed checkpoint already exists, the checkpoint that you are about
to create replaces the existing checkpoint. Only one user-directed checkpoint can
exist at any given time.
To create a new checkpoint from the appliance shell menu
Log on to the appliance as an administrator an open the appliance shell menu.
Enter the following command to

Main_Menu > Support > Checkpoint Create
The following interactive process begins. The shell menu informs you of any
existing checkpoints before you can create a new checkpoint. In the following
example, no existing checkpoints exist.
Creating an Appliance Checkpoint allows the user to easily
rollback the entire system back to a point-in-time to undo any
misconfiguration or system failure that might have occured. An
Appliance Checkpoint captures the following components:
1) Appliance Operating System
2) Appliance Software
3) NetBackup Software
4) Tape media configuration on the master server
5) Networking Configuration
6) LDAP configuration if any exists
7) Fibre channel configuration
8) Any previously applied patches
9) NetBackup catlog on the master server is not
included
10) Backup data is not included
There are no checkpoints in the system. Please continue to create
a user checkpoint
>> Would you like to proceed? (yes/no) yes
Enter Yes to proceed with the creation of the new checkpoint.

Enter a description for your checkpoint. That is an optional field.
Enter Yes to begin the Create checkpoint process.

- [Info] Deleting checkpoint: USER
- [Info] CREATING USER CHECKPOINT
- [Info] Creating checkpoint. This operation can take 10 to
15 minutes.
Please wait...
- [Info] Appliance Checkpoint creation was successful
Note: Once you begin the checkpoint creation process, you are still able to use the
About rollback to a checkpoint

After you have installed a software update or EEB you may determine that you
need to revert back to the previously installed version. This process is referred to
as a Rollback operation and it is installed on your appliance by the update process.
Roll back to an appliance checkpoint restores the system to the checkpoint's
point-in-time image. That version may be a previous General Availability (GA)
version of the software.
When you want to roll back the appliance, you can choose from the following three
types of checkpoints.
This checkpoint is created before a software upgrade is performed.
This checkpoint is created after you have upgraded your appliance to a newer
version. You may use this checkpoint if you have a need to roll back your
appliance to correct a failure.
A checkpoint that you created.
The following is a list of general guidelines to consider when you revert to a

checkpoint:
135

Only valid checkpoints are displayed for you to select.
During a rollback operation you cannot run any user-initiated operations such
as backups, restores, or configuration and maintenance operations.
When you begin a rollback operation from the NetBackup Appliance Web
Console, you cannot perform any other functions on the console until the rollback
operation completes. That is only true when you perform the operation from
theNetBackup Appliance Web Console and not the appliance shell menu.

See About appliance rollback validation on page 138.
See About checkpoint rollback status on page 142.
About appliance rollback

You can roll back your appliance to an existing restore checkpoint using
theNetBackup Appliance Web Console, or the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
This ability enables you to address any mis-configuration or system failure issues
that may have occurred.
To roll back your appliance using the NetBackup Appliance Web Console, open
the Manage > Appliance Restore page and select Rollback Appliance. If no
checkpoints exist, a message stating that no checkpoints exist appears on the page.
You can return to the Manage > Appliance Restore page and select Create
Appliance Checkpoint and create a user-directed checkpoint.
If checkpoints already exist, they are shown in the Rollback Appliance page.
136

Table 3-18 contains the following fields and functions:

Table 3-18
Field
Rollback Appliance page

Description
Select an appliance
This field shows the available checkpoints that you can use
checkpoint, to rollback the to revert your appliance. The available checkpoints can be:
appliance to a specific
checkpoint
A checkpoint that is created before you perform a software
upgrade.
A checkpoint that is created after you have upgraded your
appliance to a newer software version.
A checkpoint that you created.
Select the additional
You can elect to automatically restart the appliances after the
actions to be performed
rollback operation completes.
during the rollback process
137

Table 3-18
Rollback Appliance page (continued)
Field
Description
Version information
If checkpoints exists, you see the table. If no checkpoints

exist, this table is not shown. The table provides the following
information:
Action icons
Host Name
The IP address of the master or media server appliance.
Current versions
The NetBackup and appliance software versions currently
installed before the rollback operation begins.
Versions after rollback
The NetBackup and appliance software versions that are
installed after the rollback operation succeeds.
The Preview icon provides you with the ability to preview the
appliance(s) to ensure that a rollback operation can proceed.
If an appliance is not up and running, a message appears
that identifies the appliance, so that you can make any
necessary adjustments.
The Preview icon cancels the rollback operation.

About appliance rollback validation

This page displays a list of the appliance configuration components that are rolled
back.
Note: During a rollback process, all appliance functions are suspended.
Rolling back to an appliance checkpoint reverts the following components:
The appliance operating system
The appliance software
The NetBackup software
The network configuration
Any previously applied software updates
Items not included in the checkpoint:
138

The NetBackup catalog on the master server appliance is not included.
The backup data is not included.
After you have reviewed the list of actions, click Validate to continue with the rollback
operation.
The Rollback Appliance pop-up window appears. This pop-up informs you that
once you start the rollback process, it is irreversible. Click Yes to proceed with the
rollback operation. Click No to stop the rollback process.
Rollback to an appliance checkpoint from the NetBackup

Appliance Web Console
You can rollback an appliance to a checkpoint that you choose from the NetBackup
Appliance Web Console or the appliance shell menu. The following procedures
describe these procedures.
To roll back to an existing checkpoint from the NetBackup Appliance Web
Console
Select Manage > Appliance Restore.
Click Appliance Rollback.
Select an available checkpoint from the Select an appliance checkpoint to

rollback the appliance to a specific checkpoint list.
The list contains only those checkpoints that exist. At most, there can be three
checkpoints. A pre-upgrade checkpoint, a post-upgrade checkpoint, and a
user-directed checkpoint.
Determine if you want to restart the appliance automatically after the rollback
operation completes. If you do, check the Restart appliance automatically
after rollback check box.
139

Click Preview.
The Rollback Appliance page updates and shows a the components that are
rolled back during the operation. In addition, the appliances that are going to
be rolled back are also displayed on the page.
Click Validate.
The validation check ensures that all media servers are up and running. If all
media servers are running, click Start to roll back to the selected checkpoint.
If the checkpoint validation was unsuccessful, you are not able to start the
rollback operation. A link is provided that you can select to view more
information about the cause of the issue. You can then, correct that issue, and
click Validate. If the validation is successful, click Start.
140

The Rollback Appliance pop-up appears. This pop-up informs you that once
you start the rollback process, it is irreversible. Click Yes to proceed with the
rollback operation. Click No to stop the rollback process.
Note: Once you begin the rollback process, you cannot perform any other
functions on the NetBackup Appliance Web Console until the operation
completes.
The Rollback Appliance status page appears so you can monitor the success
of the rollback operation for the appliance.
After the rollback operation completes the compute appliance must be restarted:
If you chose to automatically restart the appliance after the rollback

completes, a Restart in progress... pop-up appears. This pop-up window
reminds you that the network was reset and connectivity was lost during
the Restore process. You must use the remote management port to
reconfigure the network settings and reconnect to the NetBackup Appliance
Web Console.
If you did not choose to automatically restart the appliance after the rollback
completes, a Restart Now! window appears. This window prompts you to
restart each of the servers that were selected to be rolled back. Click OK
to restart the appliance to complete the rollback operation.
See Rollback to an appliance checkpoint from the appliance shell menu

on page 142.
141

About checkpoint rollback status

When you begin the checkpoint Rollback process each system is rolled back at the
same time to ensure that all systems are at the same software version level. Each
of the systems is listed in the Checkpoint Rollback status table. This table provides
the following information about each system.
Table 3-19
Checkpoint Rollback status
Field
Description
Host name
The IP address of the appliances that are about to be

rolled back.
Current versions
The version NetBackup software that is currently

installed on the appliance.
Verison after rollback
The version of appliance software that is installed on

the appliance after the rollback is complete.
Progress
Displays the percentage of completion for each

appliance.
State

successfully or not. Possible status for this field:
Success, Failed, Completed, Timed-out.
Details
This field contains a link labeled Details. Click this link

to view more detailed information about the status of
the appliance rollback operation.
This page also displays the steps of the revert process once a rollback has been
started. The field titled, Following steps will be performed, shows the appliance
name(s) that must be rolled back to a checkpoint and then restarted.
Rollback to an appliance checkpoint from the appliance

shell menu
The following procedure describes how to roll back an appliance to a checkpoint
from the appliance shell menu.
142

143
To roll back to an existing checkpoint from the appliance shell menu
Log on to the appliance as an administrator and open the appliance shell menu.
Enter the following command:

Main_Menu > Support > Checkpoint Rollback
The following interactive process begins. The shell menu informs you of the
components that are reverted during this process. It also lists all of the existing
checkpoints.
Rolling back to an Appliance Checkpoint will restore the
system back to the checkpoint's point-in-time. This can help
undo any misconfiguration or system failures that might have
occured.
Rolling back to an Appliance Checkpoint will revert the following
components:
4) Networking Configuration
5) Any previously applied patches
6) Backup data is not reverted
The existing Appliance Checkpoints in the system are:
-----------------------------------------------------------(1) Checkpoint Name: User directed checkpoint
Date Created: Fri Oct 5 09:27:32 2012
Description: User checkpoint after configuring network
-----------------------------------------------------------Please enter the checkpoint to rollback to (Available
options: 1 only):
Enter the number of the checkpoint that you want to use for the Rollback
operation.

144
Enter Yes, if you want to automatically restart all appliances after the rollback
completes.
A reboot of the appliance is required to complete the
checkpoint rollback. Reboot automatically after rollback (yes/no)?
Automatically rebooting the appliance after the rollback will not
provide you with an opportunity to review the progress/final
status of the rollback. Are you sure you would like to automatically
reboot the appliance (yes/no) yes

145
Enter Yes a second time to confirm that you want to restart the appliance
automatically after the rollback operation completes.
---------------------------ROLLBACK OPTIONS AND SUMMARY
---------------------------Rollback to checkpoint name : [User directed checkpoint]
Auto reboot after rollback? : [YES]
The rollback reverts the entire system to the following versions:
+------------------------------------------------------+
|
Appliance
| Current Version | Reverted Version |
|-----------------+-----------------+------------------|
|app1.Veritas.com|NetBackup 7.6
|NetBackup 7.6
|
|
|Appliance 2.6
|Appliance 2.6
|
|-----------------+-----------------+------------------|
|app2.Veritas.com|NetBackup 7.6
|NetBackup 7.6
|
|
|Appliance 2.6
|Appliance 2.6
|
+------------------------------------------------------+
Enter Yes to begin the rollback to a checkpoint operation.

The following status is provided once the rollback operation is started.
Rollback
- [Info]
- [Info]
- [Info]
- [Info]
to checkpoint? (yes/no) yes

Stopping NetBackup Services...please wait.
PERFORMING REVERT TO USER CHECKPOINT
This takes approx. 15 to 20 mins. Please wait...
Rollback to Appliance Checkpoint (User directed
checkpoint) successful.
A reboot of the appliance is required to complete the

checkpoint rollback. Reboot now? (Type REBOOT to continue) REBOOT
Rebooting the appliance now...
- [Info] Rebooting app2.Veritas.com
Please reconnect to the appliance shell menu to continue
using this appliance.
The system is going down for reboot NOW!


About NetBackup appliance factory reset

The purpose of an appliance factory reset is to return your appliance to a clean,
unconfigured, and factory state. By default, a factory reset discards all storage
configuration and backup data. However, before you initiate the factory reset, you
can elect to retain the storage configuration, network configuration and backup data
if any currently exists. In addition, you can elect to restart the appliance after the
reset completes.
The purpose of an appliance factory reset is to return your appliance to a clean,
unconfigured, and factory state. By default, a factory reset discards all storage
configuration and backup data. However, before you initiate the factory reset, you
can elect to retain the storage configuration, network configuration and backup data
if any currently exists. In addition, you can elect to restart the appliance after the
reset completes.
Note: If you run a factory reset of the appliance, note the following:
A factory reset disables WAN optimization for all network interface bonds if you
retain your network configuration (Manage > Appliance Restore > Retain network
configuration). After the factory reset completes, you can then enable WAN
optimization again for the network interface bonds.
If you do not retain your network configuration, all network interface bonds are lost
during the factory reset. After the reset completes, the appliance automatically
enables WAN optimization for all network interface ports, including those that
comprised the bonds.
From the Manage > Appliance Restore page on the NetBackup Appliance Web
Console you can click Launch Appliance Factory Reset to begin the reset process.
Record your network configuration information before you begin a factory reset.
After the reset operation completes the appliance is restarted, either automatically
or manually. You may need the configuration information to log into the appliance.
146

The field, Select the additional actions to be performed during the factory reset
process contains the following:
Retain storage configuration and backup data

Select this option to save your storage configuration and all backup data on the
storage partitions and any connected expansion units.
If you do not select this option, the following occurs:
All the images on the AdvancedDisk and deduplication storage pools are
removed.
All backup data on the storage partitions and any connected expansion units
are reset.
Retain network configuration

Select this option if you want to retain the network configuration of the appliance.
If you do not select this option, all network configuration settings will be reset.
Restart host(s) automatically after reset

Select this option if you want to have the appliance restarted automatically after
the factory reset completes.
Table 3-20 describes the remaining fields that are contained in the Appliance
Factory Reset page.
147

Table 3-20
Appliance factory reset features
Fields
Description
A factory reset operation

resets the entire system, that
includes the following
actions
This part of the Appliance Factory Reset displays all of

the areas of your appliance that are reset once you start
the factory reset operation.
Action buttons
Versions information
A factory reset operation resets the entire system, which

includes resetting the following:
Appliance operating system
Appliance software
NetBackup software
Tape media configuration on the master server
Networking configuration (optionally retain)
Storage configuration and backup data (optionally retain)
The following action buttons are available at the bottom of

this page:
Start - Begin the factory reset operation.
Cancel - resets the current page.
This field appears after you have clicked Validate. It

provides you with the following information:
Current Versions - This field displays the NetBackup

and appliance software versions that are currently
installed on each appliance.
Versions after reset - This field displays the NetBackup
and appliance software versions that are installed after
the factory reset operation completes successfully.
Note: Image imports after a factory reset, reimage, or during data migration from
one master server to another may span from several hours to multiple days to
complete depending on the size and number of the images to be imported.
See Starting a factory reset from the NetBackup Appliance Web Console
on page 150.
See About factory reset status on page 153.
About factory reset best practices

This topic contains best-practice information about factory reset operations.
148

Factory Reset operations are not supported if a 52xx master server or media
server has been upgraded to version 2.6.0.1 or later. Factory Reset is only
supported after a clean installation of version 2.6.0.1 or later on a 52xx appliance,
or if a 52xx appliance is reimaged to version 2.6.0.1 or later
When performing a factory reset to a previous software version it is

recommended to also reset the storage. The storage will be inaccessible after
you perform a factory reset to a previous version on the appliance.
If you perform a factory reset without resetting the storage, you need to apply
a patch to update your appliance to the version it was at before you performed
the factory reset. You must apply the patch before performing any other
operations on the Appliance.
If you choose the Storage Reset option during a factory reset, the data or storage
may not be deleted. This situation happens if one or more partitions are in use
or some processes continue to access the partition. To remove the storage in
this scenario, run the Support > Storage Reset command after performing a
factory reset.
The following is an example of an error message that is displayed when storage
is not reset:
- [Error] Failed to unmount the 'Configuration' partition '0'
because the partition is currently in use. Restarting the appliance
and retrying the operation may help to resolve the issue. Contact
Veritas Technical Support if the issue persists.
Note: The Storage Reset command is only available when the appliance is in
a factory state.
If you remove attached storage disks before performing a factory reset, you
need to clear the preserved cache of the RAID controller.
See "Discard RAID preserved cache after performing a factory reset" in the
NetBackup Appliance Troubleshooting Guide for more information.
If you remove a storage unit shelf during a factory reset, the factory reset
operation can fail. Veritas recommends that you leave all storage unit shelves
attached during a factory reset.
Make sure to stop all running backup, duplication, or restore jobs before
performing a Factory Reset. NetBackup storage objects, storage units, disk
pools, and storage servers on the master server that belong to the media server
appliance are not cleaned up if a Factory Reset operation is performed while
backup, duplication or restore jobs are still in progress.
149

Starting a factory reset from the NetBackup Appliance

Web Console
The following procedure describes how to start a factory reset operation from the
Note: Factory reset operations are not supported if a 52xx master server or media
server has been upgraded to version 2.6.0.1. Factory reset is only supported after
a clean installation of version 2.6.0.1 on a 52xx appliance, or if a 52xx appliance is
reimaged to version 2.6.0.1.
Note: A factory reset operation returns the password to the original, default value.
To begin a factory reset from the NetBackup Appliance Web Console
Open the Manage > Appliance Restore page.
Click Launch Appliance Factory Reset.
Determine if you want to retain the storage configuration and backup data. If
you do, check the Retain storage configuration and backup data check box.
Determine if you want to retain the network configuration. If you do, check the
Retain network configuration check box.
Determine if you want to restart host(s) automatically after the reset completes.
If you do, check the Restart Host(s) automatically after reset check box.
Click Validate.
After you click Validate a pop-up appears to remind you that the validation is
in process.
150

The following results can occur from the validation operation:
If the validation process completes successfully, a validation complete

message appears and you can proceed to Step 6.
Click Start.
An Appliance Factory Reset pop-up window appears. This window informs

you that the factory reset operation is irreversible once it is started.
Click Yes to start the factory reset.

Note: Once you begin the factory reset, you cannot perform any other
functions on the NetBackup Appliance Web Console until the operation
completes.
Click No to stop the process of performing a factory reset and return the
previous page.
After you click Yes, the Appliance Factory Reset refreshes and displays
status summary information. This page shows the progress of the factory reset
operation for the appliance. This page shows the following information:
The name of the appliance to be reset.
The current version of software that is installed on the appliance before the
reset begins.
The software version that is installed after the reset completes.
A progress bar that displays a percentage of completion.
The Details link in the Status Summary page enables you to view the details
of the factory reset for the host that corresponds to the link that you selected.
151

After the reset operation completes, the storage reset operation begins if you
did not elect to retain your storage configuration and backup data at the
beginning of this procedure.
A storage reset message appears.
Click on the word here to view the details of the storage reset operation.
After the storage reset operation completes the appliance must be restarted:
If you chose to automatically restart the appliance after the reset completes,
a Restart in progress... pop-up appears. The contents of that pop-up
reminds you that the network was reset and connectivity was lost during
the reset process. You must use the remote management remote
management port to reconfigure the network settings and reconnect to the
If you did not choose to automatically restart the appliance after the reset
completes, a Restart Now! window appears. This window prompts you to
152

restart the appliance. Click OK to restart the appliance to complete the

factory reset operation.
You must use the remote management port to reconfigure the network settings
and reconnect to the NetBackup Appliance Web Console. Perform the following
steps:
When the appliance restarts and you see the keyboard prompts at the top
of the screen, Hit the F2 function key on the keyboard.
Use the left arrow and the right arrow on your keyboard to navigate to the
Server Management menu.
Use the up and down arrows on your keyboard to navigate to the Baseboard
LAN configuration section.
Select the RMM4 LAN Configuration section.
Enter the network configuration information, such as the IP source [Static],

IP, Subnet mask, and Gateway IP addresses.
You can now connect to the appliance NetBackup Appliance Web Console.

See Starting a factory reset from the appliance shell menu on page 154.
About factory reset status

This page displays the status of your factory reset operation. The table on this page
provides the following information:
Table 3-21
Field name
Description
Host name
Name of the appliance that is about to be reset.
Current version
The version NetBackup software that is currently installed

on the appliance.
Version after reset
The version of appliance software that is installed on the

appliance after the reset is complete.
Progress
Displays the percentage of completion for each appliance.
Status

successfully or not. A possible status for this field is:
Active, Failed, Success, Timed-out.
153

Table 3-21
(continued)
Field name
Description
Details
This field contains a link labeled Details. Click this link

to view more detailed information about the status of the
create checkpoint operation.

Starting a factory reset from the appliance shell menu

The following procedure describes how to start a factory reset operation from the
appliance shell menu.
Note: A factory reset operation returns the password to the original, default value.
Note: Image imports during a Factory Reset, reimage or moving data from one
master server to another may take a considerable amount of time on the NetBackup
5330 Appliance. This is due to the underlying storage layout in the 5330 hardware.
154

To begin a factory reset from the appliance shell menu
Log on to the appliance as an administrator an open the appliance shell menu.
155

Enter Main_Menu > Support > FactoryReset. This command shows the
following messages and requires you to answer the following questions before
the factory reset begins.
Appliance factory reset will reset the entire system to the

factory installed image. The appliance will have the following components
reset to the factory restored settings/image:
4) Tape media configuration on the master server
5) Networking configuration (optionally retain)
6) Storage configuration and backup data (optionally retain)
7) Fibre Transport Deduplication target port configuration
- [Info] Running factory reset validation...please wait (approx 2 mins)
- [Info] Factory reset validation successful.
RESET NETWORK CONFIGURATION [Optional]
-- Resets the IP and routing configuration.
-- Resets the DNS configuration.
>> Do you want to reset the network configuration? [yes/no] (yes) no
RESET STORAGE CONFIGURATION and BACKUP DATA [Optional]
-- Removes all the images on the AdvancedDisk, MSDP, and Share partitions.
-- Resets the storage partitions.
-- Resets storage expansion units, if any.
- [Warning] Performing a factory reset interrupts all share activity and
removes and resets all share data.
Unmount all the shares on clients before continuing with this operation.
- [Info] Performing a factory reset removes the current Fibre Transport
Deduplication target port configuration.
>> Do you want to delete images and reset backup data? [yes/no] (yes) yes
>> Resetting the storage configuration will remove all backup data on the
storage partitions and any connected expansion units. This is not reversible.
Are you sure you want to reset storage configuration? [yes/no] (yes) yes
>> A reboot of the appliance is required to complete the factory reset.
Reboot automatically after reset? [yes/no] (no) yes
>> Automatically rebooting after the reset will not provide you with an opportunity
to review the progress/final status of the reset. Are you sure you would like to
automatically reboot? [yes/no] (no) yes
156

After you respond to these questions, the Factory Reset Summary is shown.
The following is an example of the summary:
FACTORY RESET SUMMARY

--------------------Reset Appliance OS, software configuration
:
Reset Appliance network configuration
:
Reset Appliance storage configuration (REMOVE DATA) :
Auto reboot after reset?
:
[YES]
[NO]
[YES]
[YES]
Appliance will make the following version changes:

+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
Appliance
| Current Version
| Reverted Version |
|-----------------------------------+--------------------+--------------------|
|appl1
|NetBackup 7.7.3
|NetBackup 7.7.3
|
|
|Appliance 2.7.3
|Appliance 2.7.3
|
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
The following warning appears. If you want to begin the factory reset operation,
enter Yes.
WARNING: An appliance factory reset cannot be reversed!
Continue with factory reset?? (yes/no) yes
The factory reset continues and info messages are shown.
You must use the remote management remote management port to reconfigure
the network settings and reconnect to the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
Perform the following steps:
When the appliance restarts and you see the keyboard prompts at the top
of the screen, Hit the F2 function key on the keyboard.
Use the left arrow and the right arrow on your keyboard to navigate to the
Server Management menu.
Use the up and down arrows on your keyboard to navigate to the Baseboard
LAN configuration section.
Select the RMM4 LAN Configuration section.
Enter the network configuration information, such as the IP source [Static],

IP, Subnet mask, and Gateway IP addresses.
You can now connect to the appliance NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
157

Manage > License
See Starting a factory reset from the NetBackup Appliance Web Console
on page 150.
Manage > License

You can review, add, and delete license keys for your appliance through the
NetBackup Appliance Web Console using the Manage > License page.
The following describes the license key information that is displayed on the Manage
> License page:
License Key table
Feature Details table
Key
Shows all of the installed license keys.
Type
Describes the license type.
Expiry Date
Indicates when the license expires.
Feature ID
Identifies the feature number that is associated with the
selected license key.
Feature Name
Identifies the feature name that is associated with the
selected license key.
See Managing license keys on the NetBackup appliance on page 158.

See Adding a permanent license key if an evaluation license key expires
on page 160.
Managing license keys on the NetBackup appliance

The following procedures describe how to view, add, and delete NetBackup option
license keys through the appliance user interface or the NetBackup Appliance Shell
Menu
158

Manage > License
159
To add license keys through the NetBackup Appliance Web Console
Click Manage > License

All installed license keys, associated feature IDs, and associated feature names
are displayed.
To add new license keys, do the following:
Click Add. The following warning message is displayed:

This operation restarts NetBackup processes after the
licenses have been added successfully. The NetBackup domain does not
run any job during this time. Are you sure you want to proceed?
Click Yes.
In the Add License Key dialog box, enter the license key in the Key field
for the selected server.
Click OK.
To delete a license key through the NetBackup Appliance Web Console
Click Manage > License.

All installed license keys, associated feature IDs, and associated feature names
are displayed.
In the Key column, select the license keys that you want to delete by selecting
the check box next to the license key number.
Click Delete.
The following message is displayed:
Deleting the selected license(s) will disable related
features in NetBackup. This operation restarts NetBackup processes
after the licenses have been deleted successfully. The NetBackup domain
does not run any job during this time. Are you sure you want to proceed?
Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
To view, add, and delete license keys through the NetBackup Appliance Shell
Menu
To view a list of all installed license keys or view the details of each key, enter
one of the following commands:
Main_Menu > Manage > License > List

Manage > License
A complete list of installed license keys appears.
Main_Menu > Manage > License > ListInfo
The associated feature IDs and feature names appear.
To add license keys, do the following:
Enter Main_Menu > Manage > License > Add.
Enter the license key for the option that you want to install. Then press
Enter.
To add another license key, press y.
Repeat the previous step or press n to exit.
To delete license keys, do the following:
Enter Main_Menu > Manage > License > Remove.
Enter the license key for the option that you want to remove. Then press
Enter.
To remove another license key, press y.
Repeat the previous step or press n to exit.
Adding a permanent license key if an evaluation license key expires

If your evaluation license key expires, you may encounter problems if you need to
install or configure your appliance. You can avoid future issues if you add a
permanent license key before the evaluation key expires.
The following list identifies some symptoms that you may encounter if the evaluation
key has expired and if you have not added a permanent key:
A fully configured NetBackup appliance stops working.
A new installation of this release using a USB drive may appear to hang when
you configure NetBackup.
An attempt to run a factory reset fails.
You are unable to complete an initial configuration of a preinstalled, NetBackup

appliance.
Unable to upgrade from a previous version to this version of the appliance.
You may even observe the following issues with a preinstalled NetBackup
appliance that does not have permanent keys installed.
System self-test fails.
Backup and restore jobs fail.
160

The user interface does not load.
A forced, factory reset appears to hang while configuring NetBackup.
To install a permanent license key on a preinstalled NetBackup appliance

with an expired evaluation key
Log on to NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu. Use admin as the user name and
P@ssw0rd as the password.
Enter Main_Menu > Manage > License > Add.
Enter yes when prompted to continue.
Enter a valid evaluation or production NetBackup license key when prompted

for a NetBackup license key.
Enter n when prompted to add an additional license key.
Stop the NetBackup processes.

Main_Menu > Support > Processes > NetBackup Stop
Start NetBackup processes.

Main_Menu > Support > Processes > NetBackup Start
See Manage > License on page 158.

See Managing license keys on the NetBackup appliance on page 158.

The Migration Utility lets you move copies of backup images from the source disk
pool to the destination disk pool. It enables you to:
Migrate (copy) images from source storage to destination storage to seed the
destination storage client backup history
Convert policies so new backups go to the new destination storage
Accomplish this without impacting existing backup schedules
Eventually decommission or repurpose the source storage
For v2.6.x the Migration Utility feature is applicable with the following conditions:
Images available for migration are the latest complete backup picture for a
specific policy/client pair. Which means that it is the last FULL backup for the
specific policy/client
For policy types which do not follow the FULL backup convention, other images
are included in the migration. The Migration Utility tries to include everything
required to represent the latest complete backup picture.
161

The latest complete backup picture only includes complete images and images
which are storage lifecycle complete.
The migration is not performed using Fibre Channel, this is because data transfer
between the following is not supported for v2.6.x:
From NetBackup PureDisk to a Media Server Deduplication Pool (MSDP)

through a Fibre Channel cable
From an MSDP to another MSDP through a Fibre Channel cable
Note: You must make sure that you have the proper credentials to schedule and
complete a migration job. To ensure that you have the proper credentials, go to the
Media and Device Management > Credentials > Storage Servers > Media
Servers window in the NetBackup Administration Console. Ensure that the check
boxes next to the media servers to be used for your migration job have been
selected. Only when these selections have been made can you perform a migration
job.
The following diagram provides a brief overview of the Migration Utility feature:
162

How does the Migration Utility work?

1. From the Selection Criteria screen, identify the following, and click Apply Search:
0
Source disk pool
Destination disk pool
min
20
Duration
2. Using the selections from step 1. Migration Utility identifies the policy/client backup picture
candidates. This allows migration to place limits on the amount of NetBackup catalog data to
be searched.
Source disk pool

Duration
Migration
Policies
3. From the Selection Criteria screen, select the migration Policies and schedule the migration :
Migration
Policies
4. The backup picture (and deduplication history) is transferred using the selected policy.
Source disk pool
Latest complete
backup picture
5. From the Migration Job Status screen monitor the Migration and optional policy conversion
results. The utility monitors, estimates, and displays the transfer time. You can refine the
estimates by identifying how much data can be migrated within the specified migration window
duration.
163

The utility provides the ability to automate the migration jobs by letting you schedule
when the migrations run. The utility also tracks the images that have been migrated.
Multiple migrations can be scheduled so that they do not interfere with normal
backups and duplications.
When you click Manage > Migration Utility, the following tabs appear:
Selection Criteria
Use this tab to select the start time, the migration window (duration), the source
disk pool where the current backup images reside, and the destination (target)
disk pool where you want the images migrated.
When you click Apply Search Criteria, the tab is refreshed with a list of all the
files on the source disk pool that match the search criteria.
Policy Conversion
Use this tab to change the policy that you want to use for the backups that are
now targeted for the destination disk pool.
Once an image has been migrated to the destination disk pool, select the policy
name and the policy type on this tab so that backups and duplications for that
image are targeted for the destination disk pool.
Migration Job Status

Use this tab to view the status and the result of all the scheduled migration jobs.
The most recent job appears at the top of the list.
See Selection Criteria on page 164.

See Selecting the search criteria and scheduling the migration job on page 167.
See Policy Conversion on page 171.
See Setting-up a policy conversion map on page 173.
See Migration Job Status on page 168.
See Viewing migration job status and details on page 171.
See Best practices to run a migration job on page 174.
Selection Criteria
When you navigate to Manage > Migration page, the appliance displays the
Selection Criteria tab. You can use this tab to perform the following tasks:
Apply the search criteria by selecting the appropriate source disk pool, destination
disk pool, and policy types
View the estimated transfer time to run the migration job
Schedule the migration job
164

The Selection Criteria page is divided into two sections:
The first section enables you to apply the search criteria.
The second section displays the estimates for running a migration job based on
the selected parameters. Based on the estimates you can select the policy to
run the migration job.
The Table 3-22 describes the information to be provided in the selection criteria.
The default settings are most policy types, all policy names, and 60-minute migration
time window.
Table 3-22
Selection Criteria for a migration
Search criteria
Description
Source disk pool
Select the appropriate disk pool, from the drop-down list,

where the original backup images reside. The source can
be any recognized and connected disk pool.
Note: You can use the Policy Conversion tab to add

a new source disk pool.
Select the appropriate disk pool, from the drop-down list,

where you want the migrated (copied) backup images to
reside. The destination can be any recognized Veritas
provided disk pool.
Note: You can use the Policy Conversion tab to add

a new source disk pool.
Policy type
Click on the check-box to select the policy type form the

list of policies displayed. The policies to be migrated are
searched based on this selection. For example, if you
select the policy type as Standard, all the policies that
belong to this type are displayed.
You can use the Select All and Clear All links to select
or remove the selection of all the policies at the same
time.
Policy name
If you know the name of the policy to be migrated, enter

the name of that policy. To perform an advanced search,
use the * and ? characters as follows:
Enter *policy to search for policy names that end with

the word "policy".
Enter policy??? to search for policy names that begin
with the word "policy" and include the next three
characters in the name.
165

Selection Criteria for a migration (continued)
Table 3-22
Search criteria
Description
Duration of migration window
Enter the expected time duration to run the migration job

that allows migration to place limits on the amount of
NetBackup catalog data which must be searched. This
duration helps you to minimize the effect on NetBackup
and avoid returning unwanted information. Searching for
images to migrate is a time consuming process, therefore
the search process is bounded by the Migration Window
Duration.
Apply search criteria
Click to search for the policies that match the selection

criteria.
The migration utility begins searching for images matching the criteria. Based on
the size of the image(s), destination's transfer rate, and the transfer time the policys
images are added to the Possible Selections section. You can use this retrieved
information to run the migration job. The Table 3-23 describes the Possible
Selections section:
Note: Images that are not SLP (Storage Lifecycle Policy) complete are not copied,
therefore these images are not included in the Possible Selections section.
Table 3-23
Column
heading
Possible Selections
Description
Estimated Based on the policy name selected this bar graph is update to display the
time to
estimated utilization of the migration window. The bar graph is uses percentages
run the
and minutes to depict the estimated utilization of the migration windows.
migration
job
(minutes)
Policy
Displays a check box and the name of the policies retrieved based on the
search criteria. Select the check-box next to the policy you want to migrate.
The bar graph is updated according to the policy selected.
Estimated Displays the estimated time to transfer the data when you run the migration
transfer
job.
time
Size
Displays the estimated size of the data that will be transferred when you run
the migration job.
166

Possible Selections (continued)
Table 3-23
Column
heading
Description
Policy
Type
Displays the policy type of the policies retrieved based on the search criteria.
Number of Displays the number of clients in the first row, followed by the client names in
clients/Client the remaining rows.
names
Image
Date
Displays the date on which the data was last backed up for the corresponding
client name.
Schedule
Migration
After you have evaluated the possible selections, use the following radio buttons
to schedule the migration job:
Start Immediately to run the migration job at the current time.
Schedule Migration to enter the run the migration job based on the specified
time.
You can now navigate to the following tabs:
Schedule migration
The migration job is scheduled and you can view the status of the migration job
when you click the Migration Job Status tab.
Policy Conversion tab.

Click this tab to change the policy that you want to use for the backups that are
now targeted for the destination disk pool.
See Selecting the search criteria and scheduling the migration job on page 167.
See About the Migration Utility on page 161.
Selecting the search criteria and scheduling the migration

job
This section provides the procedure to select the search criteria using the Manage
> Migration Utility > Selection Criteria tab.
167

To select the search criteria and schedule a migration job:
Click Manage > Migration Utility > Selection Criteria.

The appliance displays the Selection Criteria tab.
Enter the selection criteria in the provided fields. A description of the selection
criteria is available at Selection Criteria.
Click Apply Search Criteria, to set the search criteria for scheduling a migration
job.
Based on the search criteria, the appliance displays the available migration
policies and the estimated time to migrated the backed up data using these
policies. A description of the possible selections is available at Selection Criteria.
Select one or more policies whose image(s) for the listed client(s) should be
copied from the source storage to the destination storage.
Based on policy name selected the Estimated time to run the migration job
(minutes) bar graph is update to display the estimated utilization of the
migration window.
To run the migration job you can select from the following two approaches:
Click Start Immediately to run the migration job at the current time.
Or
Enter the start time and click Schedule Migration.
Click Migrate to run the migration job.
The appliance runs the migration job. You can view the details of the migration job
using the Migration Job Status tab.
Migration Job Status

The Migration Job Status tab provides a convenient way to coordinate migration
jobs, to cancel jobs, to review rolled up migration results, and reports status. This
tab lets you view the status and the result of all the scheduled migration jobs. The
most recent job appears at the top of the list. Only a single job can be QUEUED or
RUNNING at any time
Table 3-24 describes the status and the result conditions that are reported.
168

Table 3-24
Migration job reports
Report
Description
Migration Job Id
Displays the Id of the executed migration jobs.
Status
Displays the current status of the migration job.
QUEUED
The migration job is scheduled in the job queue and is
waiting to start.
Only one job can be queued at any one time. You can
choose to cancel a migration job with this status.
RUNNING
The migration job is currently in progress.
Only one job can be run at any one time. You can choose
to cancel a migration job with this status.
COMPLETE
The migration job has completed and a new migration
can be started.
CANCELED
The migration job that had a QUEUED or a RUNNING
status was canceled.
CANCEL_IN_PROGRESS
A very short lived status used to coordinate cancel.
POST_PROCESSING
The data transfer is complete and the utility is wrapping
up the results.
Start Time
Displays the time when the migration job was executed.
Planned Duration (min)
Displays the planned duration, in minutes, estimated for

executing the migration job.
Actual Duration (min)
Displays the actual duration, in minutes, taken to execute

the migration job.
Images Copied
Displays the total number of backup images that have been

copied during migration.
169

Table 3-24
Migration job reports (continued)
Report
Description
Outcome
Displays the final outcome of how the migration job was

executed.
SUCCESS
The migration job has completed successfully with no
errors. That is N of N images were successfully copied.
To see a list of the job details, click on the associated
link for that job.
SUCCESS*
The migration job has completed successfully with no
errors. That is N of N images were successfully copied.
The * next to the outcome signifies that you should
examine the job details.
link for that job.
PARTIAL
The migration job is either in progress or it was not able
to migrate all of the files in the job. That is a subset of N
images were successfully copied.
link for that job.
FAILED
The migration job was not able to migrate any of the files
in the job. That is zero images were successfully copied.
link for that job.
Job Details
Displays the Details link. Click to view the log of the migration
job executed. It displays the NetBackup image copy details
and the migration transfer rate information
Cancel Job
This button can be used to cancel a migration job that is

currently being executed.
See Viewing migration job status and details on page 171.

170

Viewing migration job status and details

This section provides the procedure to view the details of the migration job and to
cancel a migration job, using the Manage > Migration Utility > Migration Job
Status tab.
To view the details of the migration job:
Click Manage > Migration Utility > Migration Job Status.

The appliance displays the Migration Job Status tab. It lists all the migration
jobs executed using the Selection Criteria tab.
Click on the Details link to view the details of how the migration job was
executed.
The appliance displays the details of the migration job.
The following procedure describes how to cancel a migration job.

To cancel a migration job:
Click Manage > Migration Utility > Migration Job Status.

The appliance displays the Migration Job Status tab. It lists all the migration
jobs executed using the Selection Criteria tab.
Select the check box next to the migration job you want to cancel.
Note: You can cancel only those jobs with the status as Scheduled or In
progress.
Click Cancel.
The Cancel operation is recorded in the job details of the migration job.

Policy Conversion
The Policy Conversion tab is an important operation, however, it is an optional
operation. That is why the default landing page for the migration utility is the
Selection Criteria tab. The Policy Conversion tab enables you to perform the
following tasks:
171

Add new source and destination disk pools by mapping them to your existing
source disk pools and destination disk pools.
Updates the NetBackup policies over to using the new destination storage for
backups, post successful migration.
Policy conversion is configured by a policy conversion map. Each source storage

has its own unique map.
The Policy Conversion tab includes two sections:
Select Policy Conversion map
Policy Conversion map details
Table 3-25 describes the information you must enter to Select Policy Conversion
map section.
Table 3-25
Fields and
buttons
Select Policy Conversion map fields and buttons

Description
Source
Select a policy conversion map from the drop-down list. There is a policy
Storage / Map conversion map for every possible source storage in the NetBackup domain.
name
Load and
Activate map
Click to load the current map for the selected source storage.
The Policy Conversion map details is split in two columns Storage Lifecycle
Policies and Storage Units. When you visit the Policy Conversion tab for the
first no map exists, so the utility locates all Storage Lifecycle Policies (SLPs) and
Storage Units (STUs) that reference the given source disk pool and displays them
in the respective columns. Table 3-26 describes the information you must enter to
change the source disk pools and the destination disk pools.
Table 3-26
Policy Conversion map details data entry fields and options
Field
Description
Storage Lifecycle Policies (SLP) Current
Select the current SLP, to be mapped, that

references to the given source disk pool.
Storage Lifecycle Policies (SLP) - New
Enter the name of the new SLP to be mapped

to the current SLP.
Storage Units (STU) - Current
Select the current STU, to be mapped, that

references to the given source disk pool.
172

Table 3-26
Policy Conversion map details data entry fields and options

(continued)
Field
Description
Storage Units (STU) - New
Enter the name of the new STU to be mapped

to the current STU.
Comit new map
Click to save and active the mapping. If SLPs

or STUs are added, removed, or modified in
NetBackup, the Current columns are
automatically modified to match the latest
system state. If SLPs or STUs are added,
removed, or modified in NetBackup, the Storage
Lifecycle Policies (SLP) - Current and
Storage Lifecycle Policies (SLP) - New
columns are automatically modified to match
the latest system state.
See Setting-up a policy conversion map on page 173.

Setting-up a policy conversion map

This section provides the procedure to set up a policy conversion map. In your
migration policies, you add new source and destination disk pools by mapping them
to your existing source disk pools and destination disk pools. The migration utility
updates the policy such that new backups use the new destination storage in place
of the old source storage.
To set up a policy conversion map:
Click Manage > Migration Utility > Policy Conversion.

The appliance displays the Policy Conversion tab.
Select a policy conversion map from the Source Storage / Map name the
drop-down list.
173

Click Load and Activate map.

When you visit the Policy Conversion tab for the first time no map exists, so
the utility locates all Storage Lifecycle Policies (SLPs) and Storage Units (STUs)
that reference the given source disk pool and displays them in the respective
columns.
From the Policy Conversion map details section, select the current SLP, to
be mapped, that references to the given source disk pool in the Storage
Lifecycle Policies (SLP) - Current field.
Enter the name of the new SLP to be mapped to the current SLP in the Storage
Lifecycle Policies (SLP) - New field.
From the Policy Conversion map details section, select the current STU, to
be mapped, that references to the given source disk pool in the Storage Unit
(STU) - Current field.
Enter the name of the new STU to be mapped to the current STU in the Storage
Unit (STU) - New field.
Click Commit new map to map and activate the SLPs and STUs.
The appliance uses the information to map the SLPs and STUs. If the action
is successful the SLPs or STUs are added, removed, or modified in NetBackup,
the Storage Lifecycle Policies (SLP) - Current and Storage Lifecycle
Policies (SLP) - New columns are automatically modified to match the latest
system state.

Best practices to run a migration job

The following best practices should be kept in mind while run a migration job, using
the migration utility:
Do not run multiple instances of the Migration Utility concurrently on the same
appliance nor anywhere within the NetBackup domain.
When you attempt to run multiple instances on the same appliance can cause
the utility to generate incorrect estimates in the Possible Selections section.
When you attempt to run multiple instances within the NetBackup domain
for the same source and destination combination can cause the utility to
generate incorrect estimates in the Possible Selections section.
174

Select one appliance in the NetBackup domain to be the Migration Utility

Appliance and only run the utility from that appliance. The utility saves job
information on the appliance and can be accessed from the given appliance.
If your master server is an appliance select the master server appliance to be

the Migration Utility Appliance. As the migration utility requires access to the
NetBackup domain (for example, policy, storage, and catalog) information, using
a master server provides a better performance in generating the list of Possible
Selections.
The migration utility supports only a single job to be QUEUED or RUNNING at

one time. No other Migration Utility activity is supported until the job reaches
COMPLETE or CANCELLED.
After you have made the selection and click Migrate, refresh the Possible
Selections section, using the Apply search criteria button. When a job is
QUEUED or RUNNING the utility will return immediately with 0 possible
selections.
Do not attempt to reuse the options from the Possible Selections across multiple
migrations. The list of Possible Selections must be brought up to date using
the Apply search criteria button, once the previous job completes.

Software release updates for NetBackup

Appliances
Veritas provides bundled, release-update packages for the appliance that you can
download from the Support website. From the NetBackup Appliance Web Console
or the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu, you can check the Support website and
determine if a software update is available.
The bundled packages include updates for the following appliance software
applications:
Linux operating system
NetBackup server
NetBackup Appliance Web Console
175

Starting with NetBackup appliance version 2.6.0.2, NetBackup clients are no longer
included with NetBackup appliance release updates. If you want to store clients on
the appliance, a separate client package is available to download. The client package
is available from the same location as the server release updates and includes the
NetBackup Administration Console.
Note: Client versions that are stored on the appliance do not have to match the
NetBackup version that is currently installed on the appliance.
To access available appliance software release updates, refer to the following
topics:
Manage > Software Updates

Use the Manage > Software Updates tab to view and initiate the installation of a
software upgrade on your appliance.
The Software Update page displays the following sections:
Downloaded Software Updates - This section displays:
The current software version that is installed on your appliance.
The downloaded software updates (packages) that can be installed on your

appliance
Online Software Updates - This section displays the software updates available
for downloading and then installing on your appliance.
Table 3-27 displays the fields and buttons from the Downloaded Software Updates
section.
Table 3-27
Downloaded Software Updates
Field name
Description
Available Software Update
Shows the name and the version of the appliance

software updates that are already downloaded and
available to install.
Version
Shows the version of NetBackup Appliance

software that is available for installation.
NetBackup Version
Shows the version of NetBackup software that is

included with that version of the appliance software
update.
176

Table 3-27
Downloaded Software Updates (continued)
Field name
Description
Size
Shows the size of the software update to help you

ensure that you have enough space on the
appliance to accommodate the installation.
Details
Click Details to view additional information about

the software update.
Install
Selected a software update to install and click

Install to start the upgrade process.
Certain software updates may display
pre-installation pop-up windows that require user
inputs before you proceed further. You may be
required to:
Delete
Answer the questions that appear in each

pop-up window.
After all questions are answered, the server
upgrade list is displayed with the names of the
servers that you have selected to upgrade.
Click Next.
When the Confirmation Required window
appears, enter your user name and password.
The upgrade process begins and the progress
is shown in the NetBackup Appliance Web
Console.
If you determine that you do not need or want to

install a downloaded software update, remove it
from the list as follows:
Click the radio box next to the downloaded

software update that you want to delete.
Click Delete.
To obtain a software update that was deleted,

download it again from the Online Software
Updates table.
Table 3-28 displays the fields and buttons from the Online Software Updates
section. This table remains visible throughout the upgrade process.
177

Table 3-28
Online Software Updates
Field name
Description
Online Software Update
This column displays the version of the appliance

software update that you can select to download
to the appliance.
Version
Shows the version of NetBackup Appliance

software that is available for installation.
Size
This column displays the version of NetBackup

software that is included with the version of the
appliance software that you can select to
download.
Download Progress
This column displays the progress of the software

download. For example, 2.2G/2.9G downloading.
Download
After you have selected a software update version,

click Download to start the download process.
The table refreshes to show the status of the
download. If you decide to cancel the download,
click the red X next to the selected software update
on the right side of the table.
Methods for downloading appliance software release updates

NetBackup appliance software release updates are available from the Veritas
support website. Appliance software and client packages can be downloaded
through the NetBackup Appliance Web Console or the NetBackup Appliance Shell
Menu. Updates must first be downloaded onto the appliance before you can initiate
an upgrade.
The following describes the methods you can use to download appliance software
release updates:
See Downloading software updates to a NetBackup appliance using the

NetBackup Appliance Web Console on page 179.
See Downloading software updates directly to a NetBackup appliance

on page 179.
See Downloading software updates to a NetBackup appliance using a client

share on page 180.
178

Downloading software updates to a NetBackup appliance

using the NetBackup Appliance Web Console
Use the following procedure to download a software release update to an appliance
using the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
To download a software release update onto the appliance using the
Open a web browser and log on to the appliance through the NetBackup
Select Manage > Software Updates.
On the Software Updates page, in the Downloaded Software Updates table,

check to make sure that the software update has not already been downloaded.
If the table contains the software update that you want to install, proceed
to software installation as follows.
If the table does not contain a software update that you want to install,
proceed to the next step.
In the Online Software Updates table on the page, select a software update
and click Download.
The Download Progress column shows the download status. After the
download has completed successfully, the software update appears in the
Available Software Updates column of the Downloaded Software Updates
table.
Proceed to software installation as described in the previous step.
Downloading software updates directly to a NetBackup

appliance
To use this method, the appliance requires Internet access to download the files
or packages from the Veritas Support website.
To download software release updates directly onto the appliance
Open an SSH session and log on to the appliance as an administrator using

the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
To determine if a software update is available from the Veritas Support website,

enter the following command:
Main_Menu > Manage > Software > List AvailablePatch
To download an available software update or a client package, enter the

appropriate command as follows:
179

For appliance server updates:

Main_Menu > Manage > Software > Download
SYMC_NBAPP_update-<release-version>.x86_64.rpm
Where release is the software release number and version is the version
number of the software release. For example:
SYMC_NBAPP_update-2.7.1-1.x86_64.rpm
For a UNIX client package:

SYMC_NBAPP_addon_nbclient_<platform>-<release>-<date>.x86_64.rpm
Where <platform> is the client platform operating system, <release> is the

software release number, and <date> is the NetBackup client package date.
For example:
SYMC_NBAPP_addon_nbclient_Solaris-7.7.1-20150910.x86_64.rpm
For a Windows client package:

SYMC_NBAPP_addon_nbwin-<release>-<date>.x86_64.rpm
Where <release> is the software release number and <date> is the

NetBackup client package date.
For example:
SYMC_NBAPP_addon_nbwin-7.7.1-20150910.x86_64.rpm
To verify that the rpm has downloaded successfully, enter the following
command:
Main_Menu > Manage > List Downloaded
See Downloading software updates to a NetBackup appliance using the NetBackup

Appliance Web Console on page 179.
Downloading software updates to a NetBackup appliance

using a client share
Use this procedure to download the software release updates or client packages
to an appliance using a CIFS or an NFS client share.
Note: If downloading the software updates directly to the appliance fails, use this
method to download the appliance software release update or client package onto
the appliance.
180

Perform this method from a computer that is connected to the appliance and that
also has Internet access. Internet access is needed to download the files or
packages from the Veritas Support website to the appliance.
To download software release updates or client packages to the appliance
using a CIFS or an NFS client share:
Open an SSH session and log on to the appliance as an administrator using

the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
To open an NFS or a CIFS share, enter the following command:

Main_Menu > Manage > Software > Share Open
Map or mount the appliance share directory as follows:
Windows CIFS share

\\<appliance-name>\incoming_patches
UNIX NFS share

mkdir -p /mount/<appliance-name>
mount <appliance-name>:/inst/patch/incoming
/mount/<appliance-name>
This step describes the package file names for the release update packages
and the client packages. After reviewing the names, continue with the remaining
steps to download the files.
Release updates
NB_Appliance_N_<release-version>.x86_64-tar-split.1of3
Where <release> is the software release number and <version> is the
version number of the software release. For example: 2.7.x-1.
To verify that the downloaded release update packages have the same
MD5 or SHA1 checksums as those posted on the Veritas Support web site,
do the following:
Enter the following URL for the Veritas Support site where the release
updates and the client packages are posted:
https://www.veritas.com/content/support/en_US/58991.html
In the How to... section, click the download link for the posted software
update.
On the README page, in the right column, click Attachments.
Verify that the checksums shown in the pop-up window match the
downloaded file checksums.
181

Client packages
SYMC_NBAPP_addon_nbwin_<release>-<date>.x86_64.rpm or
SYMC_NBAPP_addon_nbclient_<platform>-<release>-<date>.x86_64.rpm
Where <platform> is the client platform operating system, <release> is the

software release number, and <date> is the NetBackup client package date.
For example:
SYMC_NBAPP_addon_nbclient_HP-UX-IA64-7.7.1-20150910.x86_64.rpm
Use one of the following commands to join (and extract) the release update
.rpm files:
For Windows:
copy /b NB_Appliance_N_<release-version>.x86_64-tar-split.1of3+
NB_Appliance_N_<release-version>.x86_64-tar-split.2of3+
NB_Appliance_N_<release-version>.x86_64-tar-split.3of3+
NB_Appliance_N_<release-version>.tar
Note: This command must be entered as one string. Make sure that the
only space in the name is after .3of3. In addition, <release> is the software
version number and <version> is the posted version number.
Use Windows WinRAR utilities to uncompress the
NB_Appliance_N_<release-version>.tar file. The resulting files are as
follows:
update.rpm.md5_checksum
update.rpm.sha1_checksum
For UNIX:
cat
NB_Appliance_N_<release-version>.x86_64-tar-split.1of3<space>
NB_Appliance_N_<release-version>.x86_64-tar-split.2of3<space>
NB_Appliance_N_<release-version>.x86_64-tar-split.3of3 | tar
xvf -
Where release is the software release number and version is the version
number of the software release. For example: 2.7.x-1.
Note: This command is one string. In this example, there is one space
between each split package that is identified with a "<space>".
The resulting files are as follows:
182

update.rpm.md5_checksum
update.rpm.sha1_checksum
Note: To extract packages on UNIX systems, Veritas recommends that you

use GNU tar version 1.16 or higher instead of tar. See the following Technote
for more information about extracting images:
https://www.veritas.com/docs/TECH154080
For UNIX systems, run one of the following commands to compute the
checksum value for the .rpm file:
md5sum SYMC_NBAPP_update-<release-version>.x86_64.rpm or sha1sum
SYMC_NBAPP_update-<release-version>.x86_64.rpm.
Verify that the checksum value matches the content of the

update.rpm.md5_checksum file or the update.rpm.sha1_checksum file.
Copy this release update or client package .rpm to the mounted share.
Note: During the copy process, do not run any commands on the appliance.
Doing so can cause the copy operation to fail.
After you have successfully copied the release update or client package .rpm
into the mounted share, unmap or unmount the shared directory.
On the appliance, enter the following command to close the NFS and the CIFS
shares:
Main_Menu > Manage > Software > Share Close
If you run any of the following commands before you close the share, the
downloaded release update or client package is moved from the share directory
location to its proper location. However, you must still run the Share Close
command to ensure that the NFS and the CIFS shares are closed.
183

Note: For upgrades from 2.6.1 or 2.6.1.x, the release update or the client
package cannot be verified and moved unless the Symantec Critical System
Protection (SCSP) scanning is complete.
For upgrades from 2.7.1 or later, the release update or the client package
cannot be verified and moved unless the Symantec Data Center Security
(SDCS) scanning is complete.
List Version
List Details All
List Details Base
Share Open
Share Close
10 To list the available release updates or client packages on the appliance, enter
the following command and note the name of the downloaded files:
Main_Menu > Manage > Software > List Downloaded
Running this command validates and moves the release update or the client
package from the share directory to its proper location. You are not notified
that this move has occurred.
See Downloading software updates to a NetBackup appliance using the NetBackup
Appliance Web Console on page 179.
Installing a NetBackup appliance version 2.7.x software update using

the NetBackup Appliance Web Console
After you have performed the items in the pre-upgrade checklist, use the following
procedure to start the appliance upgrade.
To install a downloaded release update using the NetBackup Appliance Web
Console
Check to make sure that the following pre-upgrade tasks have been performed:
All jobs have been stopped or suspended and all SLPs have been paused.
The Support > Test Software command has been run and returned a
Pass result.
All of the necessary RHEL plug-in packages have been copied into the
appropriate location.
184

Open a web browser and log on to the appliance using the NetBackup Appliance
Web Console.
Select Manage > Software Updates.
From the Software Updates page, locate the appropriate software update in
the Downloaded Software Updates table.
If the table contains the software update that you want to install, proceed
to the next step.
If the table does not contain a software update that you want to install, refer
to the following topics:
See Downloading software updates to a NetBackup appliance using the
NetBackup Appliance Web Console on page 179.
See Downloading software updates directly to a NetBackup appliance
on page 179.
See Downloading software updates to a NetBackup appliance using a
client share on page 180.
Select the check box that is associated with the software update that you want
to install and click Install.
The following events occur after you click Install:
The Software Updates page refreshes and presents a table that displays
the server (master or media) that is to be upgraded. The table also shows
the name and version of the software update.
Note: If you plan to upgrade more than one media server, you must run
this upgrade procedure on each media server.
An interactive, pre-installation check window appears.

You must provide answers to the pre-installation questions. Then select
Finish to close the pre-installation check window.
On the Downloaded Software Updates table, click Next.
The Confirm pop-up window displays the server (master or media) that you
are about to upgrade.
If this information is correct, click Next. If the information is not correct, click
Cancel.
185

Click Next to open a Confirmation Required pop-up window. An administrator

must enter a user name and a password as a final step before the software
installation or the upgrade begins. After you enter these credentials, click
Confirm. If you want to stop or exit the installation, click Cancel.
The Software Updates page refreshes and updates the information that is
displayed in the Downloaded Software Updates table. This table displays
the progress of the upgrade, starting with the pre-flight check.
Monitor the pre-flight check and watch for any Check failed messages. Proceed
as follows:
If no Check failed messages appear, you are prompted to start the upgrade.
Proceed to the next step.
If any Check failed messages appear, the upgrade is not allowed. You
must resolve the reported failures, then launch the upgrade script again so
that the pre-flight check can verify that the failures have been resolved.
If any Check failed messages indicate that a RHEL version third-party

plug-in was not found, you must obtain the plug-in from the appropriate
vendor. Refer to the following topic for installation details:
10 The system may restart several times during the upgrade process. After the
first restart, the NetBackup Appliance Web Console and any SSH-based
connections to the server are unavailable until the restart process has
completed. This condition may last two hours or more, depending on the
complexity of the appliance configuration. It is important that you do not attempt
to restart the appliance during this time. You can use the Symantec Remote
Management interface (IPMI) to view the system restart status. In addition,
you may view the logs under /log or wait for the appliance to send an email
upon completion of the upgrade process.
11 After the status of the server reaches 100%, the information in the title line of
the table indicates whether the upgrade was successful. The following status
can occur depending on whether the upgrade was successful:
The appliance version is <the target version> and not in upgrade state.
If the target (or new) version appears, the upgrade was successful. Click
Finish to complete the process.
The appliance version is <the original version> and not in upgrade

state. If the original (or pre-upgrade) version appears, the upgrade has
failed, and an automatic rollback has taken place. The rollback returns the
server back to the original version.
Failed to create the PRE_UPGRADE checkpoint, please resolve this

issue first
186

A checkpoint creation process is performed automatically before the upgrade

operation begins. This checkpoint is used to enable the server to roll back
to it, if the upgrade fails. If the failure message appears, it indicates that
the creation of the checkpoint failed, and the upgrade operations were not
performed. You must determine what caused the issue and resolve it before
you can attempt the upgrade again.
Self-Test failed on <nodename >, please resolve the issue first. The
self-test operation is executed automatically before the upgrade completes.
If the self-test fails, you are prompted to either roll back or retry the self-test
after you have investigated the problem using the NetBackup Appliance
Shell Menu.
12 Complete this step only if your backup environment includes SAN client
computers.
The Fibre Channel (FC) ports must be re-scanned to allow any SAN client
computers to reconnect to the Fibre Transport (FT) devices. The rescan must
be done from the NetBackup CLI view on the appliance.
To re-scan the FC ports:
Enter the following command to see a list of NetBackup user accounts:

Manage > NetBackupCLI > List
Log on to this appliance as one of the listed NetBackup users.
Run the following command to rescan the FC ports:

nbftconfig -rescanallclients
If any SAN clients still do not work, run the following commands on each
of those clients in the order as shown:
On UNIX clients:
/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/bp.kill_all
/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/bp.start_all
On Windows clients:
<install_path>\NetBackup\bin\bpdown
<install_path>\NetBackup\bin\bpup
If any SAN clients still do not work, you must manually initiate a SCSI device
refresh at the OS level. The method to accomplish the refresh action
depends on the operating system that the client is running. Once the refresh
has completed, attempt the nbftconfig -rescanallclients command
again.
If any SAN clients still do not work, restart those clients.
187

Note: If you have any SLES 10 or SLES 11 SAN clients that still do not
work, Veritas recommends that you upgrade the QLogic driver on those
clients. For the affected SLES 10 clients, upgrade to version
8.04.00.06.10.3-K. For the affected SLES 11 clients, upgrade to version
8.04.00.06.11.1.
Installing a NetBackup appliance version 2.7.x software update using

the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu
After you have performed the items in the pre-upgrade checklist, use the following
procedure to start the appliance upgrade.
To install a downloaded release update using the NetBackup Appliance Shell
Menu
Check to make sure that the following pre-upgrade tasks have already been
performed:
All jobs have been stopped or suspended and all SLPs have been paused.
The Support > Test Software command has been run and returned a
Pass result.
All of the necessary RHEL plug-in packages have been copied into the
appropriate location.
Open an SSH session and log on to the appliance using the NetBackup
To install the software release update, run the following command:

Main_Menu > Manage > Software > Install patch_name
Where patch_name is the name of the release update to install. Make sure
that this patch name is the one that you want to install.
Monitor the pre-flight check and watch for any Check failed messages. Proceed
as follows:
If no Check failed messages appear, you are prompted to continue to the

next step to start the upgrade.
If any Check failed messages appear, the upgrade is not allowed. You
must resolve the reported failures, then launch the upgrade script again so
that the pre-flight check can verify that the failures have been resolved.
188

If any Check failed messages indicate that a RHEL version third-party

plug-in was not found, you must obtain the plug-in from the appropriate
vendor. Refer to the following topic for installation details:
Watch the onscreen progress of the upgrade to see an estimated completion

time. To see the current status of the upgrade, enter the following command:
Main_Menu > Manage > Software >UpgradeStatus
The upgrade may force the appliance to restart several times.

After the upgrade has completed and the disk pools are back online, the
appliance runs a self-diagnostic test. Refer to the following file for the test
results:
/log/selftest_report_<appliance_serial>_<timedate>.txt
If SMTP is configured, an email notification that contains the self-test result is

sent.
Note: For upgrades from 2.6.1 or 2.6.1.x, the system may restart several times
during the upgrade process. After the first restart, the NetBackup Appliance
Web Console and any SSH-based connections to the server are unavailable
until the restart process has completed. This condition may last two hours or
more, depending on the complexity of the appliance configuration. It is important
that you do not attempt to restart the appliance during this time. You can use
the Symantec Remote Management interface (IPMI) to view the system restart
status. In addition, you may view the logs under /log or wait for the appliance
to send an email upon completion of the upgrade process.
Complete this step only if your backup environment includes SAN client
computers.
The Fibre Channel (FC) ports must be re-scanned to allow any SAN client
computers to reconnect to the Fibre Transport (FT) devices. The re-scan must
be done from the NetBackup CLI view on the appliance.
To re-scan the FC ports:
Enter the following command to see a list of NetBackup user accounts:

Manage > NetBackupCLI > List
Log on to this appliance as one of the listed NetBackup users.
Run the following command to rescan the FC ports:

nbftconfig -rescanallclients
189

If any SAN clients still do not work, run the following commands on each
of those clients in the order as shown:
On UNIX clients:
/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/bp.kill_all
/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/bp.start_all
On Windows clients:
<install_path>\NetBackup\bin\bpdown
<install_path>\NetBackup\bin\bpup
If any SAN clients still do not work, manually initiate a SCSI device refresh
at the OS level. The refresh method depends on the operating system of
the client. Once the refresh has completed, attempt the nbftconfig
-rescanallclients command again.
If any SAN clients still do not work, restart those clients.

Note: If you have SLES 10 or SLES 11 SAN clients that still do not work,
Veritas recommends upgrading the QLogic driver on those clients. For the
affected SLES 10 clients, upgrade to version 8.04.00.06.10.3-K. For the
affected SLES 11 clients, upgrade to version 8.04.00.06.11.1.
Appliance servers to upgrade

After you click Install to install a software update, the Manage > Software Updates
page refreshes and displays the following tables:
Install Software Update

This table displays the servers that are to be upgraded with the software update
that you selected to install.
Online Software Updates Available

This table remains visible throughout the upgrade process. It shows the available
software updates that are applicable to your appliance that you can download.
Table 3-29
Servers identified for the software update
Field name
Description
Server
The name of the server that is currently configured

in your master server environment. In a cluster
configuration, multiple media servers are displayed.
Software Update Name
The name of the software update that you have

selected for installation.
190

Table 3-29
Servers identified for the software update (continued)
Field name
Description
Software Update Version
The new version of the appliance software on the

server after the software is updated successfully.
Next
Click Next to continue with the upgrade process

after selecting the servers to upgrade. After you
click Next, a pop-up window appears that lists the
selected servers.
To continue, do the following:
Cancel
Confirm that the server upgrade list is correct.
When the Confirmation Required window

appears, enter your user name and password.
That is the final confirmation step before the
upgrade operation begins.
Click Cancel to cancel or exit the upgrade process.

The Next and Cancel buttons are located on the
top-right corner of the table.
See Software Updates Installation Status on page 191.

See Manage > Software Updates on page 176.
Software Updates Installation Status

After you enter your user name and password and click Confirm to confirm the
software installation, the Manage > Software Updates page refreshes and displays
the following two tables:
Install Software Update

This table lets you view the progress and the status of the software installation
as it applies to each server that you selected to upgrade.
After the upgrade has completed on all servers, click Finish.
Online Software Updates Available

This table remains visible throughout the upgrade process. It shows the available
software updates that are applicable to your appliance that you can download.
Table 3-30 describes the information about the installation status of the software
update.
191

Table 3-30
Software update installation status
Field name
Description
Server
The servers that were selected for the software

update installation.
Status
Displays whether each server is online or offline.
Installation Progress
Shows the progress (in percent) of installation and

for each server. For example, "15%".
Installation Status
Displays the status of the installation. For example,

"The appliance is running self-test on
<appliancename>...".
Note: The installation of the software update requires the NetBackup Appliance
Web Console temporarily owing to the upgrade of certain web console components.
To monitor the installation status, log on to the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu
and run the Manage > Software > UpgradeStatus command.
See Appliance servers to upgrade on page 190.
About installing an EEB

Emergency engineering binaries are provided to customer on an individual basis
to meet specific needs for that customer. If you have one or more EEBs that you
want to install you should store them locally so that you can upload them to the
appliance using the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
See Installing an EEB on page 192.
Installing an EEB
You install an emerency engineering binary (EEB) the same way as you would
install a software update. You can use the appliance shell menu to install an EEB
on an appliance. When you install an EEB you must be logged into the appliance
where you intend to install the binary. You should also contact Technical Support
to obtain the EEB that you need to install and store it locally on your computer. In
addition, If you have multiple EEBs to install, you can only install one EEB at a time.
To install an EEB using the NetBackup Appliance Web Console, refer to the following
section.
192

To upload and install an appliance emergency engineering binary using the

NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu
You should perform this procedure from a computer that is connected to the
appliance as well as to the Internet.
Open an SSH session and log on to the appliance as an administrator.
Enter the following command to open the NFS and the CIFS shares:
Main_Menu > Manage > Software > Share Open
Map or mount the appliance share directory as follows:

Windows systems
Map the following appliance CIFS share:
UNIX systems
Mount the following appliance NFS share:

<appliance-name>:/inst/patch/incoming
Note that on Windows systems, you are prompted to provide the user name,
admin, and its corresponding password.
Copy the EEB from your local computer to this mapped directory.
You should have already obtained the EEB from Technical Support.
Unmap or unmount the directory after you have successfully downloaded the
EEB.
From the appliance, enter the following command to close the NFS and the
CIFS shares:
Main_Menu > Manage > Software > Share Close
Once the EEB is downloaded on to the share directory that you defined in Step
3, it is moved to the proper location. You are not notified that this move has
occurred.
If you run the List EEBs command before you run the Share Close command,
the update is still moved from the share directory location to its proper location.
Make sure that you have run the Share Close command to ensure that you
close the NFS and the CIFS shares.
193

Enter the following command to list the EEBs that are available for downloading
Main_Menu > Manage > Software > List Downloaded
Enter the following command to install the release update.

Main_Menu > Manage > Software > Install patch_name
Where patch_name is the name if the EEB to install. You must make sure that
the name you enter matches the EEB name that you uploaded on the appliance.
Before you proceed with the installation of the EEB, ensure that there are no
jobs running on the appliance
See About installing an EEB on page 192.
About installing NetBackup Administration Console and client

software
You can use two different methods to install the NetBackup client software on the
clients that you want to backup. You can install NetBackup client software on clients
as follows:
Use CIFS and NFS shares and run scripts to install the software silently.
Depending on the operating system, you run the quickinstall.exe script or
the unix-client-install script. This is a silent install. The scripts do not
prompt you for any user-related questions. They automatically update the
NetBackup configuration on client with the appliance server name as the Master
server.
Select a link on the appliance login page to download the packages and install
the software.
On the appliance login page, you can click on the Software link to download a
package that contains the NetBackup Administration Console and the NetBackup
client software.
You can also elect to download and install the NetBackup Administration
Console. To download and install the client software, you perform the following
functions:
Choose the client type that you want to install.
Select the software package to download.
Unzip or untar the package.
Run the install (UNIX) or setup.exe (Windows) script.
Update the NetBackup configuration on client with the Master Server

information (for example, bp.conf on UNIX systems).
194

Downloading NetBackup client packages to a client from

a NetBackup appliance
You can download NetBackup client software from a NetBackup appliance to any
client that you want to back up. The NetBackup Appliance Web Console logon page
provides a Download Packages section to download the client packages.
The packages are listed by operating system type in a drop-down box as follows:
All
Windows
Linux
Solaris
AIX
HP
BSD
Mac OS
VMware vCenter Plug-in
Note: If you download Linux, UNIX, Solaris, AIX, or BSD packages, Veritas
recommends GNU tar version 1.16 or higher to extract the .tar packages.
For more information, see the following Technote on the Veritas Support website:
https://www.veritas.com/support/en_US/article.TECH154080
In addition to the downloading instructions, this procedure also includes the steps
to extract and install the downloaded files on to the client.
To download NetBackup client packages from a NetBackup appliance to a
client
Log in to the client that you want to back up.
Open a browser window and enter the appliance URL.
In the middle of the landing page, in the section Download Packages, click
on the drop-down box to see the list of packages.
Right-click the selected package and specify the location to download it onto
the client.
Example locations are as follows:
On Windows platforms, download the package to C:\temp or to the desktop.
195

To determine the type of hardware on your Windows system, right-click My

Computer and select Properties.
On Linux or UNIX platforms, download the package to /tmp.
Note: If the message No packages found appears after you make a selection,
that client package is not currently installed on the appliance. Refer to the
following topic to download client packages on to the appliance:
Unzip or untar the package.
Install the client software as follows:
Windows systems
Click the setup.exe file.
UNIX systems
Run the .install script.
After you have successfully installed the client software, add the appliance
master server name to the client as follows:
196

Windows systems
After NetBackup has been installed on

the client, open the Backup, Archive,
and Restore interface.
Start > All Programs > Symantec
NetBackup > Backup, Archive, and
Restore
From the Backup, Archive, and Restore
interface, select File > Specify
NetBackup Machines and Policy
Type...
From the Specify NetBackup
Machines and Policy Type dialog,
enter the server name in the field
Server to use for backups and
restores. Then click Edit Server List
and click OK.
In the dialog box that appears, enter
the fully qualified host name of the
appliance master server and click OK.
Close the Backup, Archive, and
Restore interface.
Restart the NetBackup Client Services
by opening a Windows Command
prompt. Then, enter services.msc
and press Enter.
UNIX systems
On the client, navigate to the following

location:
cd /usr/openv/netbackup
Enter ls to see the contents of the

directory.
Open the bp.conf file in a text editor.
Enter the fully qualified host name of

the appliance master server.
Save the changes and close the file.
See Downloading the NetBackup Administration Console to a Windows computer

from a NetBackup appliance on page 197.
Downloading the NetBackup Administration Console to a

Windows computer from a NetBackup appliance
You can download the NetBackup Administration Console software from a
NetBackup appliance to a Windows computer that you want to use to access the
appliance. The Windows computer does not require NetBackup installation to use
the administration console. The logon page of the NetBackup Appliance Web
Console provides a Download Packages section to download the NetBackup
Administration Console package.
In addition to the downloading instructions, this procedure also includes the steps
to extract and install the downloaded files on to the client.
197

To download the NetBackup Administration Console package from a

NetBackup appliance to a Windows computer
Log into the Windows computer that you want to use for appliance access.
Open a browser window and enter the appliance URL.
In the middle of the landing page, in the section Download Packages, click
on the drop-down box and select Windows.
When the package file name appears under the drop-down box, right-click on
it and select either Download Linked File or Download Linked File As, then
specify the location to download the package onto the Windows computer.
For example, download the package to C:\temp or to the desktop.
Unzip the package.
Install the administration console software as follows:
On the client, navigate to the Addons/JavaInstallFiles directory.
Click on the setup.exe file.
See Downloading NetBackup client packages to a client from a NetBackup

appliance on page 195.
Troubleshooting the NetBackup-Java Administration

Console on a non-English Windows system
If you install the NetBackup-Java Administration Console on a non-English Windows
system to administer the NetBackup server inside a NetBackup appliance, the
console can hang when you attempt to log in to the NetBackup server. To avoid
this issue, use the following workaround:
Modify the install_path\Java\setconf.bat file on the Windows system where the

NetBackup-Java Administration Console is installed and set the
NBJAVA_FILE_ENCODING parameter with the proper encoding. Use the same
encoding as you previously set on the appliance system with the SystemLocale
command.
To determine the coding name, refer to the Canonical Name for java.nio API
and java.lang API column in the Supported Encodings document on the
following website:
Oracle Supported Encodings Documentation
For example, if you set a UTF-8 locale like zh_CN.utf8 or ja_JP.utf8 on your
appliance system, the canonical name for java.nio API and java.lang API is
UTF8. Uncomment the SET NBJAVA_FILE_ENCODING parameter in the
install_path\Java\setconf.bat file, and specify UTF8 (in this example) as follows:
198

REM SET NBJAVA_FILE_ENCODING= becomes: SET

NBJAVA_FILD_ENCODING=UTF8
For more information on the SystemLocale command, refer to the following
section:
See About the NetBackup Appliance Web Console login page on page 23.
You can also find this information in the NetBackup Appliance Command Reference
Guide.

From the Manage > Additional Servers page you can add or delete additional
servers. This tab lets you add an entry to the NetBackup bp.conf file. The bp.conf
file allows communication to occur between the appliance and the Windows
NetBackup Administration Console, so you can manage your appliance through
that console. You must add the host name of a media server to the additional servers
before configuring the media server.
See Managing additional servers to the appliance on page 199.
Managing additional servers to the appliance

The following procedures enable you to add or delete servers from the Additional
Servers page on the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
Use the following procedure to add additional servers to the appliance.
To add an additional server:
Click Manage > Additonal Servers.
Click the Add button.

The Add Additional Server dialog box is displayed.
In the Server Name field, enter the name of the server that you want to add,
and then click OK.
Note: You can add multiple server name entries separated using a comma(,).
The appliance displays the following message:
Additional server(s) added successfully.
Click Cancel to exit the Add Additional Server dialog box.
199

Use the following procedure to delete servers from the appliance.

To delete an additional server
Click Manage > Additional Servers.

The Additional Servers page displays a list of all the additional servers added
to your appliance.
Select the check box against the server that you want to delete, and then click
the Delete button.
The following warning is displayed:

Are you sure you want to proceed?
Click Yes to delete the selected server. The following message is displayed:
Additional server(s) deleted successfully.
To delete all the servers from the appliance, select the Server Name check
box, and click Delete.
See Manage > Additional Servers on page 199.

Use the Manage > Certificates page to generate a new certificate from the
NetBackup Appliance Web Console. The certificate is an authentication token which
used by the NetBackup plug-in. It is downloaded automatically to your local directory
as a .pem file.
NetBackup appliance supports the generation of the following certificate types:
vCenter
SCVMM
To generate the certificates for your client
Go to the Manage > Certificates page.
In the Client Hostname text box, enter the client hostname.
Click Generate.
The certificate <hostname>.zip has been generated and downloaded to the
local directory that you selected.
200

For more information about vCenter and SCVMM clients, refer to the following
documents:
NetBackupPlug-in for Microsoft SCVMM Console Guide
NetBackupPlug-in for VMware vSphere Web Client Guide
See Manage > Additional Servers on page 199.
201
Chapter
Managing NetBackup
appliance using the
NetBackup Appliance
Shell Menu
Expanding the bandwidth on the NetBackup appliance
About configuring the maximum transmission unit size
About OpenStorage plugin installation
About mounting a remote NFS
About running NetBackup commands from the appliance
About Auto Image Replication between appliances
Expanding the bandwidth on the NetBackup

appliance
The NetBackup appliance has the capability to provide link aggregation. Link
aggregation increases the bandwidth and availability of the communications channel
between the appliance and other devices. Link aggregation is enabled by default
when you perform the initial network configuration from the NetBackup Appliance
Web Console or the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
Managing NetBackup appliance using the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu

About configuring the maximum transmission unit size
You can use the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu to enable or disable link
aggregation, as well as view the status of the link aggregation.
Use the following commands to enable, disable, and view the status of link
aggregation:
To enable the network link aggregation:

Main_Menu > Network > LinkAggregation Enable
To disable the network link aggregation:

Main_Menu > Network > LinkAggregation Disable
To show the status of the network link aggregation:

Main_Menu > Network > LinkAggregation Status
About configuring the maximum transmission

unit size
The MTU property controls the maximum transmission unit size for an Ethernet
frame. The standard maximum transmission unit size for Ethernet is 1500 bytes
(without headers). In supported environments, the MTU property can be set to larger
values in excess of 9,000 bytes. Setting a larger frame size on an interface is
commonly referred to as using jumbo frames. Jumbo frames help reduce
fragmentation as data is sent over the network and in some cases, can also provide
better throughput and reduced CPU usage. To take advantage of jumbo frames,
the Ethernet cards, drivers, and switching must all support jumbo frames.
Additionally, each server interface that is used to transfer data to the appliance
must be configured for jumbo frames.
If you configure the MTU property of an interface to values larger than 1500 bytes,
it is recommended that all systems that are connected to the appliance on the
specific interface have the same maximum transmission unit size. Such systems
include but are not limited to NetBackup clients and remote desktops. Also verify
the network hardware, OS, and driver support on all systems before you configure
the MTU property.
You can configure the MTU property for an interface by using the SetProperty
command in the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
See the SetProperty command in the NetBackup Appliance Command Reference
Guide.
203


You can install and open an OpenStorage (OST) plugin on the NetBackup
Appliance using the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu. The OST plugins enable
you to install multiple plugins to communicate with their corresponding storage
systems.
The following diagram illustrates the process to install the OpenStorage plugin.
204

Figure 4-1
1. Copy and
Share the
OpenStorage
plugin
OpenStorage plugin installation process
1.1 Download OST

plugin in a shared
directory
2. List the
plug-ins on the
appliance
1.2 Open the shared

directory on appliance
2.1 List all the OST

plugins that have
been downloaded
3.1 Untar the tar.gz file

and extract its contents
3 Check if
nbrmms is
running and
terminate the
process
3.4 Check if
nbrmms is
running
4 Install the
OpenStorage plugin
1.3 Copy the plugin onto

the mounted share and
close the share
2.2 List the OST plugin

that has been installed
3.2 Check if the plugin 3.3 Check if the plugin

exists in the install
directory path exists (/usr/
directory
openv/lib/ost-plugins)
3.5 Copy libstspi*.so and libstspi*MT.so into 3.6 Restart the

plugin directory (/usr/openv/lib/ost-plugins) nbrmms process
* - Vendor name for example libstspiDataDomain.so
4.1 Enter command

OpenStorage > Install
plugin_name.tar.gz
4.1 Follow the instructions till the

Shell menu displays
INSTALL COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY
See Installing OpenStorage plugin on page 206.

See Uninstalling OpenStorage plugin on page 207.
205

For more information about Main > Manage > OpenStorage commands refer to
Installing OpenStorage plugin

The following procedure describes how to install the OpenStorage (OST) plugin
through the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
To install the OpenStorage plugin
Download the latest version of the OST plugin from the required vendor's
support Website.
Open the shared directory. To open the shared directory on the appliance
choose from the following commands:
Main Menu > Manage > OpenStorage > Share Open

The CIFS share \\nbapphostname\incoming_plugins
and the NFS share nbapphostname:/inst/plugin/incoming
have been opened on this appliance.
Copy the OST plugin using CIFS or NFS share.
Close the shared directory. To close the shared directory use the following
command:
MainMenu > Manage > OpenStorage > Share Close
After the plugin is downloaded on the appliance, you can use the list commands
to view the plugin details. To view the details of the downloaded plugins choose
from the following commands:
OpenStorage > List Available
Displays a list of all the downloaded plugins and not yet applied.
OpenStorage > List Installed
Displays a detailed list of all the installed plugins on the appliance.
Install the downloaded plugin. To install the downloaded plugin, choose from
the following commands based on the appliance you use:
OpenStorage > Install plugin_name to install the OST plugin on media
and master appliances.

The appliance initiates the installation process as displayed in the following
example:
206

207
Welcome to the installation of plugin_name.tar.gz

- [Info] Checking if upgrade is running from the console...failed
WARNING: Symantec recommends that this upgrade is run from
the appliance console.
>> Are you sure you want to continue? (yes/no)
- [Info] Extracting the contents of the tar file
- [Info] Terminating the nbrmms process before proceeding
with the installation.
- [Info] Executing the install script
- [Info] Install script exited successfully!
- [Info] Restarting nbrmms
- Successfully installed the plugin plugin_name.tar.gz
yes
ok
ok
ok
See About OpenStorage plugin installation on page 204.

See Uninstalling OpenStorage plugin on page 207.
Uninstalling OpenStorage plugin

The following procedure describes how to uninstall the OpenStorage (OST) plugin
through the appliance shell menu.

208
To uninstall a OpenStorage plugin
To uninstall the OST plugin use the following command:

OpenStorage > Uninstall plugin_name
Uninstalls the OST plugin on media and master appliances.
The appliance initiates the process to uninstall the OST plugin as displayed
using the following example:
- [Info] Checking for the installed OpenStorage plugin ...
>> The plugin package plugin_name.tar.gz is currently installed
on the system. Do you want to continue uninstalling it? (yes/no)
Type yes to continue and uninstall the plugin.

There might be some existing backups on the storage server.
Are you sure you want to continue uninstalling the plugin? (yes/no)
Type yes to continue and uninstall the plugin.

The appliance continues the uninstall process and displays the following:
- Uninstalling the plugin plugin_name.tar.gz
ok
- Successfully uninstalled the plugin plugin_name.tar.gz
See About OpenStorage plugin installation on page 204.

See Installing OpenStorage plugin on page 206.

You can use the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu, to mount a remote Network
File System (NFS) onto the appliance server. You can now mount NFS using a
simpler interface through the Manage > MountPoints menu. To work with the NFS
drive, you can use the following commands in the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
Table 4-1
Commands to work with NFS drive
Command
Descriptions
Mount
Use the Mount command to mount an NFS drive.

Table 4-1
Commands to work with NFS drive (continued)
Command
Descriptions
List
Use the List command to list all the existing mount points on your
appliance.
Unmount
Use the Unmount command to un-mount a previously mounted

NFS drive.
See Mounting an NFS remote drive on page 209.

See Unmounting an NFS drive on page 211.
In certain circumstances, you may find that a NetBackup Appliance NFS share is
not accessible. If this issue occurs, use the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu to
restart the NFS server. Use the following command:
Support > Service Restart nfsserver
Once you have restarted the server, try again to access the NFS share.
For more information about Main > Manage > MountPoints commands refer to
NetBackup Appliance Command Reference Guide
Mounting an NFS remote drive

This procedure describes how to mount your remote NFS drive.
To mount an NFS remove drive
Log in to the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu using your administrator's

credentials.
Type the Main > Manage> MountPoints

The appliance lists all the commands under in the MountPoints menu.
To mount your remote NFS drive, type the following command:
Mount RemotePath MountPoint [FileSystemType] [options]
This command includes the following parameters:
209

RemotePath
Description Provide the
address of a
device or a
directory to be
mounted on to
your appliance.
MountPoint
Provide the name of Specify the type

the directory where
of the device to
the NFS drive should be mounted.
be mounted.
Note: An error is
displayed in case of
the following
situations:
Format
Specify any
additional
options to be
passed to the
appliance
along with the
Mount
command.
If the directory
name is incorrect.
If the directory
with given name
does not exist, a
directory is
created.
If the directory
with given name
is already
mounted at a
mount point.
HOST:DIRECTORY The directory name

must start with / and
must have the correct
directory name.
You can only

use options
specific for
mounting the
NFS drive.
Parameter Mandatory
type
Mandatory
Optional
Optional
Example
/mymounts/moun1
NFSv3 or any
other supported
type by the
underlying
Mount
command.
ro is used to
mount the
device as read
only.
suryan.
engba.
symantec.com
:/build1
[FileSystemType] [Options]
The appliance mounts your remote NFS drive.

Note: If you mount a remote share and then restart the appliance, the mount
is re-established on the next boot. The mount points are persistent across all
the restart and there is no exception to this rule.
210

To list and view the mounted devices
Log in to the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu using your administrator

credentials.
Type the Main > Manage > MountPoints

The appliance lists all the commands under the MountPoints menu.
To view the list of mounted devices use the following command:

List [Type]
When you specify the value for the [Type] parameter as [All], the appliance
displays all the available mount points along with the NFS drives. If this
parameter is not provided, this command lists all the NFS mount points.
Note: In certain circumstances, you may find that a NetBackup Appliance NFS
share is not accessible. If this issue occurs, use the NetBackup Appliance Shell
Menu to restart the NFS server.
Use the following command: Support > Service Restart nfsserver
Once you have restarted the server, try to access the NFS share again.
See About mounting a remote NFS on page 208.
Unmounting an NFS drive

This procedure describes how to unmount an NFS drive.
To unmount an NFS drive
Log in to the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu using your administrator

credentials.
Type the Main > Manage > MountPoints

The appliance lists all the commands under the MountPoints menu.
To unmount a drive, use the following command:

Unmount MountPoint [force].
The following options are used to identify the NFS drive to be unmounted.
211

MountPoint
Description
[force]
Provide the name of the directory that Specify this parameter to

is to be un-mounted.
unmount the NFS forcibly.
Note: An error is displayed in case

of the following situations:
Format
If the directory name is incorrect.
If the directory with the given name

does not exist.
The directory name must start with /

and must have the correct directory
name.
Note: If the specified directory is a

valid mount directory, it is unmounted.
Parameter type Mandatory
Example
Optional
/mymounts/moun1
If the directory name is specified correctly the following process takes place:
The NFS is unmounted successfully.
The directory is removed from the file system.
In case the directory is on a nested path, only that directory is removed.

About running NetBackup commands from the

appliance
The NetBackup command-line shell feature enables NetBackup administrators to
execute NetBackup commands with superuser privileges. These privileges enable
NetBackup administrators to execute the commands that support full NetBackup
logging as well as develop and use scripts and automation.
NetBackup Appliance administrators can provide access for multiple NetBackup
administrators and audit the activity of these administrators. In addition, NetBackup
Appliance administrators can manage the NetBackup administrator accounts from
the Main > Manage > NetBackupCLI view within the NetBackup Appliance Shell
Menu. From the NetBackupCLI view, a NetBackup Appliance administrator can
212

create, delete, and list NetBackup administrator accounts as well as manage their
user account passwords.
See About NetBackup administrator capabilities on page 213.
See Creating NetBackup administrator user accounts on page 218.
See Managing NetBackup administrator user account passwords on page 220.
See Auditing NetBackup Administrator accounts on page 221.
See Deleting NetBackup administrator user accounts on page 222.
See Viewing NetBackup administrator user accounts on page 222.
About NetBackup administrator capabilities

NetBackup administrators have superuser privileges and share a common home
directory within a restricted shell. From this restricted shell, the NetBackup
administrators can do the following:
Use a base command name, an absolute or a relative path, or a shell script as

a way to execute NetBackup commands.
Have full NetBackup logging capabilities.
The following list shows the NetBackup commands that a NetBackup administrator
can run with superuser privileges and the directories that contain the NetBackup
commands.
/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/*
/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/admincmd/*
/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/goodies/*
/usr/openv/volmgr/bin/*
/usr/openv/volmgr/bin/goodies/*
/usr/openv/pdde/pdag/bin/mtstrmd
/usr/openv/pdde/pdag/bin/pdcfg
/usr/openv/pdde/pdag/bin/pdusercfg
/usr/openv/pdde/pdconfigure/pdde
/usr/openv/pdde/pdcr/bin/*
Note: Because there are NetBackup commands on a NetBackup appliance, it is

possible that some of the command arguments are not supported.
213

The following list shows the commands and scripts that you cannot run from the
directories:
Library files - The files that end with the .so or .so64 extensions.
Notify scripts - Scripts that contain notify string within the file name.
File list files - The files that end with the .filelist extension.
See About running NetBackup commands from the appliance on page 212.
See About running NetBackup commands on page 214.
About running NetBackup commands

NetBackup administrators can use multiple methods to execute NetBackup
commands from the restricted NetBackup Appliance shell. NetBackup administrators
can use a base command name, an absolute or a relative path, or execute
commands from shell scripts.
The following are examples of how a NetBackup administrator can run NetBackup
commands from the restricted NetBackup Appliance shell:
Using a base command name. For example,
# bpps
# nbemmcmd listhosts
Using an absolute or a relative path. You must specify sudo before the command
in this case. For example,
# sudo /usr/openv/netbackup/bin/bpps
# sudo /usr/openv/netbackup/bin/admincmd/nbemmcmd -listhosts
Execute from shell scripts. You must specify sudo before you use a command.
That applies to a base command name, an absolute path, or a relative path.
See About creating a NetBackup touch file on page 215.

See About operating systems commands on page 217.
See About best practices on page 217.
See About known limitations on page 218.
214

About creating a NetBackup touch file

A NetBackup administrator can use the cp-nbu-config command to create and
edit a NetBackup touch configuration file in any of the following directories:
/usr/openv/netbackup
/usr/openv/netbackup/bin
/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/snapcfg
/usr/openv/netbackup/db/config
/usr/openv/netbackup/db/event
/usr/openv/netbackup/db/images
/usr/openv/netbackup/db/media
/usr/openv/netbackup/ext/db_ext
/usr/openv/netbackup/ext/db_ext/db2
/usr/openv/lib/ost-plugins
/usr/openv/volmgr
/usr/openv/volmgr/database
/usr/openv/var
For example, to create a touch file called DEFERRED_IMAGE_LIMIT in the

/usr/openv/netbackup/db/config directory, use the following steps:
Create a file with that name in the NetBackup administrator home directory or
a subdirectory.
Use the cp-nbu-config configuration-file target-directory command

to add the desired content to the touch file. For example:
cp-nbu-config DEFERRED_IMAGE_LIMIT /usr/openv/netbackup/db/config

Loading the NetBackup notify scripts

The cp-nbu-notify utility is similar to cp-nbu-config utility that is added to the
NetBackup Appliance to modify the NetBackup notify scripts, like the start and
exit notification scripts to be run after each job.
215

The NetBackup CLI users can modify the notify scripts from the following script
locations:
/usr/openv/netbackup/bin
/usr/openv/volmgr/bin
Note: The cp-nbu-notify assumes that the notify script pre-exists either in the
actual location as a sample file or its goodies directory as a template. If a sample
or template notify script does not exist in these directories, then the script that you
may try to load is not considered valid.
To install or edit the notify scripts:
Login to the appliance as a NetBackupCLI user and then create the notify script
in the home directory.
Enter cp-nbu-notify command to install the script:

cp-nbu-notify <notify-script>
The appliance displays the following messages:

NetBackup Appliance admin must review and
approve this operation.
Enter admin password:
When the command prompts for admin password, enter the Appliance admin
password (not the NetBackupCLI password). The password is needed for
security purpose to make sure that the notify script is approved by the Appliance
admin.
When the password is successfully verified the notify script is automatically
loaded in the right location.
Note: The source notify script must exist in the home directory or its
subdirectory.
Caution: You can only copy the notify scripts. Not any other scripts in the NetBackup
install path. Execution of any external script through the notify script can lead to a
security issue.
216

About operating systems commands

The following rules apply to the operating system commands:
The following commands were available in the previous releases are still
available:
awk, bash, cat, clear, cut, grep, head, ls, rm, sudo, uname, vi
The commands that are useful for scripting :

date, mkdir, rmdir, touch, whoami, hostname, and so forth
A NetBackup administrator can use the passwd command to change their

password.
To perform a host name lookup you must use the host command. The nslookup
command is not supported.

About best practices

The following list provides examples of how you, a NetBackup administrator, can
configure an appliance so you can run NetBackup commands from the restricted
shell.
You can only create files and directories in user home directory and the
subdirectories.
An auto-generated alias file is created in the user home directory that contains
a sudo alias for all the NetBackup commands. Thus, when you use a base
command name you do not need to specify sudo when you run the command.
The alias file is not honored when you run a command in a script. You must
specify sudo before you can use the command.
You can create a file that contains variables for all NetBackup commands with
sudo prefix. The variable can be used in the automation scripts to avoid use of
sudo for every NetBackup command invocation. The variable file can be sourced
in the scripts. For example:
The following command enables you to use the variable ${bpps}.

bpps=sudo /usr/openv/netbackup/bin/bpps
The following command enables you to use the variable ${nbemmcmd}.

nbemmcmd=sudo /usr/openv/netbackup/bin/admincmd/nbemmcmd
217

A cdnbu alias is available for you to use to change directory to a NetBackup

install path. That alias takes you to the /usr/openv/ directory.

About known limitations

The following list identifies the known limitations that a NetBackup administrator
should understand before they use this feature:
You cannot edit the bp.conf file directly using an editor. To edit the bp.conf
file you must use the bpsetconfig command to set an attribute within the file.
You cannot modify or create NetBackup notify scripts.
The nslookup command is not supported.
You cannot use the man command. To see the usage of a command, use the
help option that is provided with the command.
The operating system commands that are used to perform appliance

management are not supported.

Creating NetBackup administrator user accounts

NetBackup Appliance administrators can use the following procedure to create new
NetBackup administrator user accounts. These user accounts have permissions
to log on to the appliance and run NetBackup commands with superuser privileges.
To create a NetBackup administrator user account
Open an SSH session on the appliance.
Log on as admin.
218

Enter the following command to create a NetBackup administrator user account:

Main > Manage > NetBackupCLI > Create UserName
Where UserName is the name that you designate for the new user. In addition,
you can only create one user account at a time.
You must then enter a new password for the new user account.
Veritas recommends that the new password is a mix of upper and lowercase
letters, digits, and other characters to increase the strength of the password.
In addition, you are asked to enter the password a second time for validation
purposes.
After the new user account is created, a confirmation message appears stating
the new user account was created successfully.
See the NetBackup Appliance Command Reference Guide for additional information
about this command and its use.
Logging on as a NetBackup administrator

After a NetBackup administrator account has been created for you, you can log
onto the appliance using the new account credentials.
Logging onto an appliance as a NetBackup administrator
Enter the user name and password that was created for your NetBackup
administrator account to log on to the appliance.
The following welcome message appears after you have successfully logged
into the appliance as a NetBackup administrator.
Welcome NetBackup CLI Administrator to the NetBackup Appliance
To leave the session, type exit and press Return.

219


Managing NetBackup administrator user account

passwords
After the NetBackup Appliance administrator has created a NetBackup administrator
account, the appliance administrator can manage the password of that account
through the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
Table 4-2 describes the functions that you can perform as you manage your account
passwords.
Table 4-2
Function
Managing NetBackup administrator user account passwords

Command
The NetBackup Appliance administrator

Main > Manage > NetBackupCLI > PasswordExpiry Age
can specify a maximum number of days
UserName Days
that a password is valid for a user or users.
You use the Days variable to set the number of days the password is
valid. In addition, you use the UserName variable to specify the user or
users. Enter All to apply this setting to all users. You can also enter
Default to apply this setting to all new users accounts that were created
later.
Main > Manage > NetBackupCLI > PasswordExpiry Now
can force a password to expire immediately UserName
for one or more users.
You use the UserName variable to specify the user or users. Enter All
to expire the password for all users.
Main > Manage > NetBackupCLI > PasswordExpiry Show
can view the password expiry information. UserName
You use the UserName variable to specify the user or users. Enter All
to expire the password for all users. You can also enter Default to view
the default settings.
220

Table 4-2
221
Managing NetBackup administrator user account passwords

(continued)
Function
Command

can configure a warning period in which
you receive a warning before the password
expires. You can also configure one or
more users to receive the warning.
Main > Manage > NetBackupCLI > PasswordExpiry Warn

UserName Days
You use the Days variable to set the number of days or warning before
the password expires. In addition, you use the UserName variable to
specify the user or users who receive the warning. Enter All to apply the
setting to all users. You can also enter Default to specify the default
settings.
See Logging on as a NetBackup administrator on page 219.
Auditing NetBackup Administrator accounts

NetBackup Appliance administrators can monitor the activity of each NetBackup
administrator account. That means a NetBackup Appliance administrator can monitor
the NetBackup commands that a NetBackup administrator executes. To audit that
activity from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu, the NetBackup Appliance
administrator can run the following command.
Main > Support > Logs > Browse > cd OS > less messages.
If you run that command, an output similar to the following is shown. The following
example shows the NetBackup administrator, nbadmin, executed a bpps command
on an appliance named, nbappliance.
Aug 24 23:10:28 nbappliance sudo:
nbadmin : TTY=pts/1 ;
PWD=/home/nbusers ; USER=root ; COMMAND=/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/bpps


Deleting NetBackup administrator user accounts

NetBackup Appliance administrators can use the following procedure to delete
NetBackup administrator user accounts.
To delete a NetBackup administrator user account
Log on as admin.
Enter the following command to delete a user account:

Main > Manage > NetBackupCLI > Delete UserName
Where UserName is the name of an existing user account. In addition, you

can only delete one user account at a time.
After the user account is deleted, a confirmation message appears that states
the user account was deleted successfully.
about this command and it's use.
Viewing NetBackup administrator user accounts

NetBackup Appliance administrators can use the following procedure to view a list
of NetBackup administrator user accounts.
To view the current list of NetBackup administrator user accounts
Log on as admin.
Enter the following command to view the existing user accounts:

Main > Manage > NetBackupCLI > List
All of the existing user account names appear.

about this command and it's use.
222


Auto Image Replication is the ability to replicate backups that are generated in one
NetBackup domain to storage in other NetBackup domains, often across various
geographical sites.
You can perform Auto Image Replication between appliances in the following
manner:
Auto Image Replication between NetBackup appliances

More information on how to perform Auto Image Replication between NetBackup
appliances is available.
See About Auto Image Replication between NetBackup appliances on page 223.
Auto Image Replication between NetBackup appliances and deduplication

appliances
More information on how to perform Auto Image Replication between a
NetBackup appliance and a deduplication appliance is available.
See About Auto Image Replication between NetBackup appliances and
deduplication appliances on page 228.
About Auto Image Replication between NetBackup appliances

The backups that are generated in one NetBackup domain can be replicated to
storage in one or more NetBackup domains. This process is referred to as Auto
Image Replication. You can configure Auto Image Replication between two
NetBackup appliances.
To configure Auto Image Replication between two NetBackup appliances, you need
to perform the following tasks:
Step
No.
Task
Reference
1.
Establish trust between the two

master servers
See Adding a trusted master server

on page 224.
223

Step
No.
Task
Reference
2.
Review the prerequisites for Auto

Image Replication.
See Prerequisites for Auto Image Replication

on page 225.
3.
Configure the replication target
See Configuring a replication target

on page 225.
4.
Configure storage lifecycle policy on See the section named 'Creating a storage
source and target domains
lifecycle policy' in NetBackup Administrator's
Guide, Volume I.
Adding a trusted master server

You can configure a trust relationship between multiple NetBackup domains. To
do so, in a source domain you specify the remote master servers with which you
want to add a trust relationship. Use the following procedure in the source domain
to add a remote master server as a trusted master server.
A trust relationship between domains helps with replication operations.
Note: If either the source or remote master server is clustered, you must enable
inter-node communication on all of the nodes in the cluster. Do so before you add
the trusted master server.
To add a trusted master server
In the NetBackup Administration Console, expand NetBackup Management

> Host Properties > Master Servers in the left pane.
In the right pane, select the master server.
On the Actions menu, click Properties.
In the properties dialog box left pane, select Servers.
In the Servers dialog box, select the Trusted Master Servers tab.
224

On the Trusted Master Servers tab, click Add.

The Add a New Trusted Master Server dialog box appears.
The following is an example of the dialog box:
In the Add a New Trusted Master Server dialog box, enter the following and
then click OK:
The fully-qualified host name of the remote master server.
The logon account User name of the remote master server host.
The Password for the logon account of the remote master server host.
Repeat step 6 and step 7 for each master server with which you want to add
a trust relationship.
When you finish adding trusted master servers, click OK.
Prerequisites for Auto Image Replication

The following prerequisites must be followed before you set up replication
configuration between NetBackup appliances:
The target storage server type must be the same that is configured in the target
master server domain.
The target storage server name must be the same that is configured in the target
Configuring a replication target

Use the following procedure to configure a replication target in the source domain.
225

To configure a replication target
In the NetBackup Administration Console in the source NetBackup domain,

expand Media and Device Management > Credentials > Storage Server.
Select the source storage server.
On the Edit menu, select Change.
In the Change Storage Server dialog box, select the Replication tab.
Select a trusted master server and a replication target.

In the Target Master Server drop-down list, select the master server of the
domain to which you want to replicate data. All trusted master servers are in
the drop-down list.
In the Storage Server Type drop-down list, select the type of target storage
server. All available target types are in the drop-down list.
The target storage server type must be the same that is configured in the target
In the Storage Server Name field, enter the shortname of the target storage
server.
You must enter the target storage server name that is configured in the target
In the Deduplication Server Name field, enter the name of the deduplication
server.
Note: The Deduplication Server Name and User Name fields may be
pre-populated in some scenarios.
Enter the User name and Password for the the target appliance's deduplication
storage server.
Password: appliance dedupe password
Use the following procedure to determine the Appliance deduplication password.

See Determining the appliance deduplication password on page 227.
226

10 Click Add. You can now see the new replication target in the Replication
Targets section at the top.
Click OK.
11 You must refresh the disk pool after setting up a replication target. In the
NetBackup Administration Console, in the left pane, expand Media and
Device Management Devices > Disk Pools. In the right pane, select the disk
pool you want to update. In the Change Disk Pool dialog box, click Refresh
to configure the replication settings for the disk pool.
Once you have configured a replication target, you can configure storage lifecycle
policies on source and target domains. For more information about configuring
storage lifecycle policies, refer to the section named 'Creating a storage lifecycle
policy' in NetBackup Administrator's Guide, Volume I for UNIX, Windows, and Linux.
Determining the appliance deduplication password

The following credentials are required to configure Auto Image Replication between
appliances.
username: user_name
password: appliance dedupe password
To determine the appliance deduplication password
Log on to the target appliance and enter into the appliance shell menu.
From the Main_Menu prompt, enter the following:

Appliance > ShowDedupPassword
This command shows the password for the deduplication solution that is
configured on the appliance. The deduplication password appears on the
screen.
Note: If you changed the deduplication password, the appliance shell menu does
not display the new password. The ShowDedupPassword option only displays the
original password that was created during the installation process.
Note: If your configuration has an appliance master server and one or more
appliance media servers, the deduplication password is the same for all servers.
In this case, use the appliance master servers shell menu to retrieve the
deduplication password.
227

For more information about Auto Image Replication, refer to the NetBackup
Administrator's Guide, Volume I for UNIX and Linux or the NetBackup
Administrator's Guide, Volume I for Windows.
About Auto Image Replication between NetBackup appliances and

deduplication appliances
The backups that are generated in NetBackup appliances can be replicated to the
storage pools in one or more deduplication appliances. You can configure Auto
Image Replication from a NetBackup appliance on one domain to a deduplication
appliance on another domain.
To configure Auto Image Replication from a NetBackup appliance to a deduplication
appliance, you are required to enter the user name and password for the target
deduplication appliance.
The following credentials are required to configure Auto Image Replication from a
NetBackup appliance to a deduplication appliance:
username: root
password: P@ssw0rd or a custom password that you have configured for the
SPA (Storage Pool Authority)

For more information about Auto Image Replication, refer to the NetBackup
Administrator's Guide, Volume I for UNIX, Windows and Linux.
228
Chapter
Understanding the
NetBackup appliance
settings
About modifying the appliance settings
Settings > Notifications
Settings > Network
Settings > Date and Time
Settings > Authentication
Settings > Password Management

After you have successfully configured your appliance you can use the NetBackup
Appliance Web Console and the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu to change various
settings for your appliance. You can use the Settings tab in the NetBackup
Appliance Web Console to view and configure the following settings.
Table 5-1 describes the settings that are available from Settings > Configuration
menu:
Understanding the NetBackup appliance settings

Table 5-1
Settings > Notification
Sub Menu
Lets you...
Topic
Alert configuration
Configure the SNMP, SMTP, See Settings > Notifications

and Call Home settings.
> Alert Configuration
on page 231.
Registration
Register the details of your

appliance and your contact
information.
See Settings > Notification >

Registration on page 246.
Table 5-2 describes the settings that are available from Settings > Network menu:
Table 5-2
Settings > Network
Sub Menu
Lets you...
Topic
Network
View and change network

configuration settings.
See Settings > Network >

Network Settings
on page 250.
Host
Configure the host name, for See Settings > Network >
either DNS or non-DNS
Host on page 273.
systems
See Changing DNS and Host
Name Resolution (non-DNS)
configuration settings
on page 274.
Fibre Transport Configuration Configure fibre transport

settings for your appliance.
See Settings > Network >

Fibre Transport on page 265.
See Configuring the SAN
Client Fibre Transport
settings on page 268.
Table 5-3 describes the settings that are available from the Settings > Password
menu:
Table 5-3
Settings > Password
Sub Menu
Lets you...
Topic
Password
Change the admin password See Settings > Password

for your appliance.
Management on page 304.
Table 5-4 describes the settings that are available from the Settings > Date and
Time menu:
230

Table 5-4
Sub Menu
Lets you...
Topic
Date and Time Configuration Change the date and time on See Settings > Date and
your appliance.
Time on page 276.
Table 5-5 describes the settings that are available from Settings > Authentication
menu:
Table 5-5
Setting > Authentication
Sub Menu
Lets you...
Authentication
Manage the following three See Settings >

types of user authentication: Authentication on page 284.
User Management
LDAP
Active Directory
Kerberos-NIS
Add new local users and

create user groups for
accessing your appliance.
Topic
See Settings >

Authentication > User
Management on page 298.

The Settings > Notifications menu displays the following tabs:
Alert Configuration - enables you to provide the SMTP, SNMP, and Call Home
settings. See Settings > Notifications > Alert Configuration on page 231.
Registration - enables you to register the appliance and your contact information.
See Settings > Notification > Registration on page 246.
Settings > Notifications > Alert Configuration

The Settings > Notifications > Alert Configuration page provides you with one
location from where you can enable SNMP, SMTP, and Call Home alert notifications.
The page is divided into three sections each dedicated to enable and provide details
for SNMP, SMTP, and Call Home.
Under Alert Configuration is the Notification Interval field. You must enter the
time interval in minutes between two subsequent notifications for the SNMP and
the SMTP configurations. The time interval should be in multiples of 15 and it should
not be zero.
231

Configuring SNMP
Table 5-6 lists the fields from the SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
section.
Table 5-6
SNMP Server Configuration settings
Fields
Description
Enable SNMP Alert
Select this check box to enable SNMP alert configuration.
SNMP Server
Enter the SNMP Server host name. You can enter a host name or
an IP address to define this computer. The IP address can be an
IPv4 or IPv6 address. Only global-scope and unique-local IPv6
addresses are allowed.
Notification of the alerts or traps that are generated in Appliance
are sent to this SNMP manager.
Note: The NetBackup Appliance supports all the SNMP servers in

the market. However, the ManageEngine SNMP server and the
HP OpenView SNMP server are tested and certified for version 2.6.
See About IPv4-IPv6-based network support on page 275.
SNMP Port
Enter the SNMP Server port number. If you do not enter anything
for this variable, then the default port is 162.
Note: Your firewall must allow access from the appliance to the
SNMP server through this port.
SNMP Community
Enter the community to which the alerts or traps are sent. For
example, Backup Reporting Department.
You can enter a value that you configured on your SNMP server.
For example, you can enter a company name or a name like,
admin_group, public, or private. If you do not enter anything,
then the default value is public.
The SNMP MIB file serves as a data dictionary that is used to assemble and interpret
SNMP messages. If you configure SNMP, you must import the MIB file into the
monitoring software so that the software can interpret the SNMP traps. You can
check the details of the MIB file from the SNMP Server Configuration pane. To
check details about the SNMP MIB file, click View SNMP MIB file. An SNMP MIB
file opens.
For information on how to send a test SNMP trap after configuration, see the
following tech note on the Veritas Support website:
www.veritas.com/docs/TECH208354
232

Configuring SMTP
The SMTP mail server protocol is used for outgoing Email. You can configure SMTP
from the NetBackup Appliance Web Console (Settings > Alert Configuration >
SMTP Server Configuration).
You can also use the following command in the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu
to configure the SMTP server and add a new Email account:
Main_Menu > Settings > Alerts > Email SMTP Add Server [Account]
[Password], where Server is the host name of the target SMTP server that is used
to send emails. [Account] and [Password] are optional parameters to identify the
name of the account and the account password if authentication is required.
For more information, see the NetBackup Appliance Command Reference Guide.
Table 5-7 lists the fields from the SMTP section of the NetBackup Appliance Web
Console.
Table 5-7
SMTP Server Configuration settings
Fields
Description
SMTP Server
Enter the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) Server host name.
Notifications of the alerts that are generated in Appliance are sent
using this SMTP server. The IP address can be an IPv4 or IPv6
address. Only global-scope and unique-local IPv6 addresses are
allowed.
Software
Administrator Email
Enter the Email ID of the software administrator, to receive software

alerts that are specific to the Veritas NetBackup Appliance software.
This Email ID that you designate receives alerts for the following
software conditions:
Hardware
Administrator Email
Host information such as:

Disk information.
Overall backup status.
Results of last seven backups for each client.
An Email of your catalog backup disaster recovery file.
A patch installation success report.
Enter the Email ID of the hardware administrator, to receive

hardware alerts that are specific to the Veritas NetBackup Hardware
Appliance. For example, [email protected]
See About Email notification from a NetBackup appliance
on page 44. for more information about potential hardware alerts.
233

Table 5-7
SMTP Server Configuration settings (continued)
Fields
Description
Sender Email
Enter the Email ID to receive any replies to the alerts or the reports
that are sent by the Appliance.
SMTP Account
Enter the user name to access the SMTP account.
Note: You maybe asked to enter a user name as some SMTP

servers may require user name and password credentials to send
an email.
Password
Enter the password for the above mentioned SMTP user account.
Note: You maybe asked to enter a password as some SMTP

servers may require user name and password credentials to send
an email.
You can configure this server to send email reports to a proxy server or to the
Veritas Call Home server.
The following describes the supported proxy servers:
Squid
Apache
TMG
Note: NTLM authentication in the proxy configuration is also supported.

Starting with NetBackup Appliance 2.6.1.1, all email notifications that get generated
by the appliance use the same SMTP settings. These emails include hardware
monitoring notifications and NetBackup job notifications. The configuration settings
are located under Settings > Notification > Alert Configuration in the NetBackup
Appliance Web Console or Main_Menu > Settings > Alerts in the NetBackup
Appliance Shell Menu. These settings override any previous SMTP setup you may
have previously used to send NetBackup job notifications.
Note: If you had already configured the appliance SMTP settings before you
upgraded to NetBackup Appliance 2.6.1.1, you may need to re-save the configuration
in order for NetBackup to use it. In the NetBackup Appliance Web Console, go to
Settings > Notification > Alert Configuration and click Save. Or in the NetBackup
Appliance Shell Menu, go to Main_Menu > Settings > Alerts and resubmit the
SMTP and SenderID settings.
234

Configuring Call Home

Table 5-8 lists the fields from the Call Home Configuration section.
Table 5-8
Call Home Configuration settings
Fields
Description
Enable Call Home
Select this check box to enable Call Home alert configuration.
Enable Proxy Server Select this check box to enable proxy.

Enable Proxy
Tunneling
Select this check box if your proxy server supports SSL tunneling.
Proxy Server
Enter the name of the proxy server.
Proxy Port
Enter the port number of the proxy server.
Proxy Username
Enter the user name to log into the proxy server.
Proxy Password
Enter the password for the user name to log into the proxy server.
When Call Home is enabled, you can test whether or not Call Home is working
correctly by clicking the Test Call Home option that is available below the Call
Home configuration settings.
Note: The Test Call Home option is active on the NetBackup Appliance Web
Console only when Call Home is enabled.
The following describes the supported proxy servers:
Squid
Apache
TMG
NTLM is the supported authentication method for CallHome proxy settings.
Configuring Alert Configuration settings

This section provides the procedure to configure the SNMP, SMTP, and Call Home
server settings using the Settings > Notification > Alert Configuration page.
235

To configure the SNMP, SMTP, and Call Home server settings
Click Settings > Notification > Alert Configuration.

The system displays the Alert Configuration page.
The Alert Configuration page is divided into three sections to enable and
provide details for SNMP, SMTP, and Call Home.
In the Notification Interval field enter the time interval in minutes between
two subsequent notifications, for SNMP, SMTP, and Call Home alert
configurations.
Enter the SNMP settings in the provided fields. A description of the SNMP
parameters is available in Table 5-6.
Enter the SMTP settings in the provided fields. A description of the SMTP
parameters is available in Table 5-7.
The appliance uses the global server settings to send email notifications to the
SMTP server that you specify.
Enter the Call Home settings in the provided fields. A description of the Call
Home parameters is available in Table 5-8.
Click Save, to save the SNMP, SMTP, and Call Home settings.
About SNMP
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol
that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices.
It uses either the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) or the User Datagram
Protocol (UDP) for transport, depending on configuration. SNMP enables network
administrators to manage network performance, find and solve network problems,
and plan for network growth.
SNMP is based on the manager model and agent model. This model consists of a
manager, an agent, a database of management information, managed objects, and
the network protocol.
The manager provides the interface between the human network manager and the
management system. The agent provides the interface between the manager and
the physical devices being managed.
The manager and agent use a Management Information Base (MIB) and a relatively
small set of commands to exchange information. The MIB is organized in a tree
structure with individual variables, such as point status or description, being
represented as leaves on the branches. A numeric tag or object identifier (OID) is
used to distinguish each variable uniquely in the MIB and in SNMP messages.
236

NetBackup Appliance 2.7.3 supports SNMP v2.
About the Management Information Base (MIB)

Each SNMP element manages specific objects with each object having specific
characteristics. Each object and characteristic has a unique object identifier (OID)
that is associated with it. Each OID consists of the numbers that are separated by
decimal points (for example, 1.3.6.1.4.1.2682.1).
These OIDs form a tree. A MIB associates each OID with a readable label and
various other parameters that are related to the object. The MIB then serves as a
data dictionary that is used to assemble and interpret SNMP messages. This
information is saved as a MIB file.
You can check the details of the SNMP MIB file from the Settings > Notifications
> Alert Configuration page of the NetBackup Appliance Web Console. To configure
the appliance SNMP manager to receive hardware monitoring related traps, click
View SNMP MIB file in the SNMP Server Configuration pane.
You can also view the SNMP MIB file with the Settings > Alerts > SNMP ShowMIB
command in the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
About Call Home

Your appliance can connect with a Veritas AutoSupport server and upload hardware
and software information. Veritas support uses this information to resolve any issues
that you might report. The appliance uses the HTTPS protocol and uses port 443
to connect to the Veritas AutoSupport server. This feature of the appliance is referred
to as Call Home. It is enabled by default.
AutoSupport in appliance uses the data that is gathered by Call Home to provide
proactive monitoring for the appliance. If Call Home is enabled, the appliance
uploads hardware and software information (or the Call Home data) to Veritas
AutoSupport server periodically at an interval of 24 hours by default.
If you determine that you have a problem with a piece of hardware, you might want
to contact Veritas support. The Technical Support engineer uses the serial number
of your appliance and assesses the hardware status from the Call Home data. To
know the serial number of your appliance from theNetBackup Appliance Web
Console, go to the Monitor > Hardware > Health details page. To determine the
serial number of your appliance using the shell menu, go to the Monitor > Hardware
commands. For more information about the Monitor > Hardware commands, refer
to the NetBackup Appliance Command Reference Guide.
Use the Settings > Notification page to configure Call Home from the NetBackup
Appliance Web Console. Click Alert Configuration and enter the details in the
Call Home Configuration pane.
237

Table 5-9 describes how a hardware failure is reported when the feature is enabled
or disabled.
Table 5-9
What happens when Call Home is enabled or disabled
Monitoring status
Hardware failure routine
Call Home enabled
When a hardware failure occurs, the following sequence of

alerts occur:
Call Home disabled
The appliance uploads all the monitored hardware and

software information to a Veritas AutoSupport server. The
list following the table contains all the relevant information.
The appliance generates 3 kinds of email alerts to the
configured email address.
An error message by email to notify you of the
hardware failure once an error is detected.
A resolved message by email to inform you of any
hardware failure once an error is resolved.
A 24-hour summary by email to summarize all of the
currently unresolved errors in the recent 24 hours.
The appliance also generates an SNMP trap.
No data is sent to the Veritas AutoSupport server. Your

system does not report hardware errors to Veritas to enable
faster problem resolution.
The following list contains all the information that is monitored and sent to Veritas
AutoSupport server for analysis.
CPU
Disk
Fan
Power supply
RAID group
Temperatures
Adapter
PCI
Fibre Channel HBA
Network card
Partition information
238

MSDP statistics
Storage connections
Storage status
52xx Storage Shelf - Status of disk, fan, power supply, and temperature
5330 Primary Storage Shelf - Status of disk, fan, power supply, temperature,
battery backup unit (BBU), controller, volume, and volume group
5330 Expansion Storage Shelf - Status of disk, fan, power supply, and
temperature
NetBackup Appliance software version
NetBackup version
Appliance model
Appliance configuration
Firmware versions
Appliance, storage, and hardware component serial numbers

See Hardware components that are monitored on page 39.
See Settings > Notifications > Alert Configuration on page 231.

See Configuring Call Home from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu on page 239.
See About AutoSupport on page 247.
Configuring Call Home from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu

You can configure the Call Home details from the Settings > Notification page.
You can configure the following Call Home settings from the NetBackup Appliance
Shell Menu:
Enabling and disabling Call Home from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu
Configuring a Call Home proxy server from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu
Testing whether or not Call Home works correctly by running the Settings >
Alerts > CallHome > Test command.
If you enable Call Home, you can use the Settings > Alerts > CallHome
Registration command to configure the contact details for your appliance by
entering the following information:
The name of the person who is the first point of contact and responsible for the
appliance.
239

The address of the contact person.
The phone number of the contact person.
The email address of the contact person.
To learn more about the Main > Settings > Alerts > CallHome commands,
refer to theNetBackup Appliance Commands Reference Guide.
For a list of the hardware problems that cause an alert, see the following topics:
See About Email notification from a NetBackup appliance on page 44.
Enabling and disabling Call Home from the NetBackup Appliance Shell
Menu
You can enable or disable Call Home from both, the NetBackup Appliance Web
Console and the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu. Call Home is enabled by default.
To enable or disable Call Home from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu
To enable Call Home, run the Main > Settings > Alerts > CallHome
Enable command.
To disable Call Home, run the Main > Settings > Alerts > CallHome
Disable command.
For more information on Main > Settings > Alerts > CallHome commands,
refer to the NetBackup Appliance Command Reference Guide.
Configuring a Call Home proxy server from the NetBackup Appliance

Shell Menu
You can configure a proxy server for Call Home, if required. If the appliance
environment has a proxy server between the environment and external Internet
access, you must enable the proxy settings on the appliance. The proxy settings
include both a proxy server and a port. The proxy server must accept https
connections from the Veritas AutoSupport server. This option is disabled by default.
To add a Call Home proxy server from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu
Log on to NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
To enable proxy settings, run the Main > Settings > Alerts > CallHome
Proxy Enable command.
To add a proxy server, run the Main > Settings > Alerts > CallHome
Proxy Add command.
240

You are prompted to enter the name of the proxy server. The proxy server
name is the TCP/IP address or the fully qualified domain name of the proxy
server.
After you have entered a name for the proxy server, you are prompted to
enter the port number for the proxy server.
Further, you are required to answer the following:

Do you want to set credentials for proxy server? (yes/no)
On answering yes, you are prompted to enter a user name for the proxy
server.
After you have entered the user name, you are prompted to enter a
password for the user. On entering the required information, the following
message is displayed:
Successfully set proxy server
To disable proxy settings, run the Main > Settings > Alerts > CallHome
Proxy Disable command.
Further, you can also use the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu to enable or disable
proxy server tunneling for your appliance. To do so, run the Main > Settings >
CallHome Proxy EnableTunnel and Main > Settings > Alerts > CallHome
Proxy DisableTunnel commands. Proxy server tunneling lets you provide a secure
path through an untrusted network.
Understanding the Call Home workflow

This section explains the mechanism that Call Home uses to upload data from your
appliance to the Veritas AutoSupport server.
Call Home uses HTTPS (secure and encrypted protocol) with port number 443 for
all communication with Veritas AutoSupport servers. For Call Home to work correctly,
ensure that your appliance has Internet access either directly, or through a proxy
server to reach the Veritas AutoSupport servers. AutoSupport, a mechanism that
monitors the appliance proactively, uses the Call Home data to analyze and resolve
any issues that the appliance may encounter.
All communications are initiated by the appliance. Your appliance needs access to
https://receiver.appliance.veritas.com.
The appliance Call Home feature uses the following workflow to communicate with
AutoSupport servers:
Access a port to https://receiver.appliance.veritas.com every 24 hours.
241

Perform a self-test operation to https://receiver.appliance.veritas.com.
If the appliance encounters an error state, all hardware logs from past three
days are gathered along with the current log.
The logs are then uploaded to the Veritas AutoSupport server for further analysis
and support. These error logs are also stored on the appliance. You can access
these logs from /log/upload/<date> folder.
If the error state persists three days later, the logs will be re-uploaded.

About the Product Improvement Program

The NetBackup Appliance Product Improvement Program uses Call Home to capture
installation deployment and product usage information. The information that Veritas
receives becomes part of a continuous quality improvement program that helps
understand how customers configure, deploy, and use the product. This information
is then used to help Veritas identify improvements in product features, testing,
technical support, and future requirements.
You can enable or disable the Product Improvement Program from the NetBackup
Appliance Shell Menu. This option is not available from the NetBackup Appliance
Web Console.
The Product Improvement Program is enabled by default. However, if you have
disabled Call Home, the Product Improvement Program is also disabled. You cannot
enable the Product Improvement Program without Call Home.
To enable or disable the Product Improvement Program from the NetBackup
Log on to the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu
To enable the Product Improvement Program, run the Main > Settings >
Alerts > CallHome NBInventory Enable command.
To disable the Product Improvement Program, run the Main > Settings >
Alerts > CallHome NBInventory Disable command.
For more information on the Main > Settings > Alerts > CallHome commands,
Settings > Notifications > Login Banner

The Settings > Notifications > Login Banner page lets you create a customized
text banner that appears when you access the appliance. After you create and
242

configure the login banner, it appears in both the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu
and the NetBackup Appliance Web Console. You can use the login banner to
communicate important information to users, such as a corporate security policy.
Use the Display Login Banner check box to turn on and off the login banner.
By default, the login banner appears when anyone tries to access an
appliance-specific interface. You can choose to have the login banner appears in
the NetBackup Console by selecting the Apply changes in NetBackup check box.
The login banner consists of the following two elements:
Login Banner Heading
250 characters maximum
Standard English alphabet
Login Banner Text
Unlimited characters
Standard English alphabet
Before you click Save, make sure to click Preview to see how your changes appear
in the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
Note: None of the login banner settings on this page take effect until you click Save.
See Creating the appliance login banner on page 243.
See Removing the appliance login banner on page 245.
Creating the appliance login banner

The following procedures describe how to set the appliance login banner using the
To enable and create a new login banner using the NetBackup Appliance Web
Console
Log onto the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
Click Settings > Notifications > Login Banner.
Select the Display Login Banner check box.

Note: The Login Banner Heading and Login Banner Text fields are only
activated if Display Login Banner is checked.
243

Enter the desired text in the Login Banner Heading and the Login Banner
Text fields.
Click Preview to review your changes.
Select the Apply changes in NetBackup check box if you want the same
login banner to appear in the NetBackup Administration Console.
Click Save.
When the confirmation dialog window appears, click Yes to apply the changes,
or click No to continue making changes.
Once the login banner is enabled, you can go back and make changes. New
changes are only applied if you click Save.
To enable and create a new login banner using the NetBackup Appliance Shell
Menu
Log onto the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
Run the Main > Settings > Notifications > LoginBanner Set command.
Enter a banner heading, and then press Enter.
Enter the banner message text.

Once you have entered the banner message, type end on a new line and press
Enter.
A preview of the login banner appears with the following message:

The existing login banner will be overwritten and the SSH daemon
will be restarted. Do you want to proceed? [y, n]: (y)
Type y and press Enter to set the login banner. Type n and press Enter to
cancel any changes and exit the login banner configuration.

Do you want to use this banner for the NetBackup Administration
Console as well? (Any existing Netbackup login banner will be
overwritten.) [y, n]: (y)
Type y and press Enter to set the login banner in the NetBackup Administration
Console. Type n and press Enter to continue without changing the NetBackup
login banner.
Once the login banner is enabled, you cannot make individual changes to it using
the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu. However, you can run the LoginBanner Set
command again and overwrite the existing banner with one that contains your
244

desired changes. Alternatively, you can use the NetBackup Appliance Web Console
to make individual changes.
For more information on the login banner commands, refer to the NetBackup
Appliance Command Reference Guide.
Removing the appliance login banner

The following procedures describe how to remove the appliance login banner using
the NetBackup Appliance Web Console and the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
To remove the login banner using the NetBackup Appliance Web Console
Log onto the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
Click Settings > Notifications > Login Banner.
Uncheck the Display Login Banner check box.
Select the Apply changes in NetBackup check box if you want to remove
the login banner from the NetBackup Administration Console as well.
Click Save.
When the confirmation dialog window appears, click Yes to remove the login
banner, or click No to continue making changes.
To remove the login banner using the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu
Log onto theNetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
Run the Main > Settings > Notifications > LoginBanner Remove
command.
When the following message appears, select the appropriate action:

The existing login banner will be removed and the SSH daemon
will be restarted. Do you want to proceed? [y, n]: (y)
Type y and press Enter to remove the login banner. Type n and press Enter
to cancel.
When the following message appears, select the appropriate action:

Do you want to remove the login banner from the NetBackup
Administration Console as well? [y, n]: (y)
Type y and press Enter to remove the NetBackup login banner. Type n and
press Enter to leave the banner set in the NetBackup Administration Console.
For more information on the login banner commands, refer to the NetBackup
Appliance Command Reference Guide.
245

Settings > Notification > Registration

You can register an appliance and enter your contact information from the
Registration tab that is available under the Settings > Notification menu.
Registration of your NetBackup appliance helps to make sure that you are alerted
to product updates and other important information about your appliance.
You may also complete the registration while configuring your appliance or in
advance of installation from the MyAppliance portal at
https://my.appliance.veritas.com. The MyAppliance portal offers more detail and
contact information options than the other registration methods. Visit the portal for
additional information.
This topic provides the necessary data entry fields to register an appliance with
Veritas from the Registration tab of the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
Table 5-10 describes the data entry fields that are related to specific information
sections and the type of information to enter in the fields.
Table 5-10
Data entry fields for the appliance registration
Section and related field name
Description
Provide the appliance name that we can refer to in our communications with you.
Appliance Name
Enter a name for the appliance.
Provide the details of the physical location of the appliance.

Company Name
Enter your company name.
Street
Enter the name of the street, where the appliance

is located.
City
Enter the name of the city, where the appliance

is located.
State or Province
Enter the name of the state, where the appliance

is located.
Zip or Postal Code
Enter the ZIP Code.
Country
Enter the name of the country, where the

appliance is located.
Provide the contact details of the official point of contact.

Contact Name
Enter the name of the primary contact in regard

to your appliance or your backup environment.
246

Table 5-10
Data entry fields for the appliance registration (continued)
Section and related field name
Description
Contact Number
Enter the primary phone number for the contact

name. This number should be the one that is most
likely to reach the contact person.
Contact Email
Enter the business email address for the Contact

Name that you identified earlier.
If your appliance is provisioned and has Internet connectivity, the registration details
populate automatically. If the appliance is not provisioned, the message to verify
and update the appliance registration information is displayed.
You can also register your appliance using the Main > Settings > Alerts >
CallHome Registration commands under the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
For more information, refer to the NetBackup Appliance Command Reference
Guide.
Moving an appliance from one physical location to another

To move an appliance from one physical location to another, consider the following
points to ensure continuance of maintenance and support coverage
Certain locations or regions of the world may not be enabled or set up to handle
field service calls for parts replacement.
Certain locations or regions may not be able to meet the defined Service Level
Agreement (SLA) contract(s) to which the appliance may be associated with.
Customers should not move an appliance to another country.
If it is imperative to move the appliance, you must contact your account access
team at Veritas to understand the ramifications or impact (if any) to the Service
agreements associated with the appliance.
After you have moved the appliance, it is critical to update your registration
details such as contact details and location information on the appliance to
ensure continuance of coverage.

See Settings > Notifications > Alert Configuration on page 231.
About AutoSupport
The AutoSupport feature lets you register the appliance and your contact details
at the Veritas support website . Veritas support uses this information to resolve any
247

issue that you report. The information allows Veritas support to minimize downtime
and provide a more proactive approach to support.
Provide the registration details for your appliance using one of the following
provisions:
The MyAppliance portal before you install the appliance
The appliance initial configuration on the Registration page
The NetBackup Appliance Web Console by navigating to Settings > Notification

> Registration page
The NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu by running the Settings > Alerts >
CallHome Registration command. For more information about this command,
You can register by entering the following basic information:
Name: Your name, company name
Address, where the appliance is physically located: City, street, state, ZIP Code
Contact information: Phone number, email address
The support infrastructure is designed to allow Veritas support to help you in the
following ways:
Proactive monitoring lets Veritas support to automatically create cases, fix issues,
and dispatch any appliance parts that might be at risk.
The AutoSupport infrastructure within Veritas analyzes the Call Home data from
appliance. This analysis provides proactive customer support for hardware
failures, reducing the need for backup administrators to initiate support cases.
With AutoSupport ability, Veritas support can begin to understand how customers
configure and use their appliances, and where improvements would be most
beneficial.
Send and receive status and alert notifications for the appliance.
Receive hardware and software status using Call Home.
Provide more insight into the issues and identify any issues that might further
occur as a result of the existing issue.
View reports from the Call Home data to analyze patterns of hardware failure,
and see usage trends. The appliance sends health data every 30 minutes.
The information that you provide for appliance registration helps Veritas support to
initiate resolution of any issue that you report. However, if you want to provide
additional details such as a secondary contact, phone, rack location, and so on,
you can visit https://my.veritas.com.
248

Settings > Network
See Settings > Notification > Registration on page 246.
Settings > Network

The Settings > Network menu displays the following tabs:
Network Settings - enables you to configure network and routing settings for
your appliance.
See Settings > Network > Network Settings on page 250.
Host - enables you to reconfigure your appliance's host settings.

See Settings > Network > Host on page 273.
Fibre Transport - enables you to reconfigure the Fibre Transport settings.

See Settings > Network > Fibre Transport on page 265.
You can also configure the network settings using the Main_Menu > Network
commands from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu. For more information refer
to the NetBackup Appliance Command Reference Guide.
VLAN configuration for NetBackup Appliances

Starting with NetBackup Appliance version 2.6.0.3, you can configure VLANs in
your existing network environments.
The concept of a Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is devised to logically partition
a physical network for creating multiple distinct broadcast domains. These broadcast
domains can be segmented on the basis of organization functions, teams within a
function, or applications. Although the properties of VLANs are same as those of
LANs, VLANs have pivotal advantages over the traditional LANs in the following
ways:
Allows the formation of virtual workgroups.
Enhances network performance.
Simplifies network administration.
Provides better security.
Reduces the overall costs of network management.
To configure VLAN for your appliance from the NetBackup Appliance Web Console,
use the Network tab on the Settings > Network page.
To configure VLAN from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu, run the Main_Menu>
Network > VLAN command.
249

Settings > Network
Settings > Network > Network Settings

The Settings > Network menu directs you to its default Network Settings page.
The Network Settings page enables you to configure and update the network
settings for your appliance. These network settings are applied at the time of initial
configuration.
The Network Settings page is divided into two panes. The first pane contains the
Interface Properties and Routing Properties tabs. The second pane contains
Network Configuration pane.
The taskbar underneath the Interface Properties tab enables you to complete the
following tasks:
Table 5-11
Taskbar elements under the Interface Properties tab
This function...
Lets you...
Filter by Network
Interface
Filter the network interface by its name. If you enter the name of
a physical interface in the field, the resultant displays information
for the physical interface along with information of any bond that
is created over the physical interface. For example, if eth2 is a part
of bond1, then the filter criteria for eth2 displays information for
bond1 too.
250

Settings > Network
Table 5-11
Taskbar elements under the Interface Properties tab (continued)
This function...
Lets you...
Edit
Edit network interface properties. Use this button to edit MTU,

remove an IP address, and assign an IP address on a selected
network interface.
Note: You must select a single network interface to edit its

properties. If you select multiple interfaces, the Edit button is
disabled.
You can edit the following properties depending on the type of
interface that is selected for editing:
MTU - Use to update the maximum transmission unit (MTU)

size for the selected interface.
Note: This field is available only for physical and bond

interfaces.
Description - Use to update the description for the selected

VLAN device.
Note: This field is available only for VLAN devices. Further,

the provision to add a description for the VLAN is available only
through theNetBackup Appliance Web Console.
Remove IP Interface - Use to remove an IP address.
Assign IP - Use to update or assign an IP address.

The Assign IP section lets you edit the following fields:
IP Address [IPv4] - Enter the IPv4 address.
Netmask IP Address [IPv4] - Enter netmask information

for the IPv4 address.
IP Address [IPv6] - Enter the IPv6 address.
Prefix size [IPv6] - Enter the prefix size for the IPv6
address.
Enable WAN optimization
Enables or disables WAN (wide area network) optimization for
individual network interfaces and network interface bonds.
See About WAN Optimization on page 254.
Delete
Delete multiple virtual interfaces. For example, bond1, bond2 or

vlan2, vlan3, vlan4.
Note: You cannot delete multiple network interfaces

simultaneously. Further, you cannot delete a physical interface.
In addition, you cannot delete an interface that is a part of a bond
or that has a VLAN tagged to it.
251

Settings > Network
The taskbar below the Routing Properties tab lets you delete routing information
for a selected network interface using the Delete button.
The Interface Properties tab and the Routing Properties tab provide the following
information:
Table 5-12
Interface Properties tab and Routing Properties tab information
Field names
Description
Interface Properties: Click this tab to view the existing network interface configuration
settings for the appliance.
Network Interface
Displays the NIC (network interface card ) number. For example,

eth1 or vlan1.
Note: A private interface (eth0) can not be edited from the

NetBackup Appliance Web Console. However, you can edit a
private interface from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
Note: On a NetBackup 5330 Appliance, the number of Ethernet

ports that you can edit on the Network Settings page depends
on the PCIe configuration of the appliance.
See NetBackup 5330 compute node Ethernet port configurations
on page 254.
Description
Displays information that is entered for a VLAN interface. For

example, HR domain, Finance domain.
IP Address [IPv4 or
IPv6]
Displays the IPv4 or the IPv6 address of the network connection.
Subnet Mask
Displays the subnet mask value that corresponds to the IP address.
Speed
Displays the current speed of the network connection. For example,

1Gb/s.
Cable State
Displays the status of the cable connection as Plugged or

Unplugged.
Link State
Displays the status of network connection as Up or Down.
Link Aggregation
Displays whether a physical interface is a part of a bond. If the

physical interface is a part of a bond, the field displays YES.
Reserved
Displays if the network is reserved or not.
WAN optimization
Displays the WAN optimization status of each network interface.

Status messages include Enabled or Disabled.
252

Settings > Network
Table 5-12
Interface Properties tab and Routing Properties tab information

(continued)
Field names
Description
VLAN
Display whether a VLAN is tagged to a network interface. If a VLAN

is tagged to a network interface the field displays YES.
Routing Properties: Click this tab to view the existing routing configuration settings for the
appliance.
Network Interface
Displays the NIC (network interface card ) number. For example,

eth1.
Destination IP
Displays the network IP address of a destination network.
Destination Subnet
Mask
Displays the subnet value that corresponds to the IP address.
Gateway
Displays the address of the network point that acts as an entrance

to another network.
In addition, the network interfaces that you find in the Interface Properties tab and
the Routing Properties tab also provide links to access detailed network properties.
Clicking a network interface opens a properties window for the selected network
interface. The window provides information about the selected network interface.
The following table describes the type of network configurations that you can
perform.
Table 5-13
Network Configuration pane options
Operation
Description
Create Bond
Provides the data entry fields to create a network bond.

See Creating a bond on page 261.
Tag VLAN
Provides the data entry fields to tag a VLAN over a network

interface.
See Tagging VLAN on page 262.
Add Static Route
Provides the data entry fields to add network routing information.

See Adding static route on page 264.
See VLAN configuration for NetBackup Appliances on page 249.
253

Settings > Network
254
NetBackup 5330 compute node Ethernet port

configurations
All NetBackup 5330 Appliances include the following ports, which are built in along
the base of the rear panel:
1-GbE ports: eth0, eth1, eth2, and eth3
10-GbE ports: eth4 and eth5
The following picture shows the location of all Ethernet ports on the rear panel of
the compute node, including the PCIe card-based ports.
eth0
eth7
eth6
eth13
eth12
eth9
eth8
eth11
eth10
eth1 eth2
eth3
eth4
About WAN Optimization

The Wide Area Network (WAN) Optimization feature applies various techniques to
improve outbound network traffic from your appliance.
This feature includes the following benefits:
Improves NetBackup Auto Image Replication (AIR) performance.

NetBackup AIR is a disaster recovery solution. Its purpose is to create off-site
copies of mission critical backups to protect against site loss.
For example, the backups that are generated in one NetBackup domain can be
replicated to storage in other NetBackup domains. These other NetBackup
domains may be located in diverse geographical locations. Because WAN
optimization can improve wide area network data throughput to and from your
appliance, more efficient backup data transfers and disaster recovery transfers
occur.
Benefits those appliances for which the traffic is sent across on slower networks.
Such as networks with a latency greater than 20 milliseconds and packet loss
rates greater than 0.01% (1 in 10,0000).
eth5

Settings > Network
Operates on individual TCP connections. Evaluates each outbound network

connection to determine whether the performance can be improved.
Improves the network performance with minimal dependency on the outbound

network traffic.
Improves the network performance of optimized duplications.
Improves the network performance of restores to remote clients.
Imposes no network overhead. WAN optimization is non-intrusive, as it does

not impose any network overhead in situations where the overall network data
transfers are high. In some scenarios, when the overall network data transfer
is high, the connection speed may not be optimized despite this feature being
enabled.
You can enable or disable WAN Optimization for individual network interfaces and
network interface port bonds from Settings > Network > Interface Properties tab
in the NetBackup Appliance Web Console. You can also use the NetBackup
For more information about using WAN Optimization commands in the NetBackup
Appliance Shell Menu, refer to NetBackup Appliance Commands Reference
Guide.
Table 5-14
WAN Optimization operations
Operation
Description
Enable
The Enable
Yes
command is used to
enable the WAN
optimization settings.
The WAN
optimization feature is
enabled by default.
See How to enable
WAN optimization for
a network interface
port or a network
interface port bond
on page 256.
NetBackup
Appliance Shell
Menu
NetBackup
Appliance Web
Console
Yes
255

Settings > Network
Table 5-14
WAN Optimization operations (continued)
Operation
Description
NetBackup
Appliance Shell
Menu
Disable
The Disable
Yes
command is used to
disable the WAN
optimization settings.
You can disable this
setting using the
NetBackup Appliance
Web Console or the
NetBackup Appliance
Shell Menu.
NetBackup
Appliance Web
Console
Yes
See How to disable

WAN optimization for
a network interface
port or a network
bond on page 257.
Status
The Status
command is used to
view WAN
optimization reports.
Yes
Yes
See Viewing the

WAN optimization
status on page 258.

See Settings > Network > Host on page 273.
How to enable WAN optimization for a network interface port or a

network interface port bond
Use the following procedure to enable WAN optimization for a network interface
port or a network interface port bond.
To enable WAN optimization for a network interface port or a network interface
port bond
Click Settings > Network.
On the Network Settings page, under the Interface Properties tab, select a
network interface.
256

Settings > Network
Click Edit.
The Edit Network Interface Properties dialog box appears.
To enable WAN optimization, select Enable WAN optimization.
Click Save.
The following message appears while the appliance enables WAN optimization
for the selected network interface:
Updating network configuration...
After the appliance successfully enables WAN optimization, the following

message appears under the Network Settings page name:
WAN optimization for [selected eth port or bond] was enabled
successfully.
In addition, the status of the selected network interface changes to Enabled

in the WAN optimization column of the Interface Properties tab.
Note: If you run a factory reset of the appliance, note the following:
A factory reset disables WAN optimization for all network interface port bonds when
you retain your network configuration. To retain your network configuration, you
can select Retain network configuration in the NetBackup Appliance Web Console
(Manage > Appliance Restore > Retain network configuration). After the factory
reset completes, you can then enable WAN optimization again for the network
interface port bonds.
If you choose not to retain your network configuration, all network interface port
bonds are lost during the factory reset. After the reset completes, the appliance
automatically enables WAN optimization for all network interface ports, including
those that comprised the bonds.
How to disable WAN optimization for a network interface port or a

network bond
Use the following procedure to disable WAN optimization for a network interface
port or a network bond.
To disable WAN optimization for a network interface port or a network bond
Click Settings > Network.
On the Network Settings page, under the Interface Properties tab, select a
network interface.
257

Settings > Network
Click Edit.
The Edit Network Interface Properties dialog box appears.
To disable WAN optimization, deselect Enable WAN optimization.
Click Save.
The following message appears while the appliance disables WAN optimization
for the selected network interface:
Updating network configuration...
After the appliance successfully disables WAN optimization, the following

message appears under the Network Settings page name:
WAN optimization for [selected eth port or bond] was disabled
successfully.
In addition, the status of the selected network interface changes to Disabled

in the WAN optimization column of the Interface Properties tab.
Viewing the WAN optimization status

The Status command displays the WAN optimization status of the network interface
ports and the network interface port bonds.
If WAN Optimization is disabled, the connection is not optimized.
If the WAN Optimization status is changed (from disabled to enabled or vice

versa), the status of existing connections is immediately updated.
258

Settings > Network
To view the WAN optimization status
Log in to the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
To view the WAN Optimization option, type the following command:

Main_Menu > Network > WANOptimization
All of the options for the WAN Optimization command appear.
To view the WAN optimization status, type the following command:

status
The appliance displays the WAN optimization status in a table that resembles
Bond
Interface
State
IP address
WAN Optimization
bond0
eth4
Plugged
eth5
Plugged
eth0
Unplugged
192.168.00.00 Enabled
eth1
Plugged
10.200.00.00
eth2
Plugged
Enabled
eth3
Plugged
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Network and VLAN configuration guidelines

To facilitate network configuration and administration, it is recommended that you
follow certain guideline to configure or update your network settings.
Guidelines for creating a network interface bond (NIC

bond):
Ensure that the network interfaces that participate in bond formation have the
same port speed (i.e. either 1GB or 100GB).
At least one of the network interfaces that participates in bond formation must
be plugged.
Ensure that none of the network interfaces that are selected for creating the
bond have any VLANs tagged to them.
259

Settings > Network
Verify that any of the selected network interfaces are not already part of another
bond.
Note: When configuring multiple network interfaces as a NIC bond, use the
NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu or the NetBackup Appliance Web Console to
configure the bond. NIC bonds that are configured with tools other than the
recommended appliance tools appear as Disabled when you run the WAN
optimization Status command. They also appear as Disabled when you view them
in the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
Use either the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu or the NetBackup Appliance Web
Console to enable these NIC bonds.
Guidelines for tagging a VLAN:
Ensure that the selected interface or ethernet device is plugged.
Verify that the selected interface is not a part of a bond.
The selected interface must not have an IP address configured to it. If the
selected interface is configured with an IP adress, you must first remove the IP
address and then tag a VLAN to it.
To remove an IP address from the NetBackup Appliance Web Console
Go to the Setting > Network menu. The appliance displays the default
Network Settings page.
From the Interface Properties tab, select the interface for which you want
to remove the IP address.
Click the Edit button that is located below on the Interface Properties tab.
The appliance displays the editable fields for the selected interface.
Select the check box against Remove IP Interface.
Click OK to save the changes.
To remove an IP address from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu
Run the Network > Unconfigure InterfaceName [IPAddress] command.
Enter the name of the interface for which you want to unconfigure the IP
address. In addition, you may also provide the IP address to be unconfigured.
260

Settings > Network
Creating a bond
Use the following procedure to create a bond between two or more network
interfaces.
To create a bond
Click Settings > Network tab. The appliance displays the default Network
Settings page.
Click Create Bond.
In the Network Configuration section, enter the network interface information

that is required to create a bond using the following fields:
Field name
Description
Select Interface
Select the interface or the device name between which you

want to create the bond.
To bond multiple Network Interface Cards (NICs), consider
the following guidelines:
The Network Interface drop-down list shows appliance

Ethernet ports available for creating a bond. Select two or
more interfaces to create a bond. To deselect an interface,
click it again.
You can enter either an IPv4 address or an IPv6 address.
Multiple or duplicate IP addresses are not excepted for a
NIC or bond.
Only NICs of the same type and speed can be bonded.
See Network and VLAN configuration guidelines on page 259.

for additional guidelines on creating a bond.
261

Settings > Network
Field name
Description
Bond Mode
Select the bond mode to configure bonding.

The eight available modes are:
balance-rr
active-backup
balance-xor
broadcast
802.3ad
balance-tlb
balance-alb
The default mode is balance-alb. Some bond modes require

additional configuration on the switch or the router. You should
take additional care when you select a bond mode.
For more information about bond modes, see the following
documentation:
http://www.kernel.org/doc/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
IP Address [IPv4 or
IPv6]
Enter the IPv4 or the IPv6 address to be used for this

appliance. Only global-scope and unique-local IPv6 addresses
are allowed.
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask value that corresponds to the IP

address.
To add the network configuration details for creating the bond, click Add.
The new entries are configured on the appliance and are listed automatically in the
read-only fields of the Interface Properties tab.
To create a bond using the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu, run the Main_Menu
> Network > LinkAggregation Create command. For detailed information on
the LinkAggregation Create command, refer to the NetBackup Appliance
Command Reference Guide.
Tagging VLAN
Use the following procedure to tag VLAN into your existing network environment.
262

Settings > Network
To tag VLAN
Click Settings > Network tab. The appliance displays the default Network
Settings page.
In the Network Configuration section, expand the Tag VLAN option and enter
the network information that is required to tag a VLAN using the following fields:
Field Name
Description
Select Interface
Select the network interface or the device name to

which you want to tag the VLAN.
See Network and VLAN configuration guidelines
on page 259. for additional guidelines on tagging a
VLAN.
Description
Enter a description for the VLAN. For example,

Finance or Human Resource.
VLAN Id
Enter a numeric identifier for the VLAN. For example,

1 or 10.
IP Address [IPv4 or IPv6]
Enter the IPv4 or the IPv6 address to be used for this

appliance.
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask value that corresponds to the

IP address.
Click Add to add the configuration information for tagging VLAN into to your
existing network environment.
To enter information for tagging additional VLANs, click the + sign to add a
row. To remove any of the rows, click the - sign that is adjacent to the Subnet
Mask field.
read-only fields of the Interface Properties tab.
To tag VLAN from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu, run the Main_Menu >
Network > VLAN Tag command. For detailed information on the VLAN Tag
command, refer to the NetBackup Appliance Command Reference Guide.
263

Settings > Network
Adding static route

Use the following procedure to add or update the network routing information for
your appliance.
To add network routing information for your appliance
Click Settings > Network > Network tab. The appliance displays the Network
Settings page.
In the Network Configuration section, expand the Add Static Route option
and enter the network interface information that is required to add routing
information using the following fields:
Field Name
Description
Destination IP
Enter the network IP address of a destination

network.
Enter the network IP address of a destination
network. For the initial appliance configuration,
this field contains a default value that cannot be
changed. When you configure another destination
IP, you must enter the appropriate address.
Destination Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet value that corresponds to the

IP address.
Enter the subnet value that corresponds to the
IP address. For the initial appliance configuration,
this field contains a default value that cannot be
changed. When you configure another route, you
must enter the appropriate value.
Gateway
Enter the address of the network point that acts

as an entrance to another network.
Network Interface
The appliance can use multiple network interface

cards (NICs). This column displays the network
device name. for example, eth0 or bond0 or vlan1.
Click Add to add the network routing information for your appliance.
read-only fields of the Routing Properties tab.
264

Settings > Network
Settings > Network > Fibre Transport

The Fibre Transport (FT) options let you set up the appliance for FT use with SAN
Clients or NetBackup Appliances. By default, the FT options are disabled and the
configuration of one option does not affect the other one.
The following describes the FT options:
Table 5-15
FT option descriptions
FT option
Description
Enable SAN Client Fibre Transport on the Media This option lets you change the port configuration of appliance
Server (use FT for backups to this appliance) Fibre Channel (FC) HBA cards for SAN Client FT use.
2 target port Fibre Channel connection
4 target port Fibre Channel connection
The following describes the FC HBA cards that are affected:
NetBackup 5220 - FC HBA cards in slots 2 and 4
NetBackup 5230 and NetBackup 5330 - FC HBA cards in slots

5 and 6
NetBackup 5240 - FC HBA cards in slots 5 and 6
By default, the option is disabled and all ports are in the initiator
mode.
When the option is enabled and 2 target port Fibre Channel
connection is selected, Port 1 on all affected FC HBA cards is
set to the target mode. The appliance can now use these ports
for deduplicated backups with the use of FT.
When the option is enabled and 4 target port Fibre Channel
connection is selected, Port 1 and Port 2 on all affected FC HBA
cards are set to the target mode. The appliance can now use these
ports for deduplicated backups with the use of FT.
Before you enable this option, be aware of the following
requirements and behavior:
To use this option, a SAN Client license key must reside on

the master server that is associated with this appliance. If FT
is not currently used and you want to use the SAN Client
feature, you must first obtain a SAN Client license key. To
obtain the appropriate license key, contact Veritas Technical
Support. Once you have the license key, you must add it to
the master server.
When this option is enabled or changed, a warning appears
to alert you that the appliance requires a restart. Before you
enable this option, it is recommended that you first suspend
or cancel all jobs.
See Configuring the SAN Client Fibre Transport settings

on page 268.
265

Settings > Network
Table 5-15
FT option descriptions (continued)
FT option
Description
Enable Fibre Transport for replication to other This option lets you enable Fibre Transport to other NetBackup
NetBackup Appliances
appliances that are used as target hosts for optimized duplication
and Auto Image Replication.
By default, this option is disabled and the appliance cannot
communicate with a target appliance over FC.
Note: To use this option, you must enable FC communication on

the associated target NetBackup appliance.
On a target NetBackup 5020 or 5030, you must enable FC
communication on that appliance. See the NetBackup
Deduplication Appliance Software Administrator's Guide
On a target NetBackup 52xx or 5330, you must enable that
appliance as a replication target to use it as the storage destination.
See Configuring Fibre Transport to other NetBackup appliances
on page 269.
Enable Fibre Transport Deduplication on this
appliance as a replication target
This option lets you configure FT on a NetBackup 52xx or 5330

appliance to use it as a replication target for optimized duplication
and Auto Image Replication.
By default, this option is disabled and the other appliances cannot
use this appliance as a replication target through FC connection.
When the option is enabled, the Port mode configuration table
is activated, and then you can configure the HBA ports to be target
ports for optimized duplication and Auto Image Replication.
See About the HBA port mode configuration table on page 266.
Note: To use this option, you must also enable Enable Fibre
Transport for replication to other NetBackup Appliances on
the associated NetBackup appliance where the storage source
resides.
See Configuring Fibre Transport on a target appliance for
optimized duplication and replication on page 271.
For more information about SAN Client and Fibre Transport support on NetBackup
Appliance, see the NetBackup Appliance Fibre Channel Guide.
About the HBA port mode configuration table

The port mode configuration table shows the details of the HBA ports that can be
used for Fibre Transport Deduplication.
266

Settings > Network
Fibre Transport Deduplication is a feature that enables you to use an appliance as

a target host for optimized duplication and Auto Image Replication.
Note: The HBA port mode configuration table only shows information of the HBA
ports for Fibre Transport Deduplication. The ports that are reserved for SAN Client
Fibre Transport are not shown in this table.
You can configure an HBA port in the table to be in target mode or standard initiator
mode.
Table 5-16 describes the HBA port mode configuration table.
Table 5-16
HBA port mode configuration
Column Name
Description
Slot
This column shows the slot number of the HBA card on this
appliance.
Port
This column shows the port number of the HBA ports.
Link Status
This column shows whether the HBA port is connected to

a fabric switch or another port.
The link status on an HBA port can be the following:
up - connected
down - not connected
World Wide Name (WWN)
This column shows the port WWN. You can use the port
WWN to identify a port on the appliance.
Port Mode
This column shows the configured port mode of an HBA

port.
The available options for HBA port mode are the following:
Initiator - Standard initiator mode
Target (MSDP) - Target mode for optimized duplication

and Auto Image Replication
You can click on the current port mode, and then change
the port mode configuration. If you change the port mode,
you can see the new port mode with a red earmark.
You can click on the Restore FactoryDefaults option to
restore the port configuration to the factory default state.
See Configuring Fibre Transport on a target appliance for
optimized duplication and replication on page 271.
267

Settings > Network
For more information about HBA port options, review the following topics:
Configuring the SAN Client Fibre Transport settings

Use the following procedure to change the SAN Client Fibre Transport media server
(FTMS) settings.
Note: Enabling or changing the SAN Client FT settings requires a restart of the
appliance. Before you enable or change these settings, it is recommended that you
first suspend or cancel all jobs.
To configure the SAN Client Fibre Transport option from the NetBackup
Click Settings > Network, then select Fibre Transport.
Click to enable the Enable SAN Client Fibre Transport on the Media Server
(use FT for backups to this appliance)
To change the target port option for SAN Client FTMS, do one of the following:
Select 2 target port Fibre Channel connection. Then, click Save.
Select 4 target port Fibre Channel connection. Then, click Save.

When the message appears to alert you that the appliance requires a restart,
click Reboot to continue or click Cancel to exit without making changes.
If you wan to disable the SAN Client Fibre Transport option, deselect the option
to clear the check mark. Then, click Save.
When an alert appears to inform you that the deduplication storage daemons
require a restart. Click OK to continue or click Cancel to prevent a restart. Click
Cancel to exit without making changes.
After the appliance has been restarted, verify the SAN Client FTMS settings
as follows:
Verify that the settings are correct.
268

Settings > Network
To configure the SAN Client Fibre Transport option from the NetBackup
To enable the SAN Client FTMS feature, run the following command:
Main > Settings > FibreTransport SANClient Enable
When the message appears to alert you that the appliance requires a restart,
type yes to continue or type no to exit without making changes.
To change the SAN Client FTMS settings, do one of the following:
To configure two ports as target ports, run the following command:

Main > Manage > FibreChannel > Configure 2
To configure four ports as target ports, run the following command:

Main > Manage > FibreChannel > Configure 4
If you want to disable the SAN Client FTMS feature, run the following command:
Main > Settings > FibreTransport SANClient Disable
After the appliance has been restarted, verify the SAN Client FTMS settings
as follows:
Log on to NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu
Run the following two commands:

Main > Settings > FibreTransport SANClient Show
Verify that the settings are correct.

The following is the ouput when the feature is enabled:
- [Info] Fibre Transport Sever enabled.
The following is the ouput when the feature is disabled:

- [Info] Fibre Transport Sever disabled.
Configuring Fibre Transport to other NetBackup appliances

Use the following procedure to configure Fibre Transport (FT) to other NetBackup
appliances.
269

Settings > Network
Note: When the FT for replication to other NetBackup appliances is enabled or

changed, the deduplication storage daemons require a restart. It is recommended
that you first suspend or cancel all jobs before you enable or change this setting.
To configure Fibre Transport to other NetBackup appliances from the
To enable Fibre Transport to other NetBackup appliances, click to select the

Enable Fibre Transport for replication to other NetBackup Appliances.
Then, click Save.
When the message appears to inform you of the required the appliance version,
click OK to continue or click Cancel to exit without making changes.
Note: You must also enable FC communication on the associated NetBackup
appliance.
On a target NetBackup 5020 or 5030, you must enable FC communication on
that appliance. See the NetBackup Deduplication Appliance Software
Administrator's Guide.
On a target NetBackup 52xx or 5330, you must enable that appliance as a
replication target to use it as the storage destination.
See Configuring Fibre Transport on a target appliance for optimized duplication
and replication on page 271.
To disable the Fibre Transport to other NetBackup Appliances option,

deselect the check box to clear the check mark. Then, click Save.
To configure Fibre Transport to other NetBackup appliances from the

Enable Fibre Transport for replication to other NetBackup appliances by running

the following command:
Main > Settings > FibreTransport NBUAppliances Enable
270

Settings > Network
If you want to disable Fibre Transport for replication to other NetBackup

appliances, run the following command:
Main > Settings > FibreTransport NBUAppliances Disable
To verify that the settings are correct, run the following command:
Main > Settings > FibreTransport NBUAppliances Show
The following is the output when the feature is enabled:

fc transport enabled.
The following is the output when the feature is disabled:

fc transport disabled.
Configuring Fibre Transport on a target appliance for

optimized duplication and replication
The Fibre Transport Deduplication feature enables you to use a NetBackup 52xx
or 5330 appliance as a target host for optimized duplication and Auto Image
Replication over Fibre Channel (FC).
If you have configured one or more target ports for Fibre Transport Deduplication,
and you do one of the following, you cause the physical state of one or more ports
to change:
Enabling the Fibre Transport Deduplication feature
Disabling the Fibre Transport Deduplication feature
Changing the port mode configuration when the feature is enabled
Note: You must restart all the appliances in the FC zone where the physical state
of an HBA port is changed.
Note: To continue to use Fibre Transport Deduplication after a re-image operation,

you must first restore the factory default port configuration or disable the feature.
Then you can go on with other settings.
271

Settings > Network
To configure a 52xx and 5330 appliance as a replication target using the

To enable Fibre Transport Deduplication, click to select the Enable Fibre

Transport on this appliance as a replication target.
If you want to keep the current port configuration, skip this step.
If you want to change the port mode on the appliance, do the following:
In the Port Mode column, click on the current port mode of a port.
From the drop-down menu, select Initiator or Target (MSDP) to configure

the port mode.
To restore the customized port configuration to the factory default state,

click Restore FactoryDefaults.
The port mode change is reflected on a diagram on the right of the page.
Click Save to apply the changed settings.
Restart the appliances in the FC zone where a port mode change has occurred.
To reduce the times of restarting, restart the appliances after you finish all the
changes.
To configure a 52xx and 5330 appliance as a replication target using the

To enable Fibre Transport Deduplication, run the following command:

Main > Settings > FibreTransport Deduplication Enable
[Current|FactoryDefault]
To configure the port mode, run the following command:

Main > Manage > FibreChannel > Configure Deduplication <Initiator
| Target> <HBAportid>
The HBAportid is slot number (1-6) and port number (1-2) of the HBA port.
The format is Slot:Port.
To show the current port mode configuration, run the following command:
Main > Manage > FibreChannel > Show [Ports]
272

Settings > Network
To disable the Fibre Transport Deduplication feature, run the following

command:
Main > Settings > FibreTransport Deduplication Disable
Verify that the settings are correct by running the following command:
Main > Settings > FibreTransport Deduplication Show
This following is the output when the feature is enabled:

[Info] Fibre Transport Deduplication is enabled.
This following is the output when the feature is disabled:

[Info] Fibre Transport Deduplication is disabled.
Restart the appliances in the FC zone where the physical state of a port change
has changed.
To reduce the times of restarting, restart the appliances after you finish all the
changes.

See About the HBA port mode configuration table on page 266.
Settings > Network > Host

The Settings > Network > Host tab enables you to configure the DNS configuration
settings for DNS systems and the Host Name Resolution settings for non-DNS
systems.
The Settings > Network > Host tab displays the Host name of your appliance.
Note: The host name can only be set during an initial configuration session. After
the initial configuration has completed successfully, you can re-enter initial
configuration by performing a factory reset on the appliance.
The remaining part of the Settings > Network > Host tab is divided into the following
two sections:
Domain Name System displays the fields for entering DNS configuration details.
Host Name Resolution displays the fields for configuring systems that use the
host name (non-DNS) details.
273

Settings > Network
Changing DNS and Host Name Resolution (non-DNS)

configuration settings
Use the following procedure to change or add the DNS and Host Name Resolution
(non-DNS) configuration settings.
To change the DNS configuration settings
Click Settings > Network > Host tab.
Enter the appropriate information in the DNS data entry fields as follows:
Fields
Description
DNS IP
Address(es)
Enter the IP address of the DNS server. To enter multiple DNS

server names, use a comma character as the delimiter between
each name.
The address can be either IPv4 or IPv6. Only global-scope and
unique-local IPv6 addresses are allowed.
Domain Name
Suffix
Enter the suffix name of the DNS server.
Search
Domain(s)
You can enter one or more DNS search domain names to search
when an unqualified host name is given. To enter multiple search
domain names, use a comma character as the delimiter between
each name.
Click Save.
To change the Host Name Resolution (non-DNS) configuration settings
Click Settings > Network > Host tab.
274

Settings > Network
Enter the Host Name Resolution configuration information using the following
fields:
Fields
Description
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the appliance.

The address can be either IPv4 or IPv6. Only global-scope and
unique-local IPv6 addresses are allowed.
Fully qualified host Enter the Fully Qualified Host Name (FQHN) of the appliance.
name
Short host name
Enter the short name of the appliance.

After you enter all of the necessary information in these fields,
you must click Add.
Click Save.
About IPv4-IPv6-based network support

NetBackup appliances are supported on a dual stack IPv4-IPv6 network and can
communicate with IPv6 clients for backups and restores. You can assign an IPv6
address to an appliance, configure DNS, and configure routing to include IPv6
based systems.
Either the NetBackup Appliance Web Console or the NetBackup Appliance Shell
Menu can be used to enter the IPv4 and IPv6 address information.
Review the following considerations for IPv6 addresses:
NetBackup appliances do not support a pure IPv6 network. An IPv4 address

must be configured for the appliance, otherwise the initial configuration (which
requires the command hostname set) is not successful. For this command to
work, at least one IPv4 address is required.
For example, suppose that you want to set the hostname of a specific host to
v46. To do that, first make sure that the specific host has at least one IPv4
address and then run the following command:
Main_Menu > Network > Hostname set v46
Only global addresses can be used, not addresses with link-local or node-local
scope. Global-scope and unique-local addresses are both treated as global
addresses by the host.
Global-scope IP addresses refer to the addresses that are globally routable.
Unique-local addresses are treated as global.
275

You cannot use both an IPv4 and an IPv6 address in the same command. For
example, you cannot use Configure 9ffe::9 255.255.255.0 1.1.1.1. You
should use Configure 9ffe::46 64 9ffe::49 eth1.
Embedding the IPv4 address within an IPv6 address is not supported. For
example, you cannot use an address like 9ffe::10.23.1.5.
You can add an appliance media server to the master server if the IPv6 address
and the host name of the appliance media server are available.
For example, to add an appliance media server to the master server, enter the
IPv6 address of the appliance media server as follows:
Example:
Main > Network > Hosts add 9ffe::45 v45 v45
Main > Appliance > Add v45 <password>
You do not need to provide the IPv4 address of the appliance media server.
A pure IPv6 client is supported in the same way as in NetBackup.
You can enter only one IPv4 address for a network interface card (NIC) or bond.
However, you can enter multiple IPv6 addresses for a NIC or bond.
Network File System (NFS) or Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocols
are supported over an IPv4 network on appliance. NFS or CIFS are not supported
on IPv6 networks.
The NetBackup client can now communicate with the media server appliance
over IPv6.
The Main_Menu > Network > Hosts command supports multiple IPv6 addresses
to be assigned to the same host name having one network interface card (NIC).
However, only one IPv4 address can be assigned to a specific host name having
one NIC using this command.
You can add an IPv6 address of a network interface without specifying a gateway
address.
For more details, see the NetBackup Appliance Command Reference Guide.

On the Settings > Date and Time page, you can change the date, the time, and
the time zone parameters that are added at the time of initial configuration.
Use the following procedure to change the date and time settings post-configuration.
To change the date, the time, and the time zone configuration
Click Settings > Date and Time.
276

Enter the appropriate information in the fields:

Select Time Zone
To assign a time zone to the appliance, click on the Time

zone drop-down box and select the appropriate region,
country, and time zone.
Set Date and Time
You can select any one of the following options to set the
date and the time for the appliance.
Use NTP server date and time settings - Use this option
to synchronize the appliance with an NTP server. In the
Server IP or Host name field, specify the IP address or
the host name of the NTP server
Specify date and time - Use this option to manually
specify the date and time. In the Date field, click the
calendar to select the appropriate date (in month, date,
and year or the mm/dd/yyyy format). In the Time field,
enter the time in hh:mm:ss format.
Click Save.
You can also configure the Date and Time settings using the Main > Network
> Date commands under the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu. For more
information on the Date command refer to the NetBackup Appliance Command
Reference Guide.

The NetBackup appliance provides you authentication and authorization functions
to help provide controlled user access to various administration interfaces. You can
manage users both by GUI and NetBackup CLI.
The Authentication feature lets you configure the appliance to authenticate

various types of users so that they can access and manage the appliance.
The Authorization feature lets you grant various types of users and user groups
with specific access privileges on the NetBackup appliance. See Settings >
Authentication > User Management on page 298.
For more information about the Authentication and Authorization commands,

277

About configuring user authentication

Table 5-17 describes the options that are provided in the NetBackup Appliance
Web Console and NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu for configuring the appliance
to authenticate various types of users and grant them access privileges.
Table 5-17
User authentication management
User type
Local (native user)
Use the Settings > Authentication > User The following commands and options are
Management tab in the NetBackup Appliance available under Settings > Security >
Web Console to add local users.
Authentication > LocalUser:
See About authorizing NetBackup appliance
users on page 281.
Clean - Delete all of the local users.

List - List all of the local users that have
been added to the appliance.
Password - Change the password of a local
user.
Users - Add or remove one or more local
users.
278

Table 5-17
User authentication management (continued)
User type
LDAP
You can perform the following LDAP

configuration tasks under Settings >
Authentication > LDAP:
The following commands and options are

available under Settings > Security >
Authentication > LDAP:
Add a new LDAP configuration.
Import a saved LDAP configuration from

an XML file.
Add, edit, and delete configuration
parameters for the LDAP server.
Identify and attach the SSL certificate for
the LDAP server.
Add, edit, and delete attribute mappings
for the LDAP server.
Export the current LDAP configuration
(including users) as an XML file. This file
can be imported to configure LDAP on
other appliances.
Disable and re-enable the LDAP
configuration.
Unconfigure the LDAP server.
Use the Settings > Authentication > User

Management tab in the NetBackup Appliance
Web Console to add LDAP users and user
groups.
users on page 281.
Attribute - Add or delete LDAP

configuration attributes.
Certificate - Set, view, or disable the SSL
certificate.
ConfigParam - Set, view, and disable the
LDAP configuration parameters.
Configure - Configure the appliance to
allow LDAP users to register and authenticate
with the appliance. *
Disable - Disable LDAP user authentication
on the appliance.
Enable - Enable LDAP user authentication
on the appliance.
Export - Export the existing LDAP
configuration as an XML file.
Groups - Add or remove one or more LDAP
user groups. Only the user groups that
already exist on the LDAP server can be
added to the appliance.
Import - Import the LDAP configuration from
an XML file.
List - List all of the LDAP users and user
groups that have been added to the
appliance.
Map - Add, delete, or show NSS map
attributes or object classes.
Show - View the LDAP configuration details.
Status - View the status of LDAP
authentication on the appliance.
Unconfigure - Delete the LDAP
configuration.
Users - Add or remove one or more LDAP
users. Only the users groups that already
exist on the LDAP server can be added to
the appliance.
279

Table 5-17
User authentication management (continued)
User type
Active Directory
You can perform the following AD

Authentication > Active Directory:
The following commands and options are

Authentication > ActiveDirectory:
Configure a new Active Directory
configuration.
Unconfigure an existing Active Directory
configuration.

Web Console to add Active Directory users
and user groups.

users on page 281.
Kerberos-NIS

allow AD users to register and authenticate
with the appliance.
Groups - Add or remove one or more AD
already exist on the AD server can be added
to the appliance.
List - List all of the AD users and user
appliance.
Status - View the status of AD
authentication on the appliance.
Unconfigure - Delete the AD configuration.
Users - Add or remove one or more AD
users. Only the users that already exist on
the AD server can be added to the appliance.
You can perform the following Kerberos-NIS The following commands and options are
Authentication > Kerberos-NIS :
Authentication > Kerberos:
Configure a new Kerberos-NIS

configuration.
Unconfigure an existing Kerberos-NIS
configuration.

Web Console to add Kerberos-NIS users and
user groups.
users on page 281.

allow NIS users to register and authenticate
with the appliance.
Groups - Add or remove one or more NIS
already exist on the NIS server can be added
to the appliance.
List - List all of the NIS users and user
appliance.
Status - View the status of NIS and
Kerberos authentication on the appliance.
Unconfigure - Delete the NIS and Kerberos
configuration.
Users - Add or remove one or more NIS
users. Only the users that already exist on
the NIS server can be added to the appliance.
280

Generic user authentication guidelines

Use the following guidelines for authenticating users on the appliance:
Only one remote user type (such as LDAP, Active Directory (AD), and NIS) can
be configured for authentication on an appliance at a given point in time. For
example, if you currently authenticate LDAP users on an appliance, you must
unconfigure LDAP on that appliance before you can switch to authenticating
AD users.
The NetBackupCLI role can be assigned to a maximum of nine (9) user groups
at any given time.
You cannot grant the NetBackupCLI role to an existing local user. However,
you can create a local NetBackupCLI user by using the Manage > NetBackupCLI
> Create command from the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
You cannot add a new user or a user group to an appliance if it has the same
user name, user ID, or group ID as an existing user on that appliance.
See About authorizing NetBackup appliance users on page 281.
About authorizing NetBackup appliance users

Table 5-18 describes the options that are provided for authorizing new and existing
users or user groups through the NetBackup Appliance Web Console and NetBackup
Appliance Shell Menu:
Table 5-18
User authorization management
Task

Console
Manage users
The following options are available Use the Settings > Security
under Settings > Authentication > Authentication commands
> User Management
to add, delete, and view appliance
users.
View all of the users that have
been added to the appliance. See About configuring user
Expand and view all belonging authentication on page 278.
users to a single user group.
Add and delete local users.
Add and delete

LDAP/AD/Kerberos-NIS users
and user groups.
NetBackup Appliance Shell

Menu
281

Table 5-18
Task
User authorization management (continued)

Console
NetBackup Appliance Shell

Menu
Manage user
The following options are available The following commands and
permissions (roles) under Settings > Authentication options are available under Main
> User Management:
> Settings > Security >
Authorization:
Grant and revoke the
Administrator role for users and Grant
user groups.
Grant the Administrator and
Grant and revoke the
NetBackupCLI roles to specific
NetBackupCLI role for users
users and users groups that
and user groups.
have been added to the
Synchronize members of
appliance.
registered user groups with
List
Administrator role.
List all of the users and user
groups that have been added
to the appliance, along with
their designated roles.
Revoke
Revoke the Administrator and

NetBackupCLI roles from
specific users and users
groups that have been added
to the appliance.
SyncGroupMembers
Synchronize members of
registered user groups.
Notes about user management
You cannot grant the NetBackupCLI role to an existing local user. However,
you can create a local NetBackupCLI user by using the Manage > NetBackupCLI
> Create command from theNetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
The NetBackupCLI role can be assigned to a maximum of nine (9) user groups
at any given time.
Active Directory (AD) user groups and user names support the use of a hyphen
character in those names. The hyphen must appear between the first and the
last character of a user name or a user group name. AD user names and user
group names cannot begin or end with a hyphen.
282

You can list all users of a group that has maximum to 2000 users from
theNetBackup Appliance Web Console. To list all of a group that has more than
2000 users, use the List command from theNetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
NetBackup appliance user role privileges

User roles determine the access privileges that a user is granted to operate the
system or to change the system configuration. The user roles that are described in
this topic are specific to LDAP, Active Directory (AD), and NIS users.
The following describes the appliance user roles and their associated privileges:
Table 5-19
User roles and privileges
User role
Privileges
NetBackupCLI
Users can only access the NetBackup CLI.
Administrator
Users can access the following:
NetBackup Administration Console
A role can be applied to an individual user, or it can be applied to a group that

includes multiple users.
A user cannot be granted privileges to both user roles. However, a NetBackupCLI
user can also be granted access to the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu in the
following scenarios:
The user with the NetBackupCLI role is also in a group that is assigned the
Administrator role.
The user with the Administrator role is also in a group that is assigned the
NetBackupCLI role.
Note: When granting a user to have privileges to the NetBackupCLI and the
NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu, an extra step is required. The user must enter
the switch2admin command from the NetBackup CLI to access the NetBackup
Granting privileges to users and user groups can be done as follows:
From the NetBackup Appliance Web Console, on the Settings > Authentication
> User Management page, click on the Grant Permissions link.
283

From the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu, use the following commands in the
Settings > Security > Authorization view:
Grant Administrator Group
Grant Administrator Users
Grant NetBackupCLI Group
Grant NetBackupCLI Users
See About configuring user authentication on page 278.

See About authorizing NetBackup appliance users on page 281.

The NetBackup appliance uses the built-in Pluggable Authentication Module (PAM)
plug-in to support various authentication methods. The following directory service
users can be configured and registered to log on to the appliance:
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)
Active Directory (AD)
Kerberos-Network Information Service (Kerberos-NIS)
Settings > Authentication > LDAP

You can use the Settings > Authentication page of the NetBackup Appliance Web
Console to configure the appliance to use LDAP server as a directory source to
access user information and authenticate the users and user groups to access the
appliance. But, only one authentication type can be configured in this appliance at
one time. You can also import or export the LDAP configuration settings between
multiple appliances.
Prerequisites
You must have NetBackup Appliance 2.6 or higher installed to configure LDAP
user authentication.
LDAP schema must be RFC 2307 or RFC 2307bis compliant.
The following firewall ports must be open:
LDAP 389
LDAP OVER SSL/TLS 636
HTTPS 443
Ensure that the LDAP server is available and is set up with the users and user
groups that you want to register with the appliance.
284

Adding an LDAP server configuration

To configure an LDAP server
Click Settings > Authentication >LDAP to expand the LDAP Server

Configuration.
Select Add new configuration.

The appliance displays the fields to create a new configuration.
Enter the configuration information based on the following fields:

Field
Description
Example
Server Name/IP Enter the FQDN or IP address of your LDAP

server.
Note: The specified LDAP server should

comply with RFC2307bis. The RFC2307bis
specifies that hosts with IPv6 addresses must
be written in their preferred form, such that all
components of the address are indicated and
leading zeros are omitted.
Base DN
Enter the base directory name which is the top OU=

level of the LDAP directory tree.
ExampleUsers, dc=
mydomain
Bind DN
Enter the bind directory name. The Bind DN DC=com

is used as an authentication to externally
search the LDAP directory within the defined
search base.
Password
Enter the password to access the LDAP

server.
Common User
Name
Enter the name of an existing LDAP user on

your LDAP server.
Common Group Enter the name of an existing LDAP user

Name
group on your LDAP server.
NBUApplianceAdmin
285

Field
Description
Example
SSL Certificate Displays a drop-down list to enable SSL

Required
certificate for your LDAP server. The
drop-down list displays the following options:
Yes - Select to enable adding an SSL

certificate
No - Select to continue configuring the
LDAP server without the SSL certificate
Start TLS
Note: When you use the Start TLS and Yes

options during LDAP configuration, the initial
setup is done over a non-SSL channel. After
the LDAP connection and initial discover phase
is over, the SSL channel is turned on. Even at
this phase, the established SSL channel
doesn't do the server-side certificate validation.
This validation starts after the server's root
certificate is explicitly set using the Set
Certificate option. For more information, refer
to See Setting the SSL certification
on page 287.
Validate UIDs
and GIDs for
Conflicts
Select the check-box to validate the User IDs

and Group IDs and identify conflicting entires
between the NetBackup appliance and the
LDAP server.
Note: The Common User Name and Common Group Name fields are not
required to complete LDAP configuration. However, if you do not complete
those fields, no LDAP users or LDAP groups appear under Settings >
Authentication > User Management until you manually add them.
Click Configure to configure LDAP authentication using the entered parameters.

The appliance configures and enables the new LDAP server and displays the
Attribute Mappings and Configuration Parameters table.
Importing an LDAP server configuration

You can use the Authentication Server Configuration tab to import the details
of an LDAP server and configure it with your appliance. The following procedure
describes the steps to import a .xml file that includes the LDAP server configuration
286

details. The NetBackup appliance configures and connects to the LDAP server
using these details.
Note: The .xml file must be saved and made available in the
/inst/patch/incoming directory on the appliance.
To import an LDAP server configuration
Click Settings > Authentication >LDAP to expand the LDAP Server

Configuration.
Select the Import existing configuration option.

The appliance displays the File Name field.
Enter the absolute path to the .xml file in the File Name field.
The .xml file must be saved and made available in the /inst/patch/incoming
directory on the appliance.
Click Import.
The appliance imports the .xml file. The appliance configures and connects
to the LDAP server using the XML details.
Setting the SSL certification

You can use the Authentication Server Configuration tab to import and set the
SSL certificate for your LDAP server. The following procedure describes the steps
to set the SSL certification for your LDAP server.
Note: The Set SSL certificate option is enabled only after the LDAP server is
configured. The SSL certificate must be saved and made available in the
To set the SSL certificate
Click Settings > Authentication.

The appliance displays the Authentication Server Configuration tab with
the details of the configured LDAP server.
287

Click on the Set Certificate option that is displayed at the end of the tab.
The appliance displays a pop-up box to enter the path to the SSL certificate.
Note: The LDAP validation starts only after the server's root certificate is
explicitly set using the Set Certificate option.
Enter the absolute path to the SSL certificate file in the File Path field.
The SSL certificate must be saved and made available in the
Click OK.
The appliance imports the SSL certificate and is used to authenticate the LDAP
Server.
Exporting an LDAP configuration

You can use the Authentication Server Configuration tab to export the current
LDAP configuration to an XML file. This file can be used to save the LDAP server
configuration details and export them to other appliances. The following procedure
describes the steps to export the configuration details of your LDAP server into a
.xml file.
Note: The Export option is enabled only after the LDAP server is configured.
To export the configuration file

Click on the Export option that is displayed at the end of the tab.
The appliance displays a pop box to enter the path for exporting the .xml file.
Enter a name for the .xml file.

You can only save the .xml file to the /inst/patch/incoming directory on the
appliance.
Click OK.
The appliance converts the configuration details into an .xml file and exports
it to the specified location.
288

Unconfiguring LDAP user authentication

You can use the Authentication Server Configuration tab to unconfigure LDAP
user authentication. The following procedure describes the steps to unconfigure
the LDAP server configuration.
Note: Before you unconfigure the LDAP server, you must revoke the roles from all
of the LDAP users that have been added to the appliance. Otherwise the operation
fails.
Warning: Unconfiguring LDAP user authentication disables and deletes the current
LDAP configuration. The LDAP users are deleted from the appliance, but not from
the LDAP server.
To unconfigure an LDAP server

Click on the Unconfigure option that is displayed at the end of the tab.
Do you want to unconfigure the LDAP server?
Click OK to continue unconfiguring the LDAP server.

The appliance deletes the LDAP settings.
Enabling the LDAP server configuration

You can use the Authentication Server Configuration tab to enable the disabled
LDAP configuration. The following procedure describes the options to enable the
LDAP configuration for user authentication.
Note: When you first configure the LDAP server, it is enabled by default.
289

To enable the configured server

If the LDAP configuration is disabled, the following message is displayed on
the Server Configuration tab next to the Enable option:
LDAP authentication is disabled.
Click on the Enable option.

Are you sure you want to enable the configuration?
Click OK to enable the LDAP configuration.

The appliance enables the LDAP Server.
Disabling the LDAP server configuration

You can use the Authentication Server Configuration tab to disable LDAP
authentication without unconfiguring it. The following procedure describes the
options to disable LDAP user authentication.
To disable the configured server

If the LDAP configuration is enabled, the following message is displayed on
the Server Configuration tab next to the Disable option.
LDAP authentication is enabled.
290

Click on the Disable option.

Are you sure you want to disable the LDAP server?
Click OK to disable the LDAP server.

The appliance disables the LDAP server.
Deleting LDAP configuration parameters

When you configure LDAP user authentication, the server configuration parameters
that you added or imported are displayed in the Configuration Parameters table
on the Authentication Server Configuration tab. The following procedure describes
the steps to delete LDAP configuration parameters.
To delete a configuration parameter

the details of the configured LDAP server in the Configuration Parameters
table.
Select the configuration parameter you want to delete.
Click the Delete option that is displayed at the top of the Configuration
Parameters table.
Are you sure you want to delete the configuration parameter?
Click Yes to proceed.

The deleted configuration parameter is removed from the Configuration
Parameters table.
Adding LDAP configuration parameters

When you configure LDAP user authentication, the server configuration parameters
that you added or imported are displayed in the Configuration Parameters table
on the Authentication Server Configuration tab. The following procedure describes
the steps to delete LDAP configuration parameters.
291

To add a configuration parameter

the details of the configured LDAP server in the Configuration Parameters
table.
Click the Add option that is displayed at the top of the Configuration
Parameters table.
The appliance displays a new row in the Configuration Parameters table with
the Update and Cancel options.
Enter the name of the new configuration parameter in the Name field.
Enter the value of the configuration parameter in the Value field.
Click Update.
The new configuration parameter is added to the Configuration Parameters
table.
Adding an LDAP attribute mapping

When you add a new LDAP configuration, its attribute mappings are added or
imported and displayed in the Attribute Mappings table on the Authentication
Server Configuration tab. The following procedure describes the steps to add a
new attribute mapping to the LDAP server configuration.
To add an attribute mapping

the details of the configured LDAP server in the Attribute Mappings table.
Click the Add option that is displayed at the top of the Attribute Mappings
table.
The appliance displays a new row in the Attribute Mappings table with the
Update and Cancel options.
Enter the mapping type in the Map Type field.
Enter the NSS value in the NSS Value field.
292

Enter the LDAP value for the attribute in the LDAP Value field.
Click Update.
The new attribute mapping is added to the Attribute Mappings table.
Deleting an LDAP attribute mapping

When you add a new LDAP configuration, its attribute mappings are added or
imported and displayed in the Attribute Mappings table on the Authentication
Server Configuration tab. The following procedure describes the steps to delete
an attribute mapping from the LDAP server configuration.
To delete an attribute mapping

the details of the configured LDAP server in the Attribute Mappings table.
Select the attribute mapping you want to delete in the Attribute Mappings
table.
Click the Delete option that is displayed at the top of the Attribute Mappings
table.
Are you sure you want to delete the configuration parameter?
Click Yes to proceed.

The deleted attribute mapping is removed from the Attribute Mappings table.
Settings > Authentication > Active Directory

Console to configure the appliance to use Active Directory (AD) server as a directory
source to access user information and authenticate the users and user groups to
access the appliance. But, only one authentication type can be configured in this
appliance at one time.
Prerequisites
You must have NetBackup Appliance 2.6.0.3 or higher installed to configure AD

user authentication.
Ensure that the AD service is available and is set up with the users and user
293

Ensure that the authorized domain user credentials are used to configure the
AD server with the appliance.
Configure the NetBackup appliance with a DNS server that can forward DNS
requests to an AD DNS server. Alternatively, configure the appliance to use the
AD DNS server as the name service data source.
Adding an Active Directory server configuration

You can use the Authentication tab to add the details of an Active Directory (AD)
server and configure it with your appliance. The Active Directory server enables
you to access the directory information services for your appliance. The following
procedure describes the steps to configure Active Directory user authentication.
To configure an Active Directory server

Three types of authentication server appear.
Click Active Directory to expend the Active Directory configuration list.

Note: Before you configure a new Active Directory authentication, verify that
the DNS of the appliance directs to the Active Directory server or Active
Directory DNS server.
294

Enter the following parameters:

Field
Description
Example
Server Name or IP
Enter the Active Directory 10.200.210.229

server name or IP address.
The recommended method
is to use the Fully Qualified
Domain Name (FQDN) for
the Active Directory server.
Username
Enter the username of the

AD server Administrator.
admin
Password
Enter the password of the

AD server Administrator..
P@ssw0rd
Click Configure to apply the Active Directory authentication parameters to the

appliance.
You can check the authentication status when the configuration process is
complete.
Unconfiguring the Active Directory user authentication

You can stop authenticating the AD user from the appliance. The following procedure
describes the steps to unconfigure the Active Directory server configuration.
Note: To unconfigure the Active Directory authentication from the appliance, you
must have the Administrator authority on the AD server.
Note: You must remove the roles of all Active Directory users and user groups
before the unconfigure process begins.
To unconfigure an Active Directory server

The details of the configured Active Directory server are displayed.
Enter the Username and Password of an administrator on Active Directory

server.
295

Click Unconfigure.
A warning dialog box pops up.
Click Yes to continue with the unconfigure process.

Click No to cancel the unconfigure process.
Settings > Authentication > Kerberos-NIS

Console to configure the appliance to use NIS server as a directory source for users
and user groups to access the appliance. The appliance requires that NIS users
authenticate using Kerberos.
Prerequisites
You must have NetBackup Appliance 2.6.1.1 or higher installed to configure

Kerberos-NIS user authentication.
Ensure that the NIS domain is available and is set up with the users and user
Ensure that the Kerberos server is available and properly configured to

communicate with the NIS domain.
Due to the strict time requirements of Kerberos, Veritas strongly recommends

that you use an NTP server to synchronize time between the appliance, the NIS
server, and the Kerberos server.
Adding a Kerberos-NIS authentication configuration

You can use the Authentication tab to add the details of a NIS server with Kerberos
authentication and configure it with your appliance. The Kerberos and NIS servers
enable you to access the directory information services for your appliance. The
following procedure describes the steps to configure Kerberos-NIS user
authentication.
To configure a Kerberos-NIS authentication

Three types of authentication server appear.
Click Kerberos-NIS to expand the Kerberos-NIS configuration list.
296

Enter the following parameters:

Field
Description
Example
NIS Server
Name or IP
Enter the NIS server name or IP address. We

recommend that you use the Fully Qualified
Domain Name(FQDN) for the NIS server.
BCFTNIS or
10.200.38.222
NIS Domain Enter the domain for the NIS server.
BCFTNIS
Kerberos
Server
Name or IP
Enter the Kerberos server name or IP address. BCFTKBR or

We recommend that you use the Fully Qualified 10.200.38.225
Domain Name(FQDN) for the NIS server.
Kerberos
Realm
Enter the realm for the Kerberos server.
BCFTKBR
Kerberos
Domain
Enter the domain for the Kerberos server.
BCFT
Click Configure to apply the Kerberos-NIS authentication using the entered

parameters.
The configured parameters display in the Configuration Parameters when
the authentication configuration process is completed successfully.
Unconfiguring the Kerberos-NIS user authentication

You can stop authenticating the Kerberos-NIS users from the appliance. The
following procedure describes the steps to unconfigure the Kerberos-NIS server
authentication.
Note: Make sure that you have deleted all Kerberos-NIS users and user groups
before the unconfigure process starts.
To unconfigure a Kerberos-NIS authentication

The Configuration Parameters table with the details of the configured
Kerberos-NIS authentication shows in the Authentication Server
Configuration tab.
297

Click Unconfigure.
A warning dialog box pops up.
Click Yes to apply the unconfigure process.

Click No to cancel the unconfigure process.
Settings > Authentication > User Management

You can use the Settings > Authentication > User Management page of the
NetBackup Appliance Web Console to do the following tasks:
View all of the users that have been added to the appliance.
Expand and view all of the users belonging to a single user group.
Add and delete local users.
Add and delete LDAP users and user groups.
Grant Administrator user permissions to local, LDAP, AD, and Kerberos-NIS

users.
Grant Administrator user permissions to LDAP, AD, and Kerberos-NIS user

groups.
Grant NetBackupCLI user permissions to LDAP, AD, and Kerberos-NIS users.
Grant NetBackupCLI user permissions to LDAP, AD, and Kerberos-NIS user

groups.
Revoke Administrator user permissions from local, LDAP, AD, and Kerberos-NIS
users.
Revoke Administrator user permissions from LDAP, AD, and Kerberos-NIS user
groups.
Revoke NetBackupCLI user permissions from LDAP, AD, and Kerberos-NIS

users.
Revoke NetBackupCLI user permissions from LDAP, AD, and Kerberos-NIS

user groups.
Sync group members with the Administrator role.
Note: Kerberos-NIS users and user groups are displayed as Kerberos in the Type
column.
298

Adding appliance users

You can use the User Management tab to add new users to the NetBackup
appliance. The following procedure describes how to add new users.
To add new users
Log on to the NetBackup Appliance Web Console
Click the Settings > Authentication > User Management tab.

The appliance displays the User Management tab.
Click on the Add User option that is displayed at the end of the User
Management tab.
The appliance displays the Add User pop-up dialog box.
Select the type of user from the User Type drop-down list. The drop-down list
displays the following options depending on your configuration:
Local - Select this option to add a local user to the appliance database.
LDAP - Select this option to register a user that is already present on the
LDAP server that you have configured with your appliance.
Note: If you do not register (add) a remote (LDAP, etc.) user with the appliance,
that user cannot access the appliance.
Enter the name of the user in the User Name field.

Note: Do not use non-alphanumeric characters (special characters: !, $, #, %,
etc.) for the User Name field.
If you selected a Local user type from the User Type drop-down list, enter a
password for the new user in the Password field. Valid passwords must include
the following:
Eight or more characters
At least one lowercase letter
At least one number (0-9)
Uppercase letters and special characters can be included, but they are not
required.
The following describes password restrictions:
Dictionary words are considered weak passwords and are not accepted.
299

The last seven passwords cannot be reused, and the new password cannot
be similar to previous passwords.
You or the new user can change their password at a later time on the Settings
> Password > Password Management page.
Reenter the password in the Confirm Password field.
Click Save.
The appliance adds the new user and displays the following message:
User added successfully.
Click OK to continue.
The new user is added to the list of users on the User Management tab.
Deleting appliance users

As a matter of best practice, you should delete a registered user or user group from
the NetBackup appliance before deleting it from the LDAP server, Active Directory
(AD) server, or NIS server. If a user is removed from the remote directory first (and
not removed from appliance), the user is listed as an authorized user but can't log
on.
You can use the User Management tab to delete users from the NetBackup
appliance. The following procedure describes how to delete existing users.
To delete existing users

Select the user that you want to delete.
Click on the Delete User option that is displayed at the end of the User
Management tab.
User Deleted Successfully
The selected user is deleted from the appliance and removed from the User
Management tab.
300

Adding appliance user groups

You can use the User Management tab to add new user groups to the NetBackup
appliance from a registered directory service, such as LDAP. The following procedure
describes how to add new user groups.
To add user group

Click on the Add Group option that is displayed at the end of the User
Management tab.
The appliance displays the Add Group pop-up dialog box.
Enter the name of the user group in the Group Name field.
Note: If you do not register (add) a remote (LDAP, etc.) user group with the
appliance, the users belonging to that user group cannot access the appliance.
Click Save.
The appliance adds the new user group and displays the following message:
Group Added Successfully
The user group is added to the list of users and user groups on the User
Management tab.
Deleting appliance user groups

As a matter of best practice, you should delete a registered user or user group from
the NetBackup appliance before deleting it from the LDAP server, Active Directory
(AD) server, or NIS server. If a user is removed from the remote directory first (and
not removed from appliance), the user is listed as an authorized user but can't log
on.
You can use the User Management tab to delete user groups from the NetBackup
appliance. The following procedure describes how to delete existing user groups.
301

To delete user groups:

Select the user group that you want to delete.
Click on the Delete Group option that is displayed at the end of the User
Management tab.
Group Deleted Successfully
The selected user group is deleted from the appliance and removed from the
User Management tab.
Granting roles to users and user groups

You can use the User Management tab to grant roles to appliance users and user
groups that grant them different types of permissions to access the appliance. The
following procedure describes how to grant roles to existing users and user groups.
To grant administrative roles to users and user groups

Select a user or user group that has NoRole displayed in the Role column.
Click on the Grant Permission option that is displayed at the end of the User
Management tab.
Depending on your configuration, the appliance displays the Grant Permissions
pop-up dialog box:
Select the Administrator option to grant the Administrator user role to the
selected user or user group.
Select the NetBackupCLI option to grant the NetBackupCLI user role to

the selected user or user group.
302

Note: You cannot grant the NetBackupCLI role to an existing local user.
However, you can create a local NetBackupCLI user by using the Manage
> NetBackupCLI > Create command from the NetBackup Appliance Shell
Menu.
The term Administrator or NetBackupCLI is displayed in the Role column
for the selected user.
Revoking roles from users and user groups

You can use the User Management tab to revoke roles from appliance users and
user groups to limit their permissions to access the appliance. The following
procedure describes how to revoke roles from existing users and user groups.
To revoke roles

Select a user or user group that has the Administrator or NetBackupCLI role
displayed in the Role column.
Click on the Revoke Permission option that is displayed at the end of the
User Management tab.
User Un-authorized Successfully
The term NoRole is displayed in the Role column for the selected user or user
group.
Synchronizing the user groups

You can use the User Management tab to synchronize the user group members.
The following procedure describes how to synchronize the user groups between
the appliance and the servers for LDAP, AD, and NIS.
Also you can schedule a sync start time by using the Settings > Security >
Authorization > SyncGroupMembers command in the NetBackup Appliance Shell
Menu. For more information, refer to the NetBackup Appliance Command Reference
Guide.
303

To sync the user groups

Select a user group from the list.
Click on the Sync Group Members option that is displayed on the right top
corner of the User Management tab.
Click Sync to sync user group members immediately.

After the initial configuration, you can change the appliance user password from
the Settings > Password > Password Management page.
Note: For maximum security, Veritas recommends that you set a regular schedule
for password changes and keep a record of all passwords in a secure location.
When the password is changed here, it is also updated for use with the
command-line interface. If you change this password from the command-line
interface, the new password is also used to log on to the appliance user interface.
Table 5-20 describes the data entry fields on the Password Management page.
Table 5-20
Data entry fields for administrator password change
Field
Description
User Name
Enter your current user name.
Old Password
Enter the current password.

If the current password is the factory default password,
enter P@ssw0rd.
304

Table 5-20
Data entry fields for administrator password change (continued)
Field
Description
New Password
Enter the new password.

Valid passwords must include the following:
Eight or more characters
At least one lowercase letter
At least one number (0-9)
Uppercase letters and special characters can be

included, but they are not required.
The following describes password restrictions:
Dictionary words are considered weak passwords

and are not accepted.
The last seven passwords cannot be reused, and
the new password cannot be similar to previous
passwords.
Confirm New Password
Re-enter the new password for confirmation.
Reset Password
Click this item to commit the password change.
Clear Fields
Click this item to remove the data from all fields and start
over.
You can also configure the Password settings using the Main > Settings >
Password commands under the shell menu. For more information refer to the
See About modifying the appliance settings on page 229.
305
Chapter
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting and tuning appliance from the Appliance Diagnostics Center
Viewing log files using the Support command
Where to find NetBackup appliance log files using the Browse command
About password recovery
About disaster recovery
Gathering device logs with the DataCollect command
Setting a NetBackup 5330 storage shelf component to the Service Allowed

mode
Troubleshooting and tuning appliance from the

Appliance Diagnostics Center
You can troubleshoot multiple failures and resolve issues in the NetBackup appliance
by using some interactive self-repair wizards in the Appliance Diagnostics Center.
Each wizard helps you perform specific diagnostic tasks. Some of the wizards also
guide you through system optimization and tuning. These wizards can be accessed
by clicking the Appliance Diagnostics Center icon on the NetBackup Appliance Web
Console. The icon is located on the upper-right corner of the NetBackup Appliance
Web Console and looks like the following:
Troubleshooting
When you click this icon, the Appliance Diagnostics Center page appears where
you can see the Available and the Running Wizard Jobs tab. You can return to
the NetBackup Appliance Web Console by closing this page.
All the troubleshooting wizards are listed under the Available tab.
The Running Wizard Jobs tab lists the wizards that were started but are not
complete yet. If you close a wizard without completing it (using the cross icon) or
leave it unfinished, it is listed under the Running Wizard Jobs tab. You can resume
or delete these active wizards by clicking the respective icons from the Resume or
Delete columns.
You can do the following to run the wizards from the Available tab:
Click Check Disk
Configuration
Use this wizard to troubleshoot disk storage issues, tuning, and

availability. The wizard checks the storage partitions like
AdvancedDisk, etc., and does the following:
Checks if the storage paths are mounted. If they are not mounted,
it provides an option for you to mount them.
Checks if the disk pool and disk volumes are up and running. If
they are not running, the wizard provides an option for you to
reset them.
Checks if PureDisk services are up and running. If they are not
running, the wizard helps to start these services.
Click Collect Log files Use this wizard to collect log files from an Appliance.
The wizard lets you collect different types of log files like NetBackup,
Appliance, operating system, PureDisk, GUI, NBSU (NetBackup
Support Utility), DataCollect etc. Note that it may take several
minutes to collect the NetBackup logs.
Table 6-1 lists details about the log files that are collected by the
wizard.
You can choose to email the log files to recipients, download to your
computer, or upload them to Veritas Support.
Review the following points if you want to email the log files:
Click Test and

diagnose network
issues
SMTP must be configured for emailing the logs. You can

configure SMTP from Settings > Notification > Alert
Configuration in the NetBackup Appliance Web Console.
To email the logs, the collected log size must be 10 MB or less.
Use this wizard to check the network connectivity of your Appliance

with the master server, media servers, storage servers, and clients.
The wizard helps you to quickly test and diagnose network-related
issues.
307
Troubleshooting
Table 6-1 lists the log files that are collected by the Collect Log Files Wizard. The
logs are collected based on the log type that you specify. If you are collecting
NetBackup logs, you can also specify the time frame for which you want to collect
the logs.
Log files collected by the Collect Logs Wizard
Table 6-1
Log Type
What is collected?
NetBackup
Logs created by the NetBackup Copy Logs tool (nbcplogs). These include
the following:
NetBackup legacy logs
NetBackup VxUL (Unified) logs
NetBackup OpsCenter logs
NetBackup PureDisk logs
Windows Event logs (Application, System, Security)
PBX logs
NetBackup database logs
NetBackup database error logs
NetBackup database trylogs
Vault session logs
Volume Manager debug logs
VxMS logs, if enabled
Note: The legacy logs and the VXlogs are collected based on the time
frame that you specify.
308
Troubleshooting
Log files collected by the Collect Logs Wizard (continued)
Table 6-1
Log Type
What is collected?
Appliance
Appliance logs including upgrade, hardware, event logs and so on. The
following Appliance logs are collected:
hostchange.log, selftest_report*
Logs created by the CallhomeDataGather utility.
config_nb_factory.log, iso_postinstall.log, sf.log
patch_*, upgrade_* logs
NetBackup Appliance VxUL (Unified) logs, which include:

All
CallHome
Checkpoint
Common
Config
Database
Hardware
HWMonitor
Network
RAID
Seeding
SelfTest
Storage
SWUpdate
Commands
CrossHost
Trace
Note: The NetBackup Appliance unified logs are not the same as the
NetBackup unified logs, such as nbpem or nbjm. NetBackup Appliance
has its own set of unified logs. To collect the NetBackup unified logs,
select NetBackup in the Collect Logs Wizard.
Operating
system
Operating system logs that include the following:
boot.log
boot.msg
boot.omsg
messages
309
Troubleshooting
Log files collected by the Collect Logs Wizard (continued)
Table 6-1
Log Type
What is collected?
Deduplication
(Media Server
Deduplication
Pool or
PureDisk)
All logs related to Media Server Deduplication Pool (MSDP) are collected
under the following directories:
<DIR> PD
/var/log/puredisk
/msdp/data/dp1/pdvol/log
NetBackup
Appliance
Web Console
All logs related to NetBackup Appliance Web Console logs are collected
under the following directories:
NetBackup
support utility
(nbsu)
Diagnostic information about NetBackup and the operating system.
DataCollect
Hardware and storage device logs. The logs created by the DataCollect
utility are collected.
/log/webgui

You can use the following section to view the log file information.
To view logs using the Support > Logs > Browse command:
Enter browse mode using the Main_Menu > Support > Logs followed by the
Browse command in the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu. The LOGROOT/>
prompt appears.
To display the available log directories on your appliance, type ls at LOGROOT/>

prompt.
To see the available log files in any of the log directories, use the cd command
to change directories to the log directory of your choice. The prompt changes
to show the directory that you are in. For example, if you changed directories
to the GUI directory, the prompt appears as LOGROOT/GUI/>. From that prompt
you can use the ls command to display the available log files in the GUI log
directory.
To view the files, use the less <FILE> or tail <FILE> command. Files are
marked with <FILE> and directories with <DIR>.
See Where to find NetBackup appliance log files using the Browse command
on page 312.
310
Troubleshooting
To view NetBackup Appliance unified (VxUL) logs using the Support > Logs
command:
You can view the NetBackup Appliance unified (VxUL) logs with the Support
> Logs > VXLogView command. Enter the command into the shell menu and
use one of the following options:
Logs VXLogView JobID job_id
Use to display debug information for a specific job ID.
Logs VXLogView Minutes minutes_ago
Use to display debug information for a specific timeframe.
Logs VXLogView Module module_name
Use to display debug information for a specific module.
If you want, you can copy the unified logs with the Main > Support > Logs
> Share Open command. Use the desktop to map, share, and copy the logs.
Note: The NetBackup Appliance unified logs are not the same as the NetBackup
unified logs, such as nbpem or nbjm. NetBackup Appliance has its own set of unified
logs. To collect the NetBackup unified logs, use the Collect Logs Wizard and select
NetBackup.
See Troubleshooting and tuning appliance from the Appliance Diagnostics Center
on page 306.
You can also use the Main_Menu > Support > Logs commands to do the following:
Upload the log files to Veritas Technical Support.
Set log levels.
Export or remove CIFS and NFS shares.
Note: The NetBackup Appliance VxUL logs are no longer archived by a cron job,
or a scheduled task. In addition, log recycling has been enabled, and the default
number of log files has been set to 50.
Refer to the NetBackup Appliance Command Reference Guide for more information
on the above commands.
311
Troubleshooting
Where to find NetBackup appliance log files using the Browse command
Where to find NetBackup appliance log files using

the Browse command
Table 6-2 provides the location of the logs and the log directories that are accessible
with the Support > Logs > Browse command.
Table 6-2
NetBackup appliance log file locations
Appliance log
Log file location
Configuration log
<DIR> APPLIANCE
config_nb_factory.log
Selftest report
<DIR> APPLIANCE
selftest_report
Host change log
<DIR> APPLIANCE
hostchange.log
NetBackup logs, Volume Manager logs, and <DIR> NBU

the NetBackup logs that are contained in the
<DIR> netbackup
openv directory
<DIR> openv
Operating system (OS) installation log
<DIR> volmgr
<DIR> OS
boot.log
boot.msg
boot.omsg
messages
NetBackup deduplication (PDDE)

configuration script log
<DIR> PD
pdde-config.log
NetBackup Administrative web user interface <DIR> WEBGUI

log and the NetBackup web server log
<DIR> gui
<DIR> webserver
312
Troubleshooting
Table 6-2
NetBackup appliance log file locations (continued)
Appliance log
Log file location
Device logs
/tmp/DataCollect.zip
You can copy the DataCollect.zip to
your local folders using the Main >
Support > Logs > Share Open
command.

Veritas understands that there may be situations where you need to recover your
administrator (admin) password. For example, an employee that maintains the
password may leave the company, or you may lose or forget the password.
If any of these situations occur, refer to the following tech note on the Support
website:
http://www.veritas.com/docs/TECH189518
About disaster recovery

Numerous situations can cause fatal conditions and result in the need for disaster
recovery. In a disaster recovery situation, it is critical to determine the cause of the
disaster and recover as much data from the appliance as possible. Therefore, before
you attempt to recover your appliance, contact Technical Support.
The environment that you have configured around your appliance plays an important
role on the level of recovery you can achieve. An environment that consists of a
standalone primary (master server) appliance offers the least amount of recovery
solutions. A failure that is severe enough to bring your appliance down, may mean
that it is impossible to recover the data on the system. Veritas support engineers
work with you to determine whether they can recover your appliance. If your
appliance is not recoverable, then Support may suggest that you rebuild your
appliance. If that option is not feasible, then you may need to replace your appliance
completely.
However, an appliance that is configured with one or more secondary appliances,
or configured with a tape storage unit, there is a much better chance that its data
can be recovered.
You can also configure Auto Image Replication between appliances.
See About Auto Image Replication between appliances on page 223.
313
Troubleshooting
Gathering device logs with the DataCollect command
Veritas recommends that you review the following sections from within the
NetBackup documentation before you operate the appliance:
NetBackup Administration Guide, Volume I
In Section 5, Configuring Backups", review the following topics:

- "Creating backup policies"
- "Protecting the NetBackup Catalog"
- "Strategies that ensure successful NetBackup catalog backups"
Review the topics within Section 3, Configuring Storage".
NetBackup Troubleshooting Guide

Review Chapter 8, "Disaster Recovery" for help with understanding disaster
recovery fundamentals.
The Troubleshooting Guide is located at the following location:
http://www.veritas.com/docs/DOC5332
Gathering device logs with the DataCollect

command
You can use the DataCollect command from the Main > Support shell menu to
gather device logs. You can share these device logs with the Veritas Support team
to resolve device-related issues.
Along with the operating system, IPMI, and storage logs, the DataCollect command
now collects the following logs as well:
Patch logs
File System logs
Test hardware logs
CPU information
Disk performance logs
Memory information
Hardware information
314
Troubleshooting
Setting a NetBackup 5330 storage shelf component to the Service Allowed mode
To gather device logs with the DataCollect command
Log on to the administrative NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
Open the Support menu. To open the support menu, use the following
command:
Main > Support
The appliance displays all the sub-tasks in the support menu.
Enter the DataCollect command to gather storage device logs.

The appliance generates the device log in the /tmp/DataCollect.zip file.
Copy the DataCollect.zip to your local folders using the Main > Support
> Logs > Share Open command.
You can send the DataCollect.zip file to the Veritas Support team to resolve
your issues.
Setting a NetBackup 5330 storage shelf

component to the Service Allowed mode
Before service or replacement can be performed on a Primary Storage Shelf or an
Expansion Storage Shelf, the specific component of the unit must be set to the
Service Allowed mode.
Typically, a failure automatically sets the component of the affected unit to the
Service Allowed mode. When a warning of an impending failure occurs, the
component is not automatically set to the Service Allowed mode. For this situation,
you must set the component to the Service Allowed mode manually, by using the
In the Main_Menu > Support view, two main commands are available:
ServiceAllowed Set PrimaryShelf
This command is used with options to set the appropriate Primary Storage Shelf
component to the Service Allowed mode.
ServiceAllowed Set ExpansionShelf
This command is used with options to set the appropriate Expansion Storage
Shelf component to the Service Allowed mode.
The following describes the available command options for setting a Primary Storage
Shelf component or an Expansion Storage Shelf component to the Service Allowed
mode.
315
Troubleshooting
Table 6-3
Storage unit
Command options
Primary Storage
Shelf
Service Allowed command options
Controller
Set the Service Allowed flag for a Primary Shelf Controller. When you enter this option, you
must also identify the controller location (A/B). The following shows the complete command:
ServiceAllowed Set PrimaryShelf Controller A/B On/Off
FanCanister
Set the Service Allowed flag for a Primary Shelf fan canister. When you enter this option, you
must also identify the fan canister location (Left/Right).The following shows the complete
command:
ServiceAllowed Set PrimaryShelf FanCanister Left/Right On/Off
HDD
Set the Service Allowed flag for a Primary Shelf hard disk drive. When you enter this option,
you must also identify the drawer location (DrawerID) and the disk drive location (SlotNo).
The following shows the complete command:
ServiceAllowed Set PrimaryShelf HDD DrawerID SlotNo On/Off
Note: Before you run this command, first run the Monitor > Hardware ShowHealth
PrimaryShelf RAID command. Refer to the "Precautions and guidelines" section for more
information.
PowerCanister
Set the Service Allowed flag for a Primary Shelf power canister. When you enter this option,
you must also identify the power canister location (Top/Bottom). The following shows the
complete command:
ServiceAllowed Set PrimaryShelf PowerCanister Top/Bottom On/Off
316
Troubleshooting
Table 6-3
Storage unit
Service Allowed command options (continued)
Command options
Expansion Storage
Shelf
ExpansionCanister
Set the Service Allowed flag for an Expansion Shelf canister. When you enter this option, you
must also identify the canister location (Top/Bottom). The following shows the complete
command:
ServiceAllowed Set ExpansionShelf ExpansionCanister Top/Bottom On/Off
FanCanister
Set the Service Allowed flag for a Primary Shelf fan canister. When you enter this option, you
must also identify the fan canister location (Left/Right).The following shows the complete
command:
ServiceAllowed Set ExpansionShelf FanCanister Left/Right On/Off
HDD
Set the Service Allowed flag for an Expansion Shelf hard disk drive. When you enter this
option, you must also identify the exanpsion shelf ID (ExpansionShelfID), the drawer
location (DrawerID), and the disk drive location (SlotNo). The following shows the complete
command:
ServiceAllowed Set ExpansionShelf HDD ExpansionShelfID DrawerID SlotNo
On/Off
Note: Before you run this command, first run the Monitor > Hardware ShowHealth
PrimaryShelf RAID command. Refer to the "Precautions and guidelines" section for more
information.
PowerCanister
Set the Service Allowed flag for a Primary Shelf power canister. When you enter this option,
you must also identify the power canister location (Top/Bottom). The following shows the
complete command:
ServiceAllowed Set ExpansionShelf PowerCanister Top/Bottom On/Off
Precautions and guidelines

Veritas requires that you perform this procedure only with assistance from Veritas
Technical Support. It is important to understand that certain situations can adversely
affect system operation. Care must be taken when you run the Service Allowed
command options.
To keep your system at peak performance, fix each problem as it occurs and do
not let problems accumulate. Multiple problems can degrade system performance
and make servicing the system more difficult. Multiple problems can also increase
the potential for a situation that may cause data loss.
The following describes how the Service Allowed mode may affect the system:
Degraded performance
317
Troubleshooting
318
In some situations, setting a component to the Service Allowed mode can cause
degraded performance. A message appears to alert you of this possibility before
you proceed. For example, when you use the Controller option for the Primary
Shelf, the following message appears:
Support> ServiceAllowed Set PrimaryShelf Controller A on
Service allowed flag is used for component replacement. Setting
this flag may cause performance degradation due to write cache
being turned off.
>> Do you want to continue? (yes, no):
RAID volume status in Degraded state

When you use the HDD option to set a hard disk drive to the Service Allowed
mode, the following message appears:
Support> ServiceAllowed Set PrimaryShelf HDD 1 2 on
Service allowed flag is used for component replacement. Before
you set this flag, run the
'Monitor->Hardware ShowHealth PrimaryShelf RAID' command to
make sure that this Hard Disk Drive (HDD) is in a RAID volume
with a status of Optimal. If the RAID volume status is not Optimal,
executing this command creates a RISK OF POTENTIAL DATA LOSS.
>> Do you want to continue? (yes, no): no
In this situation, the best practice is to enter no. Then you must resolve the
current RAID volume issue to return it to Optimal status. Only then can you
proceed with setting the affected hard disk drive to the Service Allowed mode.
Veritas recommends that before you attempt to set any hard disk drive to the
Service Allowed mode, first run the Monitor > Hardware ShowHealth
PrimaryShelf RAID command. Check to make sure that the hard disk drive
that you want to set to the Service Allowed mode is in a RAID volume with
Optimal status.
Warning: Make sure that you contact and work with Veritas Technical Support
for guidance to avoid any situation that may cause the potential for data loss.
The following procedure describes how to set a Primary Storage Shelf or an
Expansion Storage Shelf component to the Service Allowed mode.
Troubleshooting
To set a Primary Storage Shelf or an Expansion Storage Shelf component to

the Service Allowed mode
Contact Veritas Technical Support and inform the representative that you need
to set a storage shelf component to the Service Allowed mode.
Allow the representative to assist you with the remaining steps that follow.
Log in to the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu.
Enter Main_Menu > Support.
From the list of commands in Table 6-3, enter the appropriate command.
Note: Before you attempt to set a hard disk drive to the Service Allowed mode,
first run the Monitor > Hardware ShowHealth PrimaryShelf RAID command.
Refer to the "Precautions and guidelines" section for more information.
Verify that the component is in the Service Allowed mode by checking that the
blue Service Action Allowed LED on the affected storage shelf is on.
Perform the necessary work on the affected unit.

After the work has been completed and the unit has been restored to normal
operation, the Service Allowed mode is cleared automatically.
319
Chapter
Deduplication pool catalog

backup and recovery
Deduplication pool catalog backup policy
Automatic configuration of the deduplication pool catalog backup policy
Manually configuring the deduplication pool catalog backup policy
Manually updating the deduplication pool catalog backup policy
Recovering the deduplication pool catalog
Deduplication pool catalog backup policy

Creating a backup of the deduplication pool catalog is a very important step in
protecting your data in the event of a disaster. The NetBackup Appliance
automatically creates a policy to backup the deduplication pool catalog. In rare
cases where a policy cannot be created, manual intervention may be necessary.
Caution: Veritas recommends that you contact your Veritas Support representative
before you recover the deduplication pool catalog. The Support representative can
help you determine if you need to recover the catalog or if other solutions are
available.
The following topics provide more information about the deduplication pool catalog
backup policy and the recovery process:
See Automatic configuration of the deduplication pool catalog backup policy
on page 321.
Deduplication pool catalog backup and recovery

See Manually configuring the deduplication pool catalog backup policy on page 324.
See Manually updating the deduplication pool catalog backup policy on page 325.
See Recovering the deduplication pool catalog on page 326.
Automatic configuration of the deduplication pool

catalog backup policy
A policy is automatically created to protect the deduplication storage pool. The
deduplication pool catalog can then be recovered in the event of a disaster. The
deduplication pool catalog backup policy is automatically created in the following
scenarios:
When a deduplication storage pool is created during the initial configuration of

the appliance.
When Manage>Storage>Resize MSDP is run when a deduplication storage pool

did not exist.
When upgrading an appliance that had a deduplication storage pool already

configured.
The deduplication pool catalog backup policy can be viewed once it is created by
one of the above scenarios. Veritas recommends that you activate this policy to
protect the deduplication pool catalog. Protecting the deduplication pool catalog
can prove beneficial in a disaster recovery situation.
If a policy to backup the deduplication storage pool catalog already exists, the
configuration of this policy is updated.
When configuring the deduplication storage pool backup policy, take the following
into consideration:
The residence must be set and should not be local to the appliance.
You can adjust properties such as schedules, frequency, and backup window.
Do not modify the policy type, client name, or backup selection in the policy
properties.
The policy must be activated manually.
The name of this policy is SYMC_NBA_Dedupe_Catalog_<appliance-short-name>

where <appliance-short-name> is the short name you have given to your
appliance.
321

Note: If MSDP storage is not configured during initial configuration, the policy is
not created.
The creation of the policy is automatic so be sure to check the output messages to
make sure that the policy has been successfully created.
Email notifications are sent to the email addresses that have been configured to
receive software alerts. These email addresses are configured through the
NetBackup Appliance Web Console or by running the following command:
Settings>Alerts>Email Software Add.
Table 7-1
Deduplication storage pool catalog backup policy success

messages
Message
Definition
A backup policy, <policy-name>, has been

configured to protect the deduplication pool
catalog. Review the policy configuration and
make changes to its schedules, backup
window, and residence as required. Make
sure to activate the policy to protect the
catalog. For more information, refer to the
NetBackup Appliance Administrator's Guide.
This message is displayed in the following

scenarios:
An existing backup policy, <policy-name>,

has been found that conflicts with the required
deduplication pool backup policy. The policy
type has been updated to 'Standard' to protect
the deduplication pool catalog. The policy
type was set to <previous-policy-type> before
this update.
The policy type of the pre-existing

deduplication pool policy has been updated
to standard. The policy type was set to
<previous policy type>. Review the policy
configuration and make sure that the previous
backup configuration is not affected.
Table 7-2
The deduplication pool catalog backup

policy did not exist and was created
successfully.
The deduplication pool catalog backup
policy has existed and was updated
successfully.
Deduplication storage pool catalog backup policy failure

messages
Message
Definition
Failed to create a deduplication pool catalog

backup policy. The policy is required to
protect the deduplication pool catalog and
recover it in case of disaster. Refer to the
NetBackup Appliance Administrator's Guide
for how to configure the policy manually.
The deduplication pool catalog backup policy

did not exist and the policy creation has failed.
To protect the deduplication pool catalog, you
need to configure the backup policy manually.
See Manually configuring the deduplication
pool catalog backup policy on page 324.
322

Table 7-2
Deduplication storage pool catalog backup policy failure

messages (continued)
Message
Definition
Failed to update deduplication pool catalog

backup policy, '<policy-name>', type to
'Standard.' An existing backup policy has
been found that conflicts with the required
deduplication pool catalog backup policy.
Make sure to update the policy type to
'Standard' manually to protect the
deduplication pool catalog. Refer to the
NetBackup Appliance Administrator's Guide
for how to configure the policy manually.
This message is displayed in the following

scenarios:
Failed to update the client and the backup

selection properties of the deduplication pool
catalog backup policy <policy-name>. Refer
to the NetBackup Appliance Administrator's
Guide for how to configure the policy
manually.
The deduplication pool catalog backup policy

pre-exists but the operation has failed to
update the policy properties, which include
Client and Backup Selection.
The policy already exists and the policy

type is not set to Standard.
The operation has failed to update the
policy type to Standard.

need to change the policy type manually.
See Manually updating the deduplication

need to update the Client and Backup
selection manually.
See Manually updating the deduplication
available.
323

Manually configuring the deduplication pool

catalog backup policy
The following procedure is provided in case the deduplication pool catalog backup
policy is not automatically created. Creating a backup policy to protect the
deduplication pool catalog is critical in protecting your data in the event of a disaster.
Log in to the Appliance with a NetBackupCLI user account.

Enter the following command to create the deduplication pool catalog backup
policy:
# drcontrol --new_policy --policy <policy-name> --hardware
<appliance model> --OS 'NetBackup-Appliance' --log_file ~/<log
file name>
Replace <policy-name> with:

SYMC_NBA_Dedupe_Catalog_<appliance-short-name> where
<appliance-short-name> is the short name you have given to your
appliance.
Replace <appliance model> with the model of the Appliance. For example,
5220, 5230 or 5330.
Replace <log file name> with the name of the log file thedrcontrol tool
creates.
Note: If the drcontrol tool is run without the log file option the tool creates
a file that is not accessible to the NetBackupCLI user. Make sure to choose
a directory accessible by the NetBackupCLI user, such as the home directory
of the NetBackupCLI user.

on page 321.
324

Manually updating the deduplication pool catalog

backup policy
The following procedure is provided in case the deduplication pool catalog backup
policy is not automatically updated. Creating a backup policy to protect the
deduplication pool catalog is critical in protecting your data in the event of a disaster.

Update the policy type. Enter the following command to update the policy type
to Standard:
# bpplinfo <policy-name> -modify -pt Standard
Replace <policy-name> with

SYMC_NBA_Dedupe_Catalog_<appliance-short-name> where
<appliance-short-name> is the short name you have given to your appliance.
Identify the client name:
Determine if the appliance is added as a client by entering the following

command:
# bpplclients <policy-name> -l
If the client has not been added, run the following command to identify the
client name:
# bpgetconfig CLIENT_NAME | cut -f3 -d' '
Update the client and the backup selection by entering the following command:
# drcontrol --update_policy --policy <policy name> --client
<client name> --hardware <appliance model> --OS
'NetBackup-Appliance' --log_file ~/<log file name>
Replace <client name> with the name of the client that is identified in the
previous step.
Replace <appliance model> with the model of the Appliance. For example,
5220, 5230 or 5330.
creates.
325

Note: If the drcontrol tool is run without the log file option the tool creates
a file that is not accessible to the NetBackupCLI user. Make sure to choose
a directory accessible by the NetBackupCLI user, such as the home directory
of the NetBackupCLI user.

on page 321.

This section outlines how to recover the deduplication pool catalog in the event of
a disaster.
available.
Log in to the Appliance with a NetBackupCLI user account

Enter the following command to identify the space requirements:

# drcontrol --print_space_required --policy <policy-name>
--log_file ~/<log file name>
creates.
Note: If the drcontrol tool is run without the log file option the tool creates a
file that is not accessible to the NetBackupCLI user. Make sure to choose a
directory accessible by the NetBackupCLI user, such as the home directory of
the NetBackupCLI user.
Log in to the Appliance as an Appliance Administrator.
Run hardware monitoring commands to make sure that there are no errors.
326

Run hardware self-test to make sure that all hardware components are in place
and functioning correctly.
Run Manage > Storage > Show to make sure that all the storage components
are in place and functional. Also verify that the deduplication pool catalog
partition size meets the space requirements.
If the size requirement is not met, run Manage > Storage Resize MSDPCatalog
to expand the partition.
Perform the catalog recovery using drcontrol and other tools as documented
in the MSDP catalog recovery section of the NetBackup Deduplication Guide.
Note: If the drcontrol tool is run without the log file option the tool creates a
file that is not accessible to the NetBackupCLI user. Make sure to choose a
directory accessible by the NetBackupCLI user, such as the home directory of
the NetBackupCLI user.

on page 321.
327
Index
Symbols
5330 storage shelf component
set to Service Allowed mode 315
A
about
appliance restore 125
checkpoint creation status 133
creating appliance checkpoint 126, 130
Email notification from NetBackup appliance 44
factory reset 146
license key management 158
master server role 14
media server role 15
NetBackup appliances 9
NetBackup documentation 31
rollback to checkpoint 135
supported tape devices and tapes 113
About BMR 123
Active Directory
authentication 293
user management 298
Active Directory user
configure authentication 280
add external robots 113
add user
Active Directory 299
LDAP 299
local 299
NIS 299
add user group
LDAP 301
NIS 301
alert notification
call home 231
SMTP 231
SNMP 231
Appliance console
description 19
Appliance Diagnostics Center 306
appliance log files

Browse command 312
appliance password
change after intial configuration 304
appliance registration
initial configuration for 246
Appliance Restore
management on the NetBackup appliance 125
appliance server or client package
download directly 179
enable BMR 124
Auto Image Replication 223
between appliances and deduplication
appliances 228
AutoSupport
customer registration 247
B
bandwidth
expanding on NetBackup appliance 202
BMR
enable 124
option 124
bond
create 261
bookmarks
using with Appliance 22
Browse command
appliance log files 312
C
Call Home
alerts 237
workflow 241
Call Home proxy server
configuring 240
change
Date and Time Configuration 276
change appliance password 304
Index
change settings
for DNS Configuration 274
changing host configuration 273
Check Disk Configuration wizard 306
client share
download software updates 180
Collect Log files wizard 306
collect logs
commands 310
datacollect 314
log file location 310
types of logs 310
command limitations
appliances not configured 19
common tasks
Appliance 30
configuration
of maximum transmission unit size 203
configure Active Directory
add Active Directory server 294
D
dashboard 28
data buffer
parameters 116
datacollect
device logs 314
Date and Time Configuration
change 276
deduplication
parameters 122
solutions 120
deduplications 5230 120
delete user
LDAP 300
local 300
NIS 300
delete user group
LDAP 301
NIS 301
disable security warnings
on Mozilla 17
disk information
viewing 104
disks
storage 65
DNS Configuration
change settings 274
documentation 31
download directly
appliance server or client package 179
download methods
release updates 178
download NetBackup client packages from NetBackup
appliance 195
download software updates
from NetBackup Appliance Web Console 179
Manage > Software Updates tab 176
using client share 180
E
Email notification
from NetBackup appliance 44
Ethernet ports 254
expand bandwidth
on NetBackup appliance 202
external robots
adding to the NetBackup 5200 113
F
Fibre Transport
option descriptions 265
G
grant permissions 302
guidelines
VLAN configuration 259
H
hardware
monitoring 39
monitoring and alerts on the appliance 35
hardware monitoring and alerts 35
home page 28
host
IPMI 124
host reconfiguration 273
I
initial configuration
for appliance registration 246
install
openstorage plugin 206
329
Index
install software updates

install update from NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu
version 2.7.x 188
install update from NetBackup Appliance Web Console
version 2.7.x 184
IPv4 and IPv6 support 275
L
LDAP
authentication 284
user management 298
LDAP user
license key
management on the NetBackup appliance 158
lifecycle
parameters 116, 120
local user
user management 298
login banner
creating login banner 243
introduction 242
removing login banner 245
login page
NetBackup Appliance Web Console 23
M
Manage
license keys 160
manage
appliance restore 126, 130, 133136, 138139,
142, 146, 150, 153154
license keys 158
Management Information Base (MIB) 237
master server
about role 14
maximum transmission unit size
about configuration for 203
media server role 15
Microsoft Internet Explorer 16
migration
check job status 168
Policy Conversion tab 171
Selection Criteria tab 164
Migration Job Status tab 168
Migration Utility
about 161
monitor
hardware summary 35
NetBackup 52XX configuration 34
montior storage tasks 86
move dialog
storage 78
Mozilla Firefox 16
N
NetBackup
about documentation for 31
NetBackup 5200
adding external robots 113
NetBackup Adminstration Console
download to Windows computer from NetBackup
appliance 197
NetBackup appliance
about appliance restore 125
about Email notification 44
about license key management 158
appliance factory reset 150, 154
appliance rollback validation 138
checkpoint rollback status 142
expanding bandwidth on 202
factory reset status 153
managing appliance restore 126
managing license keys 158
monitoring and alerts 35
rollback appliance 136, 139, 142
login page 23
NetBackup Appliance Web Console login page 23
NetBackup client packages
download from NetBackup appliance 195
NetBackup commands
Auditing accounts 221
Best practices 217
Creating touch files 215
creating users 218
deleting users 222
Known limitations 218
Logging in as administrator 219
manage users 212
Managing passwords 220
OS commands 217
Running commands 214
viewing current users 222
330
Index
NetBackup parameters 114

network
VLAN 250
NFS mount
mount a remote NFS drive 209
mount list 208
unmount 208
Unmount a remote NFS drive 211
NIS
authentication 296
user management 298
NIS user
notifications 237
O
installing plugins 206
uninstalling plugins 207
option descriptions
for Fibre Transport 265
OST plugin
installing plugins 206
uninstalling plugins 207
P
parameters
data buffer 116
deduplication 122
lifecycle 120
partition distribution
on disks 109
partitions
details 72
storage 65
Policy Conversion
change policy for migration 171
privileges
user role 283
R
remove
storage disk 84
resize dialog
storage 76
revoke permissions 303
role
about master server 14
role (continued)
about media server 15
S
scan
storage device 86
Selection Criteria tab
migration 164
self-repair wizards 306
Service Allowed mode
5330 storage shelf component 315
settings
network 250
share
creating 90
deleting 99
editing 94
moving 98
resizing 97
show
disks 100
distribution 100
partitions 100
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 236
SNMP server options 235
options 235
software updates
download from NetBackup Appliance Web
Console 179
storage 35
viewing 101
storage configuration
about 61
storage device
scan 86
storage disk
removing 84
storage partition
moving 78
resizing 74
storage partitions
viewing 108
Symantec Data Center Security
about 45
administration 47
connecting to server 56
filtering audit logs 51
log retention 51
331
Index
Symantec Data Center Security (continued)

managed mode 45, 5356
policy downloads 53, 55
server and console downloads 5354
unmanaged mode 45, 56
view log details 49
Sync member groups 303
T
tag
VLAN 262
tape devices and tapes
about appliance supported 113
Test and diagnose network issues wizard 306
trusted master servers
adding 224
U
uninstall
user
add 281
authorize 281
Kerberos-NIS 280
LDAP 279
local 278
manage role
permissions 282
user authentication
configure 278
guidelines 281
user group
add 281
manage role
permissions 282
user role privileges
NetBackup appliance 283
V
vCenter
credentials 200
version 2.7.x
install update from NetBackup Appliance Shell
Menu 188
install update from NetBackup Appliance Web
Console 184
VLAN
tagging 249
W
WAN optimization
about 254
disable 254, 257
enable 254, 256
status 254, 258
web browser
book marks 22
support 16
332

NetBackup 52xx and 5330 Appliance Admin Guide-2.7.3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NetBackup 52xx and 5330 Appliance Admin Guide-2.7.3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NetBackup 52xx and 5330 Appliance Admin Guide-2.7.3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the document?

What is the purpose of the document?

What topics are covered in the document?

What topics are covered in the document?

Veritas NetBackup

NetBackup 52xx and 5330

Veritas NetBackup Appliance Administrator's Guide

Veritas Services and Operations Readiness Tools (SORT)

About NetBackup appliances ............................................................ 9

Monitoring the NetBackup appliance ........................... 34

Managing a NetBackup appliance from the

About the Migration Utility .............................................................

Managing NetBackup appliance using the

Understanding the NetBackup appliance

Troubleshooting ................................................................ 306

Deduplication pool catalog backup and

Manually configuring the deduplication pool catalog backup

About NetBackup appliances

About the Master Server role

About the Media Server role

About accessing the NetBackup Appliance Web Console

About the NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu

About Appliance console components

About the NetBackup Appliance Web Console login page

NetBackup Appliance home page

Common tasks in Appliance

About the NetBackup Appliance documentation

About NetBackup appliances

As a master server appliance

As a media server for use with an existing master server appliance

As a media server for use in an existing NetBackup environment

As a media server for use with an existing master server appliance

As a media server for use in an existing NetBackup environment

Two interfaces for appliance configuration and management:

The NetBackup Appliance Web Console is a web-based graphical user

The NetBackup Appliance Shell Menu is a command line driven interface.

Copilot enables Oracle database administrators to work with NetBackup

The NetBackup 5330 Appliance supports a second Expansion Storage Shelf.

Backup of VMware virtual machines. NetBackup appliance supports direct

IPv4-IPv6 network support. The NetBackup appliances are supported on a dual

ACSLS Support. This feature facilitates configuration of NetBackup ACS robotics

NetBackup preinstalled. Simplifies the deployment and integration into an existing

Hardware component monitoring. The appliance can monitor key hardware

Flexible hardware configuration. The appliance can be ordered in a variety of

Use AdvancedDisk for

Add the appliance to an existing NetBackup environment

Add more storage capability

Add storage capability to existing NetBackup 7.7.3 and

Built-in appliance disk storage for 52xx appliances

Note: The 5330 appliance does not have internal disk

Additional external storage

The appliance includes a Fibre Channel host bus adapter

About the Master Server role

About the Media Server role

For use with a traditional NetBackup master server

Specify master server

About accessing the NetBackup Appliance Web

Web browsers supported by Appliance

On some server-class systems, an enhanced security configuration can cause

Table 1-1 lists the Web browsers that Appliance supports.